CP1.

2 - Heat networks:
Code of Practice for the UK
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Raising standards for heat supply

2019 Update
Draft v7 (Public comment) January 2018

DRAFT FOR PUBLIC COMMENT

Comments will only be considered if they are on the
feedback form provided – please send these to
CIBSECoP1revision@cibse.org

PROPOSED CHANGES TO THE 2015 VERSION ARE SHOWN

IN GREEN
Current numbering refers to the 2015 version and will be re-
numbered during layout

CP1.2 has an associated set of checklists for documenting

compliance with CP1.2. These are provided in a separate
XLS spreadsheet

Update Authors/Editors
Phil Jones
Paul Woods
Martin Crane

The Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers

The Association for Decentralised Energy
 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Caveats
This document is based on the best knowledge available at the time of publication. However, no
responsibility of any kind for any injury, death, loss, damage or delay however caused resulting from the
use of these recommendations can be accepted by CIBSE, the ADE, the authors or others involved in
its publication. In adopting these recommendations for use, each adopter by doing so agrees to accept
full responsibility for any personal injury, death, loss, damage or delay arising out of, or in connection
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

with, their use by or on behalf of such adopter irrespective of the cause or reason therefore and agrees
to defend, indemnify and hold harmless CIBSE, the ADE, the authors and others involved in their
publication from any and all liability arising out of or in connection with such use as aforesaid and
irrespective of any negligence on the part of those indemnified.

Note from the publisher

This publication is not intended to be exhaustive or definitive and it will be necessary
for users to consult appropriate guidance and to exercise their own professional
judgement when applying the standards contained in the Code.
Any commercial products depicted or described within this publication are included for
the purposes of illustration only and their inclusion does not constitute endorsement or
recommendation by CIBSE or the ADE.

Foreword
This new edition (CP1.2) of the Heat networks Code of Practice is a very significant
update to the 2015 version.
The CIBSE/ADE Heat Networks Code of Practice (2015) has been highly successful
in establishing minimum standards to improve the quality of district heating projects
from concept through to operation. CP1 has also begun to have a strong influence on
the procurement of heat networks and also underpins much of the HNDU and HNIP
work by BEIS.
However, it was always recognised that the Code would need to be updated at
intervals to reflect new experience and understanding, feedback from the industry,
changes in regulations and results from research projects. Probably the most
important update has been to make compliance with CP1 easier to verify and check. A
series of fully integrated checklists now present a more structured and robust toolkit
for checking compliance with CP1.2. It is hoped that this Code will support the
development of a wider heat networks quality assurance scheme, ultimately
contributing to the regulation and decarbonisation of the heat sector.
This document (CP1.2) and the associated checklists set out a major update to CP1
(2015). However, this second edition still remains a work in progress on a longer
journey for the heat networks sector. There is a clear need to gather a more detailed
evidence base and much more work is needed to develop further guidance and
verification in the long-term. But CP1.2 is a very significant step forward and aims to
take the heat network sector to the next level.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 2 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Steering Committee
Phil Jones (Chairman) Lead Author/Editor & BESA HIU committee
Paul Woods Author/Editor & Independent consultant
Martin Crane Author/Editor, Carbon Alternatives & BESA HIU committee
Nick Peake CIBSE (Head of knowledge)
John Bryant ADE
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

George Robinson BEIS

Graham Wenden BEIS
Tim Starley-Grainger LB of Harringey (Formerly BEIS)
Nicky Butterworth BEIS
Ali Bahar Metropolitan
Angela Murphy ADE
Bethan Phillips Verco Global
Chris Parsloe Parsloe Consulting
Colin Taylor ENETEQ
Dave Culver UKDEA (Secretary)
David Hughes (KMC Chair) CIBSE
David Walton BUUK Infrastructure
Dominic Bowers WSP
Gabriel Gallagher Sustainable Energy
Gareth Jones Fairheat & BESA HIU chairman
Huw Blackwell Anthesis & CIBSE CHP-DH Group
Ian Allan Switch 2
Ian Guest Energetik (Enfield)
Julie Godefroy CIBSE
Justin Etherington Buro Happold
Mathew Turner AECOM
Mike Ridge Fairheat (Formerly EoN)
Olof Jangsten RAMBOLL
Paul Barker Bristol City Council
Paul Canning EON & BESA HIU committee
Paul Kay Vital Energi
Rob Hunter L & Q & BESA HIU committee
Thomas Briault ARUP
Valeria Khynykina SSE & BESA HIU committee
William Orchard Orchard Partners
CORRESPONDING MEMBERS
Ross Anderson ICOM/MHENA
Alexandra Ivanchuk REHAU
Ashley Bateson Hoare Lea (CIBSE HFFG)
Bindi Patel Heat Trust
Craig Grobety 3D-TD
Peter North GLA
Colin Judd BSRIA
Jon Greaves Hydro-X
Julian Packer Independent consultant
Mark Whettall CPV
Marko Cosic Coheat
Mike King Independent consultant
Minhaj Mohammed ENGIE & CIBSE CHP-DH Group

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 3 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Neil Davis BEIS (Metering)

Nigel Shapland NHBC
Peter Mildenstein Pinnacle Power
Regis Lopez Scottish Government
Richard Hanson-Graville Thermal Integration
Ross Loveridge Scottish Government
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Simon Woodward UKDEA chairman

Steve Harper Galliard Homes & HIU committee
Gary Edwards Battersea Power Station Development Company

Acknowledgements
The authors would like to thank CIBSE and the ADE for their support in publishing this
updated Code of Practice, and BEIS for funding the work. We would also like to
acknowledge the dedicated voluntary work of the Steering Committee and offer thanks
to all those that contributed their own time in commenting on the Code. We would also
like to thank those organisations that have contributed pictures, figures, data, and
these organisations are separately acknowledged at the end of this document.
Key Contacts
Nick Peake (CIBSE) NPeake@cibse.org 0208 772 3684
Phil Jones philjones100@virginmedia.com 07714 203045

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 4 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Table of Contents
PART A – UNDERSTANDING AND USING THE CODE ........................................................................................... 7
I INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 7
II SCOPE ........................................................................................................................................................ 12
III APPLICATIONS FOR HEAT NETWORKS – CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES ............................................ 15
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

IV KEY THEMES OF THE CODE ........................................................................................................................ 17

V RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................................................... 21
VI CHECKING COMPLIANCE ........................................................................................................................... 25
PART B – THE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 33
1. PREPARATION AND BRIEFING ................................................................................................................ 34
OBJECTIVE 1.1 – TO COMMISSION THE PROJECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CODE OF PRACTICE .............................................. 34
OBJECTIVE 1.2 – TO DEVELOP CONTRACTS THAT ARE FAIR AND EQUITABLE WITH CUSTOMERS ................................................. 36
OBJECTIVE 1.3 – TO DEFINE APPROPRIATE SERVICE LEVELS FOR THE HEAT SUPPLY ................................................................. 38
OBJECTIVE 1.4 - TO DEVELOP A DETAILED CP1 MONITORING PLAN AND FEASIBILITY STUDY BRIEF ............................................ 39
2. FEASIBILITY ............................................................................................................................................ 43
OBJECTIVE 2.1 – TO ACHIEVE SUFFICIENT ACCURACY OF PEAK HEAT DEMANDS AND ANNUAL HEAT CONSUMPTIONS .................... 43
OBJECTIVE 2.2 – TO IDENTIFY THE MOST SUITABLE LOW CARBON HEAT SOURCES AND THE LOCATION OF AN ENERGY CENTRE ........ 46
OBJECTIVE 2.3 – TO DETERMINE THE LOCATION OF TOP-UP AND STANDBY BOILERS AND USE OF EXISTING BOILERS ...................... 50
OBJECTIVE 2.4 – TO SELECT SUITABLE OPERATING TEMPERATURES .................................................................................... 51
OBJECTIVE 2.5 – TO DETERMINE HEAT NETWORK DISTRIBUTION ROUTES, PIPE SIZES AND COSTS .............................................. 55
OBJECTIVE 2.6 – TO DETERMINE BUILDING CONNECTION COSTS, INCLUDING HEAT METERING ................................................. 58
OBJECTIVE 2.7 – TO MINIMISE THE NEGATIVE IMPACTS OF PHASING THE DEVELOPMENT ........................................................ 60
OBJECTIVE 2.8 – TO ASSESS LIFECYCLE OPERATION, MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS, COSTS AND REVENUES ..... 61
OBJECTIVE 2.9 – TO CONDUCT A CONSISTENT ECONOMIC ANALYSIS AND OPTIONS APPRAISAL ................................................. 62
OBJECTIVE 2.10 – TO ANALYSE RISKS AND CARRY OUT A SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS..................................................................... 64
OBJECTIVE 2.11A – TO ASSESS ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ........................................................................... 65
OBJECTIVE 2.11B – TO DEVELOP A COMPREHENSIVE FEASIBILITY STUDY REPORT .................................................................. 67
OBJECTIVE 2.12 – TO CONTRIBUTE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF BUSINESS STRUCTURE, CONTRACT STRATEGY AND PROCUREMENT
STRATEGY ............................................................................................................................................................... 69

3. DESIGN .................................................................................................................................................. 73
OBJECTIVE 3.1 – TO DESIGN FOR SAFETY IN CONSTRUCTION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE AND TO ACHIEVE QUALITY OF DESIGN 73
OBJECTIVE 3.2 – TO ACCURATELY ASSESS AND MINIMISE PEAK HEAT DEMANDS AND ANNUAL HEAT CONSUMPTIONS ................... 75
OBJECTIVE 3.3 – TO SELECT SUITABLE BUILDING INTERFACES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT CONNECTIONS ............................................ 82
OBJECTIVE 3.4 – TO DESIGN OR MODIFY SUITABLE SPACE HEATING AND DOMESTIC HOT WATER SERVICES SYSTEMS ..................... 87
OBJECTIVE 3.5 – TO ACHIEVE AN ENERGY-EFFICIENT PRIMARY HEAT NETWORK .................................................................... 94
OBJECTIVE 3.6 – TO ACHIEVE A LOW COST NETWORK – OPTIMISATION OF ROUTES AND PIPE SIZING FOR MINIMUM LIFECYCLE COST 97
OBJECTIVE 3.7 – TO ACHIEVE A RELIABLE NETWORK WITH A LONG LIFE AND LOW MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ....................... 99
OBJECTIVE 3.8 – TO DEFINE A METERING STRATEGY, SELECT HEAT METERING, PRE-PAYMENT AND BILLING SYSTEMS THAT ARE
ACCURATE AND COST-EFFECTIVE ............................................................................................................................... 104
OBJECTIVE 3.9 – TO ACHIEVE AN EFFICIENT HEAT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WITHIN A MULTI-RESIDENTIAL BUILDING AND TO REDUCE
RISK OF OVERHEATING ............................................................................................................................................ 108
OBJECTIVE 3.10 – TO DESIGN COST-EFFECTIVE AND EFFICIENT CENTRAL PLANT .................................................................. 115
OBJECTIVE 3.11 – TO OPTIMISE THE USE OF THERMAL STORAGE ..................................................................................... 119
OBJECTIVE 3.12 – TO FINALISE THE FINANCIAL ANALYSIS, RISK ANALYSIS AND SENSITIVITIES .................................................. 123
OBJECTIVE 3.13 – TO ASSESS ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND BENEFITS ........................................................................... 125
OBJECTIVE 3.14 – TO COLLABORATE IN ESTABLISHING SCHEME INVESTABILITY ................................................................... 126
4. CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 129
OBJECTIVE 4.1 – TO REDUCE HEALTH AND SAFETY RISKS TO STAFF, CUSTOMERS AND THE GENERAL PUBLIC .............................. 129
OBJECTIVE 4.2 – TO ACHIEVE A HIGH QUALITY HEAT NETWORK CONSTRUCTION TO DELIVER A LONG ASSET LIFE ........................ 131
OBJECTIVE 4.3 – TO PROVIDE A HIGH QUALITY HEAT INTERFACE UNIT (HIU) AND BUILDING CONNECTION CONSTRUCTION TO PROVIDE
GOOD CUSTOMER SERVICE LEVELS ............................................................................................................................. 134

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 5 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

OBJECTIVE 4.4 – TO REDUCE ADVERSE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF CONSTRUCTION ......................................................... 135

5. COMMISSIONING................................................................................................................................. 137
OBJECTIVE 5.1A - TO APPOINT A SUITABLY QUALIFIED COMMISSIONING TEAM WITH A CLEAR COMMISSIONING PLAN ................. 137
OBJECTIVE 5.1B – TO ACHIEVE CONSISTENTLY LOW RETURN TEMPERATURES THROUGH COMMISSIONING BUILDING HEATING
SYSTEMS/CONTROLS ............................................................................................................................................... 138
OBJECTIVE 5.2 – TO PROVIDE HIU/SUBSTATION COMMISSIONING AND HEAT NETWORK BALANCING TO ENSURE DEMANDS ARE MET
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

AT ALL TIMES......................................................................................................................................................... 140

OBJECTIVE 5.3 – TO COMMISSION THE ENERGY METERING AND METER READING SYSTEM TO DELIVER ACCURACY AND CUSTOMER
SERVICE ............................................................................................................................................................... 141
OBJECTIVE 5.4 – TO COMMISSION THE CENTRAL PLANT TO DELIVER AN EFFICIENT AND RELIABLE SERVICE ................................ 143
OBJECTIVE 5.5 – TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH HANDOVER AND SUFFICIENT INFORMATION FOR THE OPERATIONS TEAM .................... 145
OBJECTIVE 5.6 – TO CARRY OUT ON-SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS TO DELIVER AN EFFICIENT AND RELIABLE SERVICE ......................... 146
6. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................... 149
OBJECTIVE 6.1 – TO REDUCE HEALTH AND SAFETY RISKS TO STAFF, CUSTOMERS AND THE GENERAL PUBLIC .............................. 149
OBJECTIVE 6.2 – TO ACHIEVE COST-EFFECTIVE, ACCURATE AND RELIABLE HEAT METERING, PRE-PAYMENT AND BILLING SYSTEMS . 150
OBJECTIVE 6.3 – TO MAINTAIN A HIGH LEVEL OF RELIABILITY AND A LONG LIFE FOR THE HEAT NETWORK ................................. 151
OBJECTIVE 6.4 – TO PROVIDE COST-EFFECTIVE MAINTENANCE OF HEAT NETWORK ASSETS RESULTING IN EFFICIENT OPERATION AND
LONG LIFE............................................................................................................................................................. 153
OBJECTIVE 6.5 – TO PROVIDE APPROPRIATE MONITORING AND REPORTING OF THE WHOLE HEAT NETWORK ............................ 155
OBJECTIVE 6.6 – TO MAINTAIN THE BUILDING CONNECTIONS TO PROVIDE GOOD CUSTOMER SERVICE ..................................... 157
OBJECTIVE 6.7 – TO MINIMISE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ............................................. 158
7. CUSTOMER SATISFACTION AND OBLIGATIONS..................................................................................... 160
OBJECTIVE 7.1A – RESIDENTIAL SCHEME CUSTOMER PROTECTION ................................................................................... 160
OBJECTIVE 7.1B – IN NON-RESIDENTIAL SCHEMES, PROVIDE REPORTS ON ENERGY SUPPLY/USE AND BILLS THAT ARE CLEAR AND
INFORMATIVE........................................................................................................................................................ 162
OBJECTIVE 7.2 – IN NON-RESIDENTIAL SCHEMES, DEVELOP COMMUNICATIONS WITH CUSTOMERS THAT MEET CUSTOMER
EXPECTATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................... 164
OBJECTIVE 7.3 – ENSURING CUSTOMERS ARE AWARE OF THEIR OBLIGATIONS .................................................................... 165
APPENDICES ................................................................................................................................................. 167
APPENDIX A – GLOSSARY OF TERMS .......................................................................................................................... 167
APPENDIX B – EXAMPLE COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE TO ENSURE DESIGN RETURN TEMPERATURES ARE ACHIEVED IN DWELLINGS 173
APPENDIX C – GUIDANCE ON THE USE OF SAP MODELLING OF HEAT NETWORKS ................................................................ 178
APPENDIX D – GUIDANCE ON TYPES OF BUILDING CONNECTIONS AND INTERNAL HEATING SYSTEMS FOR DWELLINGS .................. 179
APPENDIX E – GUIDANCE ON ACHIEVING AN ENERGY-EFFICIENT HEAT NETWORK ................................................................ 188
APPENDIX F – MEASURING PERFORMANCE ................................................................................................................. 191
APPENDIX R – DIVERSITY FACTORS FOR INSTANTANEOUS DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEMS FOR DWELLINGS ............................. 196
APPENDIX X – RECOMMENDED WATER QUALITY PARAMETERS FOR HEAT NETWORKS ........................................................... 200
APPENDIX Y - LEGISLATION ...................................................................................................................................... 203
REFERENCES ......................................................................................................................................................... 210
LEGISLATION ......................................................................................................................................................... 214
FURTHER READING ................................................................................................................................................. 216

A list of Figures and Tables is provided at the end of this document although this currently does not
include newly inserted figures and tables at this stage.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 6 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Part A – Understanding and using

the Code
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

i INTRODUCTION
Overall purpose
The development of heat networks (or district heating) in the UK is increasingly
recognised as an important component in the UK’s future energy strategy (DECC, now
BEIS, 2013) and the decarbonisation of heat. Heat networks can address the ‘energy
trilemma’ by meeting the following strategic aims:
- To reduce greenhouse gas emissions through the use of a wide range of low
carbon and renewable heat sources.
- To improve security of energy supply by diversifying energy sources for heating
and reducing dependence on fossil fuel imports.
- To offer a supply of heat that is good value, offers lowest lifecycle cost and that
contributes to reducing fuel poverty
- To provide a heating service that meets customer needs and offers a high
standard of customer satisfaction by being reliable, efficient and well maintained.
A major challenge will be to deliver a high standard of service to customers who will
have had good long-term experience using gas-fired boilers. Therefore, a high quality
installation offering good reliability, a long life, low carbon intensity of heat supply and
low operating costs will be key. The cost-effectiveness of the heat supply will also
depend on achieving low-cost finance over a long period of time and funders will also
be looking for long-term performance and reliability.
This updated Code of Practice (CP1.2) is therefore written to:
- Improve the quality of feasibility studies, design, construction, commissioning and
operation by setting minimum requirements and identifying best practice options.
- Deliver energy efficiency and environmental benefits.
- Provide a good level of customer service.1
- Promote long-lasting heat networks in which customers and investors can have
confidence.
The Code applies to heat networks designed to supply both new developments and
networks that are retrofitted to supply existing buildings. Although many issues are
common, networks for new buildings require careful design to keep heat losses low
whereas the design of networks for existing buildings is often constrained by the
existing heating systems in the buildings.

1
The Heat Trust scheme (www.heattrust.org), established in March 2015, provides more detail on minimum levels
of customer protection and takes precedence over the Code in this regard

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 7 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

The updated Code

This is a new version of CP1 that addresses:
- Technical issues – enhanced minimum and best practice requirements to
strengthen the Code
- New work – an update to include published work and standards developed since
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

the original Code was written

- Compliance – making the Code easier to verify/check.
The overall structure of the Code remains the same, but a number of new objectives
have been added. A significant number of new minimum requirements and best
practice options have been introduced, with some previous best practice now
becoming minimum requirements. CP1.2 has an associated set of checklists for
documenting compliance with the Code and these are provided in a separate
Microsoft XLS spreadsheet. ‘Key outputs’ have been introduced for each objective in
the document and these are central to the checklists and confirming compliance. The
checklists also include performance metrics/targets and a process for building an
evidence pack to monitor and audit progress throughout a project.
Where a previous (2015) version of CP1 has been used then transition arrangements
should be introduced for projects that are already underway. Where possible, the
latest version of the Code should be used, particularly when beginning a new stage. It
is important that the enhanced checklists, performance targets and evidence pack
approach are introduced as soon as possible. Where appropriate, a transition review
should be carried out to agree when/how to move to the new Code and this may
reveal areas that need additional work.
Where different parts of a scheme are being developed by different organisations,
then it may be appropriate to regard these separately from a CP1 perspective. For
example, different developers for the main heat network, the secondary network and
the tertiary sections may be working at different times or programmes. It might be
appropriate to treat these as separate CP1 projects, but it is essential that someone
(the Client or main technical advisor) has an overview of the whole scheme and its
development as a single entity to provide continuity. It is also key that there is a well-
managed process for sharing information between these different organisations and
schemes.
The Code will be supported by a training and registration programme for those
delivering projects under the Code. Visit the CIBSE website (www.cibse.org/training)
for the latest information.
The Code has been developed to raise standards by setting minimum requirements,
essentially providing a safety-net against poor systems whilst also encouraging best
practice. Overall responsibility for implementing the Code rests with the Client and
there are great benefits to the Client in following CP1. However, Clients need to
implement the Code in a responsible manner to ensure heat networks ultimately
provide customer satisfaction, affordability, longevity and sustainability. In particular,
Clients and their technical advisors need to use the ‘Statement of Applicability’ (see
later) with great care by taking an ‘everything is included’ approach, then justify why
certain aspects are not applicable to their particular scheme.
It is important to recognise that the Code does not provide a comprehensive design
template to be followed. It seeks to set defined minimum requirements whilst allowing

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 8 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

the designer to develop optimal solutions. It does not define optimal designs or
promote particular solutions. The Code does aim to encourage innovation, giving
designers the freedom to go well beyond the minimum requirements. Designers can
depart from the Code if a different approach is shown to offer positive advantages
against the aims of low carbon, cost effectiveness, customer service and security of
supply, but such departures need to be documented and agreed with the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Client/developer/operator.
The structure of the Code
The Code is written to cover all stages of the development cycle of a project from
feasibility through design, construction, commissioning and operation.
The core of the Code is structured as follows:
- The typical sequence of a project by stage from initial brief, feasibility through
design and construction to operation and maintenance.
- For each project stage, a number of objectives are set.
- For each objective a number of minimum requirements are defined to achieve
the objectives.
All of these minimum requirements will need to be met if the project is to comply fully
with the Code, unless clearly defined as not applicable to the particular scheme. The
Code may be used either for the entire project or for a particular stage, but the
greatest value will be obtained when it is followed for all stages.
The Code also includes suggested best practice requirements to encourage Clients
to go beyond basic minimum standards. Clients should review these on an item by
item basis at the beginning of a project to see which they might aspire to, but these
should not be seen as part of basic compliance with CP1. Some Best Practice items
may not be applicable to every scheme.
The project stages are described in Figure 1 which shows the heat networks Plan of
Work from briefing through feasibility, design, construction, commissioning and
operation. The Code is structured around the stages in this Plan of Work and each
section/stage is colour coded to reflect this. The new checklists also follow the same
structure and colour coding. Aiming for high levels of customer satisfaction should
underpin all stages of the project.
Figure 1 also shows the key responsibilities (see Table 1 for further detail) and how
these relate to the major themes set out below. An intrinsic part of meeting the Code
of Practice is to recognise the interlinked nature of the whole process, i.e. it may only
take one weak link for the whole heat network supply chain to fail.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 9 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Themes
A. Correct sizing of
plant and network

B. Achieve low heat network

heat losses

C. Achieve consistently low

return and flow tempera-
tures

D. Use of variable flow

control principles
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

E. Optimise the use of low carbon

heat sources
to supply the network
F. Delivery of a safe, high-quality
Strategic
scheme where risks are managed and
environmental impacts controlled aims:
Provide a
Not
cost-competitive
applicable heat supply
Of some
Operation Customer
importance/
relevance Stages Preparation
and brief
Feasibility Design Construction Commissioning + mainte- expectations/ Maintain a
high level of
Important/ nance obligations
relevant
reliability in heat
Highly
supply
important/
relevant
Reduce CO2
Responsibilities emissions and
energy usage
Client

Designer

Constructor The Association for

Decentralised Energy

Operator

Customer
Figure 1 - Typical Plan of Work for a heat network project (reproduced courtesy of Phil Jones)
Update Figure 1 – line E, reduce stage 1and increase stage 5 and 6
Update Figure 1 – Theme C achieve consistently low return temperatures and optimised flow
temperatures
This Heat networks plan of work is similar to the RIBA plan of work shown in Figure
AAA.

Figure AAA – The RIBA Plan of Work

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 10 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

A successful heat network project will only be realised when the key design principles
have been properly considered and implemented from initial briefing and feasibility
through to operation in an integrated manner.
This is often made more difficult by the fragmented nature of the industry and the
procurement of schemes. It is common to find that the feasibility work is carried out by
a consultant, the detailed design and construction by a design and build contractor
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

and the operation and maintenance by a separate operating company. The

procurement approach should consider the risks involved in this fragmentation and the
lack of incentives for each party involved to deliver an optimal scheme. Where such
separation cannot be avoided, the Code of Practice and evidence pack should assist
in achieving a more optimised integrated design that ensures operational costs are
fully taken into account in the design/development stages and that the system is
correctly commissioned prior to the operational phase. This Code of Practice aims to
identify minimum standards and Key Performance Indicators (KPI’s) that will help to
address some of these issues. The Code shows what ‘good’ looks like and arms
Clients to be able to achieve this by including the correct incentives throughout the
procurement and contract management process.
Heat networks can have very different procurement routes and timing with
responsibility often changing throughout the project lifecycle. Even ownership of the
project can change, requiring handover of responsibility for the project and CP1
compliance. Two example procurement routes ‘Traditional’ and ‘Design, Build,
Operate & Maintain’ are shown in Figure RRR alongside the likely changes to Client
and ownership throughout. This only presents two examples, but it does indicate just
how procurement can be very different across a range of heat network schemes. See
section (vi) on how to approach changes in ownership etc. The CP1.2 Evidence Pack
builds an audit trail throughout the project and provides transition/handover between
different stage and ownerships.

Figure RRR – Typical examples of project programmes for different procurement routes showing timing,
activities and ownership (Courtesy of BEIS)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 11 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

The Code is designed to be as prescriptive as possible around the minimum

requirements so that heat networks achieve minimum acceptable standards. However,
it is recognised that an important duty of the designer is to identify options for decision
by the Client body, together with the costs and benefits for each option. In most cases,
within each objective further information is provided on what could represent best
practice, which the various parties should also consider adopting.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Each stage of the project will have complied with the Code when it has been
demonstrated that all minimum requirements have been met. However, the complexity
and variety of heat networks means that alternative solutions that do not meet all of
the minimum requirements can also be used and will be compliant provided a
justification of any non-compliance is made to demonstrate that the overall strategic
aims stated above are still being met.

ii SCOPE
What is a heat network?
In order to understand the scope of the Code it is essential to understand what a heat
network actually is. A heat network usually refers to the flow and return pipes that
convey the heat from the energy centre to the customers. The pipes are frequently
buried but may be above ground or within buildings. Heat Networks include both
communal heating and district heating:
Communal heating is defined as a single building served with more than one
customer (the building does not need to contain the plant).
District heating is defined as more than one building being served where the building
owners are not necessarily the asset owners.
The following terminology has been used throughout this Code in order to identify the
different parts of the overall heat network:
- Primary heat network – the distribution pipes connecting the energy centre to
buildings – mostly buried pre-insulated pipe
- Secondary systems – the pipes within the buildings, and up to the dwelling in
residential blocks, even if there is no hydraulic break installed
- Tertiary systems – the dwelling internal circuits, radiators etc, even if there is no
hydraulic break installed.
This is shown in Figure BBB1. Non-domestic buildings are generally served from a
primary and secondary system. Individual houses are served from a primary and
tertiary system. Blocks of apartments are served from primary, secondary and tertiary
systems.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 12 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Tertiary
heat
Primary network
heat
network Secondary
heat
network

Figure BBB1 – Component parts of a heat network (Courtesy of Max Fordham & Partners)
(Re-draw BBB1 to show some horizontals as secondary, before entering tertiary (also Fig BBB2))
(Re-draw BBB1 to show some individual house and a second block without HIUs (also Fig BBB2))

Use and scope of the Code

The scope of the Code is designed to cover all scales of heat networks – in principle
any project that involves the linking of heat supply to more than one dwelling or more
than one building. The Code is intended to cover all types of scheme for both existing
buildings and new buildings, and for residential, commercial or institutional buildings.
The key issues that impact on each of these sectors are discussed in Section (iii).
The Code is not intended to provide general design guidance, rather it aims to set
minimum standards. The user should consult published guidance that is available and
in particular the References and Further Reading sections of this Code.
Appendix Y of the Code includes a summary of legislation that is likely to be
encountered in the course of developing a heat networks project. This is provided for
general guidance and readers should consult the latest position directly from
government sources.
Central plant
Although the emphasis in the document is on the development of the heat network
itself, reference is also made to minimum requirements for the heat source at the
central plant or energy centre in as far as this impacts on the overall heat network
system. More detailed guidance for the design of energy centre plant can be found in
other documents published by CIBSE and other bodies (see References/Further
Reading).
The Code excludes requirements for the building to house the energy centre plant or
other equipment and associated building services where the Building Regulations
need to be followed.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 13 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 2 - Queen Elizabeth Olympic Park, which features an 18 km district energy network

District cooling
The Code does not set requirements for district cooling (DC) as such systems are
generally of a more bespoke nature supplying specific buildings. However, where
appropriate, mention is made of district cooling systems where the requirements in
this Code are equally applicable to DC or to highlight design issues that are unique to
DC. Guidance on the design of DC is available from ASHRAE District Cooling Guide
(ASHRAE, 2013) reflecting the greater use of DC in the USA.
4th and 5th generation heat networks
This edition of the Code does not set specific requirements for low temperature 4th
generation heat networks or ultra-low temperature 5th generation systems including
‘ambient loops’. Although much of this Code is applicable to these systems, there will
be areas where very particular minimum standards will be required. We anticipate that
future editions of the Code, and supporting guidance documents, will cover 4th and 5th
generation heat networks. Outline definitions of 3rd, 4th and 5th generation District
Heating and Cooling (DHC) systems are provided below.
3rd Generation DHC - Traditional centralised topology with energy centre(s) supplying
heat outwards to buildings. Supplying at around 90-60ºC and return temperatures at
around 50-40ºC, 3DHC would generally consist of well insulated, pre-insulated
pipework with significant centralised thermal storage. 3DHC can supply DHW directly,
but cooling would be a separate system. No interchange of heat between buildings is
possible.
4th Generation DHC - Traditional centralised topology with energy centre(s) supplying
heat outwards to buildings. Supplying at around 55-45ºC with a wider ΔT and return
temperatures at around 25-15ºC, 4DHC would generally consist of highly insulated,
pre-insulated pipework that is more likely to be plastic, with very large centralised
thermal storage. 4DHC will usually need supplementary boosting to supply DHW, and
cooling would be a separate system. No interchange of heat between buildings is
possible.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 14 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

5th Generation DHC - Is a non-traditional topology with decentralised plant (usually

heat pumps) supplying heat along ultra-low temperature headers in a spine/backbone
(ambient loops may be possible in smaller systems). Supply at <45ºC, the ΔT is less
relevant with return temperatures around 25-15ºC. 5DHC often consists of un-
insulated plastic pipework with very low heat losses and longer pipe runs. 5DHC
usually includes seasonal thermal storage and perhaps some short term localised
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

thermal storage. 5DHC will always need supplementary boosting to supply DHW
temperatures. 5DHC has built-in cooling supply and can interchange heating/cooling
between buildings.

iii APPLICATIONS FOR HEAT NETWORKS –

CHALLENGES AND OPPORTUNITIES
New-build applications
For new-build applications the major consideration is usually how the heat network
can contribute to meeting planning policies, Building Regulations and other Client
requirements, e.g. those defined by reference to the BREEAM standard or similar
scheme for dwellings or communities.
New buildings will have much higher standards of fabric insulation and air-tightness
than existing buildings. Consequently, the heat losses from the network will be more
significant as a proportion of the total heat supplied. This needs careful consideration
in the design to minimise such heat losses to reduce operating costs and limit impact
of summer overheating in blocks of flats. In this context the heat network is not just the
buried primary network between any residential blocks, but also the secondary
pipework from any block entry point up to each dwelling. Indeed, it is this latter
element which contributes most to heat losses and poor design can lead to not just
excessive heat losses but also over-heating of corridors/common areas.
New buildings offer important opportunities to utilise lower operating temperatures, as
the new heating systems can be designed accordingly, with consequent benefits of
lower network losses and more efficient central plant.
At the feasibility stage it can be difficult to estimate the peak heat demands and
annual heat consumption with accuracy as reliance must be made on modelling, often
with limited information. Wherever possible the designer should check estimates
against operational data from similar schemes.
The project is likely to be developed in phases and full occupancy may not be
achieved initially so the heat demand will build up slowly over time. In some prestige
London developments occupancy levels are low and this may impact negatively on
the operation of the scheme for some years to come. This leads to a need for designs
to future-proof heat networks to provide for future flexibility without significantly
increasing the costs for the early phases.
Ensuring suitable customer protection is key to any new heat network because they
are effectively unregulated monopolies. Key to the success of networks generally will
be the development of suitable customer protection, some of which has been
incorporated in the Heat Trust scheme. Providing clear information on heat prices,
predicted heating costs and comparisons with alternative heating systems will be
important to achieve customer satisfaction. Clients, designers and operators need to

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 15 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

ensure that heat network operating costs are minimised, so that the heat charges to
customers are fair, and not higher than the counterfactual.
Retrofit applications
In retrofit applications, heat demands can often be estimated using actual fuel-use
data.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Heat network operating temperatures will typically be determined/constrained by the

highest temperatures used in certain buildings. Working with these building owners/
operators to reduce operating temperatures will benefit the whole scheme. What may
have become common operating practice in an existing building may not align with the
original design criteria. The building itself may have been upgraded, reducing the heat
demand, enabling lower temperatures to be adopted with no loss of service.
A suitable location for a central plant (and with room for future expansion) is often
difficult to find in retrofit situations, especially in a city centre area, although
consideration should always be given to using distributed peak and standby capacity
and existing boilers to reduce the space needed at the energy centre.
Without the policy support from planning or defined Client requirements commonly
found with new-build, customers are only likely to connect with a clear commercial
benefit, although in some sectors the low carbon intensity of heat supplied from the
network will also be a factor in the decision.

Figure 3 - Existing buildings supplied by a new heat network – Stafford Cripps Estate, Islington

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 16 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Mixed developments of new and existing

Mixed developments are seen where the new development is subject to policies which
promote heat networks, and which can then be used as a catalyst to initiate a heat
network to supply adjacent existing buildings. Alternatively, some schemes have
started by serving existing buildings such as council offices and then extended to
supply adjacent new developments.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

The developer of the new-build may have to provide additional space on site for plant
to supply a wider area, but again consideration should be given to using the boiler
plant in existing buildings for top up and standby.
The design of the wider network may impose constraints on the new development that
may not be optimal, e.g. higher operating temperatures. However, there may also be
opportunities to use the return water from the existing development as the flow circuit
to the new.
Commercial and contractual issues are typically more complex in mixed
developments. However, for any heat network to grow in the long-term it will naturally
contain a mix of new and existing buildings and therefore this should not be
considered an insurmountable obstacle.

iv KEY THEMES OF THE CODE

The principal ways in which the high level strategic aims of the Code are achieved
through the following broad themes that run throughout the whole document and need
to be considered in each stage of the project:
A. Correct sizing of plant and network
When dealing with unfamiliar technology, designers will be naturally cautious, and this
can give rise to conservative designs that are more costly and have lower
performance. However, it is also necessary to consider the potential for expansion of
the scheme to adjacent buildings especially when planning energy centre layouts and
sizing the primary network branches. Establishing a balance between sensible future-
proofing and disadvantageous oversizing is an important strategic consideration.
B. Achieving low network heat losses
There is evidence that network heat losses in many schemes are higher than they
should be, especially for distribution systems within newly constructed apartment
blocks. The economic and environmental impact of network heat losses depends on
the type of heat source – if this is a low carbon and low cost source there would be
less impact than for a high cost or high carbon source. However, in most cases, high
heat losses will lead to higher carbon emissions, higher operating costs and a higher
risk of overheating, so designers need to adopt approaches that reduce the heat
losses as far as practical.
C. Achieving consistently low return temperatures and
optimising flow temperatures
Designing a low return temperature system will reduce peak volume flow rates leading
to smaller pipes, lower heat losses and reduced pumping energy. Maintaining low
return temperatures under part-load conditions is important to keep heat losses and

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 17 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

pumping energy low. This requires removal of any bypass flows unless they are
thermostatically controlled. Also, if the design return temperatures are not achieved in
practice then the heat network capacity will be reduced.
- In existing buildings, the sizing of the existing heating systems will constrain the
choice of temperatures.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- In new developments, the designer has the opportunity to optimise the

operating temperatures.
Achieving low return temperatures requires the correct selection and balancing of
radiators, other heat emitters within the building and associated control valves. This is
often the responsibility of the building owner/designer and not the heat network
owner/operator.
The flow temperature for peak and part-load conditions needs to be optimised, taking
account of both the heat network and the heat sources. Lower flow temperatures may
result in a more efficient heat source e.g. where heat pumps are used. However, a
lower flow temperature for peak design conditions increases network costs as the
delta T is smaller and so pipe sizes are larger. Larger pipe sizes will have higher heat
losses for a given fluid temperature. The combination of wide delta T to reduce pipe
sizes, and reducing the flow temperature at part-load in order to minimise heat loss,
will lead to good heat network efficiency.
D. Use of variable flow control principles
Using variable flow control systems will result in lower flow rates and lower return
temperatures at part-load. Variable speed pumps should be used, and should be
controlled such that the pump pressure differential reduces at part-load to a level just
sufficient to maintain minimum design pressure differentials at the extremities of the
network. This important control principle will reduce heat losses and pumping energy.
E. Optimising the use of low carbon heat sources to
supply the network
A primary driver for using heat networks is to enable low carbon heat sources to be
used. These need to be sized to deliver a high proportion of the annual heat demand.
The control systems and any thermal storage should be designed to maximise the
contribution of low carbon heat and to ensure the efficient and cost-effective operation
of these heat sources. Economic optimisation is key. Design and specification of many
elements of the heat network, but particularly the main heat sources and thermal
storage, should be driven by economic evaluation to establish which option results in
lowest lifecycle cost.
F. Delivery of a safe, high quality scheme where risks are
managed, and environmental impacts controlled
At all stages from feasibility through to operation, safety, quality and environmental
impacts need to be a priority. This could involve the adoption of international
standards: ISO 9001 for quality management, ISO 14001 for environmental
management, ISO 18001 for occupational safety and ISO 31000 for risk management.
In addition, the Asset Management Standard PAS 55 is relevant for the development
and operation of the scheme. The PAS 55 standard ‘provides objectivity across 28
aspects of good asset management, from lifecycle strategy to everyday maintenance
(cost/risk/performance). It enables the integration of all aspects of the asset lifecycle:

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 18 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

design, acquisition, construction, commissioning, utilisation or operation,

maintenance, renewal, modification and/or ultimate disposal.’
G Customers should be provided with affordable heat and a
reliable service
Heat networks are natural monopolies and are currently unregulated. It is essential
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

that all heat network customers have access to dependable heat supplies and
excellent customer service. Issues relating to the quality of heat networks, particularly
reliability, have the potential to cause serious harm to customers. Also, the
affordability of heat depends on the overall efficiency and life cycle costs of district
heating. A recent report by The UK Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) (2018)
recommend that heat network customers should be provided with similar protections
available to customers in the gas and electricity sectors. Setting clearly defined levels
of customer service is key to addressing this problem. Delivering affordable heat
through a reliable service that gives customer satisfaction is one of the ultimate goals
for any heat network and is a theme that runs right throughout this Code.
______________

By focusing on these themes throughout the project the heat network will be better
able to deliver efficient, cost-effective and low carbon heat to customers.
Figure 3 shows some of the typical features within each part of the system that are
needed for an efficient heat network. Further guidance on the design of heat networks
can be found in the References and Further Reading sections of this Code and
especially in:
- Heat Networks Design Guide (Parsloe Consulting, 2018)
- Guidelines for Connecting to Heat Networks (LB of Islington 2015)
o Part 1 - A guide for developers and building owners
o Part 2 – A guide for building services designers
- District Heating Manual for London (GLA, 2014)
- Community-led heat projects: a toolkit for heat networks (Regen SW for DECC
2016)
- Assessment of the costs, performance and characteristics of UK heat networks
(DECC 2015)
- Technical Guide to District Heating (BRE, 2014)
- AM12: Combined heat and power for buildings (CIBSE, 2013)
A series of case studies on different types of heat networks can be found in Heat
Networks Investment Project: Case Studies
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/heat-network-case-studies

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 19 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 4 - Some typical features of a heat network (lower section will be removed)
Note: this figure is provided for illustrative purposes only. Alternative arrangements/components are
permitted within the Code, including the use of direct connection and other energy centre
arrangements.
Note: this schematic is provided for illustrative purposes only and was included to show the main
components that a DH system might include. Alternative arrangements are permitted within the Code,
including the use of direct connection and other energy centre arrangements (see also CIBSE AM12
and CIBSE AM15) This diagram is only INDICATIVE and does not form part of the minimum standards
in Part B.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 20 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

v RESPONSIBILITIES
A typical heat network project involves a number of different organisations that all
need to work together to achieve a successful scheme. In general, the responsibilities
will be clear from the context of the Requirements. The Code needs to be adopted by
all parties involved in developing and operating the heat network and should not
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

simply be made a contractual requirement on one party. The CP1.2 Evidence Pack
builds an audit trail throughout the project and provides transition/handover between
the different parties involved.
Each project will be different, but Table 1 describes some of the typical responsibilities
that may be carried out by each organisation.
Table 1 – Some of the typical responsibilities during a heat network project

Organisation Responsibility

Central government • Central government sets overall heat policy, develops appropriate
incentive mechanisms and works to remove barriers to heat
networks

Local government • Local government promotes the strategic vision and develops
supporting policies especially in relation to planning to enable
(Including devolved and combined local connections. Local government may also be able to
authorities) overcome land ownership issues where multiple owners would
hinder the development of a single network

Client or Owner/Developer of the • Take ownership of the scheme development process and make
heat network key decisions to progress the project
(This may be a local authority, a • Define strategic scope and future-proofing requirements for the
housing association, building systems
management organisation, a • Agree Key Performance targets for the scheme
private sector ESCo, a public- • Appoint the principal designer and principal contractor under the
private partnership or a community CDM Regulations
energy company)
• Appoint project team
• Arrange finance
(The role of the developer and/or • Lead the planning application process
owner may change throughout the
• Lead on compliance, planning conditions/obligations, post
project, see Figure RRR)
planning approval
• Commission a feasibility study
• Commission the designer
• Appoint the construction contractor
• Develop and sign the contracts for construction, operation and
heat sales
• Comply with the Heat Network (Metering and Billing) Regulations
2014

Client or Owner/Developer of new • Determine future peak demands (by the project design team) and
buildings agree with the heat network operator
• Estimate projected annual consumptions and heat demand
profiles where possible (by the project design team) and agree
with the heat network operator
• Define design operating temperatures for the building services
and losses in the secondary network and agree with the heat
network operator

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 21 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

• Ensure that the need for low return temperatures under all load
conditions is understood by the design and construction teams
• Establish phasing plan for the development
• Lead the planning application process for the new buildings
• Lead on compliance, planning conditions/obligations, post
planning approval
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

• Commission the building services correctly

• Operate the building in accordance with the heat network operator
recommendations (or instruct their facilities manager to do so)
• Consider whether the scheme could also supply adjacent
buildings to bring added value
• Agree connection and supply agreements with larger heat
networks
• Ensure arrangements for onward supply of heat to customers are
in place, where necessary

Owner of existing buildings • Determine current and future peak demands and agree with the
heat network operator, taking account of any planned energy
efficiency measures
• Estimate projected annual consumptions and heat demand
profiles where possible, and agree with the heat network operator,
taking account of any planned energy efficiency measures
• Determine opportunities to modify the building’s heating system
and its operation to benefit the heat network
• Ensure arrangements for onward supply of heat to final customers
are in place, where necessary

Technical Feasibility study • Identify scope and extent of heat network along with any scope
consultant gaps
• Survey existing buildings
• Determine peak demands and annual consumptions and provide
an independent view of these
• Masterplanning to establish clusters/phasing and potential
connection routes
• Develop concept design and operational philosophy
• Estimate projected annual consumptions
• Evaluate existing, new and future heat sources
• Preparation of capital expenditure and operational expenditure
estimates
• Determine future cost of heat
• Whole lifecycle cost analysis and preparation of an investable
business case
• Establish environmental benefits and impacts
• Identify key planning issues
• Develop outline risk register and mitigation strategies
• Produce a common strategy, requirements and specifications that
are to be applied to all future stages/phases
• Work with the legal and financial feasibility consultants to develop
an investable business case
• Recommend preferred design options and associated
performance targets

Legal & financial advisors Workstreams (defined outside CP1) are likely to cover:

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 22 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Detailed consideration of these • Development of technical advisors' economic model into a full
legal and financial workstreams is financial model which examines the project in nominal terms,
beyond the scope of this Code inclusive of tax and allows for options depending on commercial
which is a technical compliance and funding structures
document. However, it is worth • Advice on availability of different sources of funding available to
noting: different commercial structures
• Heat network projects are • State Aid advice including consideration of the General Block
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

expected to include legal and Exemption Regulation

financial advisors alongside • Commercial advice around structuring of heat network business
technical advisors to ensure including consideration of exit strategy and development of
schemes are investible. strategies for procurement, heat pricing and
• The technical workstream will developing/negotiating contractual terms as necessary
intersect with the legal and • General legal advice around planning, property law, procurement
financial workstreams in a regulations, consumer protection, competition law, Heat Network
number of areas (notably see Metering and Billing Regulations, etc.
Objectives 2.12 and 3.14)
• For public sector bodies, advice on statutory powers (e.g. Local
Authority powers to operate heat networks) and constraints
arising from public procurement
Technical/legal crossover will include areas such as:
• KPIs and accompanying SLAs with the design, build,
commissioning and operation of the network and its associated
assets
• Planning compliance for air quality and acoustic impacts of the
scheme plus other compliance issues e.g. H&S and Building
Control
Technical/financial crossover will include areas such as:
• The capital cost of the scheme and therefore the funding
requirement
• Analyse where operating costs can be reduced to deliver a
scheme with a reduced whole life cycle cost i.e. analyse where
higher efficiency plant can be used to ensure low operation and
maintenance costs
• The operating cost of the scheme - how volatile are those costs
and how can volatility be managed (e.g. through contractual
arrangement)
• The operating performance of the scheme - how sensitive are the
scheme's economics to unplanned operating outcomes (e.g.
worse distribution losses, unplanned outages, less operating
capacity than forecast, compliance with scheme rules for financial
incentives, etc.)
• The tariff, connection charges, developer contributions, power
revenues etc. that make up the revenue stack
All three roles intersect in commercial areas such as:
• Procurement strategy (technical advice could cover route to
market, contractor capabilities, sub-contracting, cost control,
packaging of contracts, etc.
• Legal and commercial structures can have technical issues e.g.
commercial separation may influence hydraulic separation which
has technical pros and cons

Heat network designer • Produce designer’s health and safety risk assessments
• Design to achieve a cost-effective and efficient network
• Select optimum routes and resolve infrastructure obstacles
• Select pipe types/trenching methods

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 23 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

• Specify quality requirements including developing KPIs and SLAs

• Check design intent is implemented through construction
• Assist in the planning application process
• Make allowance for future expansion, e.g. design in valved and
capped tees
• Make allowance for future changes in network operating
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

temperature and the impact on pipework sizes, heat exchangers

etc.
• Make allowance for future low carbon heat sources
• Prepare a commissioning plan/programme

Heat network construction • Manage health and safety on site

contractor • Quality control of installation
• Liaise with other utilities and highways authority, building control
and other regulatory bodies (e.g. Environment Agency)
• Liaise with designer for route variations and ensure stress
analysis is carried out on any changes

Commissioning contractor • Develop and conduct detailed commissioning procedures to

ensure the design intent is realised and enable a smooth
handover to the operational phase

Heat network operator and • Health and safety for operatives, customers and the public
maintenance contractor • Provide input and advice during design development and
construction
• Provide a reliable heat service
• Operate a procedure for handling customer complaints
• Maintain water treatment
• Maintain energy centre plant and equipment in accordance with
Planned Preventative Maintenance (PPM) schedules
• Operate the system in accordance with the design
• Continually monitor and review the system for efficient operation
• Lifecycle maintenance and repair of plant
• Monitor network alarms and rectify faults
• Maintain statistics and provide reports
• Provide billing, operational information to customers

Heat supplier • Develop heat supply contracts especially with anchor customers
that may have long-term contracts
• Service provided may be in compliance with the Heat Trust or
equivalent scheme
• Metering and billing of customers
• Provide customers with good information and instructions
• Credit risk for non-payment

Final customer for the heat • Enter into contracts for the purchase of heat and recognise and
fulfil their own obligations under the contract

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 24 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

vi CHECKING COMPLIANCE
Key outputs and Client checklists
The very existence of the Code begs the question ‘how does the Client check that the
Code of practice has been met?’ The Code therefore includes a series of key outputs
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

in each of the objectives and these are to be used as checks to prove compliance.
The Code also has a set of associated checklists in Microsoft Excel to allow Clients to
check that outputs have been produced, and that expected performance is being met.
The checklists are on a stage-by stage basis and an example from stage 1 is shown in
Figure CCC.

Figure CCC – Example from the CP1 Code checklists

This checklist approach provides a methodology for Clients and their advisors to
assess ‘has the Code been met’. It is hoped that this will provide a further step change
for the sector in proving that schemes have been designed, built and operated to the
minimum standards. This should give confidence to developers, investors, and
customers that their scheme is of high quality and will provide low cost, low carbon

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 25 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

heat. In particular, it should underpin investment decisions and ensure operational

outcomes.
This checklist approach helps build an evidence pack across all the stages of
development to help integrate the supply chain. The checklists also include
performance measurement throughout the whole development process by Clients
setting initial targets and then monitoring against these at each stage. Clients may
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

wish to use registered heat networks assessors/auditors (details can be found at

www.cibseenergycentre.co.uk) to check that the checklists/processes have been
completed correctly. However, experienced heat network experts may also be called
upon to advise on detailed technical issues that arise, and the modifications required
to mitigate these. We also anticipate a future market for self-assessment and for
assessment by third parties under a relevant QA scheme. The combination of audits,
checklists, an evidence pack and performance measurement should result in better
heat networks and greater confidence for developers/investors. The stage by stage
use of the performance monitoring and the evidence pack is shown in Figure DDD.

Figure DDD – Continual performance monitoring and use of the evidence pack

Use of the Code is voluntary and in order for standards to be raised, Clients need to
specify its use in briefs and contracts. The Client Checklists are an integral part of
proving compliance and support the overall aims of the Code by:
- encouraging the setting of performance targets by the Client at the outset of a
project which should be agreed by all parties involved and tracked throughout the
project
- allowing the Client and suppliers to record actual measured performance and
confirm that it meets the agreed targets
- allowing the Client and suppliers to record the completion of the Code’s
Objectives and to gather evidence of this into an Evidence Pack (which can then
be passed onto the next Stage of the project)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 26 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

There may be some Objectives within the Code which cannot be identified as fully
completed at the end of the Stage they occur in, as ongoing monitoring/measurement
is required. For example, only in-use performance will ultimately confirm that targets
have been met or not. In these instances, the checklist should be used to record that
reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the Minimum Requirements have
been met.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

It is the Client’s responsibility to use these checklists in a responsible and appropriate

manner. CIBSE and the ADE bear no responsibility for the performance of a heat
network at any stage or for the advice or recommendations made by individual
assessors on any particular project.
It is the Client’s responsibility to set the performance targets. Please note that the
performance targets agreed will vary according to specific project requirements (such
as connection to existing buildings or allowing for future development) and care needs
to be taken when comparing different schemes.
How to use the checklists
The checklists can be used by Clients as a tool to monitor and enforce use of the
Code. This could be done for individual stages and/or across an entire project. Below
is a suggested process:
1. The Client decides to apply the Code across a heat network project. At the
outset a clear brief and performance targets are agreed for the project and
suppliers agree to adhere to the Code. The Client should also make it clear
what Best Practice items are to be included in the design. A 'Statement of
Applicability’ should also be developed to identify aspects not covered by the
particular scheme and any best practice that the Client requests.
2. Optionally at this stage, the Client could employ a Registered Heat Network
Assessor (or other qualified third party) to complete these checklists and
oversee the project, including assessment of performance at Stages 5, 6 and 7.
3. At key milestones the Client and their technical advisors should check (notably
at the end of each Stage), progress and performance targets, and re-
assess/update/measure evidence of adherence to the Code which should be
compiled into an evidence pack.
4. Where the Code has not been successfully applied or performance targets met,
this should be explained by the Client’s technical advisors, and suggestions
made for remedial action. The Client may choose to accept the justifications
and sign-off the Stage as completed, or take other appropriate action.
5. Each stage of the process should be signed-off by the Client and their technical
advisors. The STAGE SHEET and evidence pack should then be formally
handed over to those carrying out the next stage of work to ensure continuity
during the project.
The checklists are provided as a Microsoft Excel workbook with the following
spreadsheets:
STAGE 1 - Preparation & Briefing checklist
STAGE 2 - Feasibility checklist
STAGE 3 - Design checklist

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 27 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

STAGE 4 - Construction & Installation checklist

STAGE 5 - Commissioning checklist
STAGE 6 - Operation & Maintenance checklist
STAGE 7 - Customer Expectation/Obligations checklist
OVERALL PROJECT SUMMARY
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

For each Stage of the project these are used to record whether:
• the CP1 Code objectives have been met and the key outputs developed
• the Client performance targets have been set/met
• the evidence pack includes all the outputs and targets
• all the above has been signed-off by the Client and/or their technical advisors
• any exceptions/changes have been logged and justified and remedial action
taken as appropriate
Each Stage sheet includes:
Applicability - the Code is designed to be applicable to a range of different projects,
at different scales and applications. It is recommended that the Client (with advisors
where appropriate) complete a Statement of Applicability at the outset of the project,
in order to define which of the Minimum Requirements from the Code will be applied,
and for those that are applicable, whether or not they require modification. The
checklists then allow N/A in each pull down list to indicate aspects that are not
applicable. However, this needs to be used in a responsible manner, taking an
‘everything is included’ approach and then providing significant justification as to why
certain aspects are not applicable to their particular scheme. The statement of
applicability should be recorded in the checklists and the evidence pack.
Key outputs - Each Stage of the project has a number of key outputs used to record
whether the CP1 Code objectives have been met. Supporting notes/guidance should
be provided, particularly where suggestions can be made for improvement.
Performance targets - Each Stage of the project needs to record whether
performance targets have been set, reviewed or met (as appropriate for the stage).
(These are set as AIMS by the Client at Stage 1; updated as TARGETS during Stages
2 and 3; and then as CONFIRMED TARGETS when actual performance is measured
during Stages 5, 6 and 7.) During Stages 2, 3 and 4, the assessment will be based on
whether the design is likely to achieve the performance targets, with areas of risk
highlighted (e.g. where certain aspects of the design could result in targets being
missed). A summary of the performance metrics is provided in a sheet called
METRICS and this includes outline definitions for each KPI. These outline definitions
may need to be tailored to meet unusual aspects of a particular scheme, and any
tailoring should be recorded in the checklists and evidence pack.
Evidence pack – Key outputs and the printed/signed checklist sheet need to be
included in an ongoing evidence pack to record progress and to provide an audit trail.
This evidence pack should then be formally handed over to those with lead
responsibility for the next Stage of work. The evidence pack will be owned by the
Client and sensitive cost information might be redacted for wider circulation. A full list
of items to include in the evidence pack is shown in the CP1.2 Excel workbook in a
sheet titled EVIDENCE PACK CONTENTS.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 28 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Stage sign-off forms - At the end of each stage, the Client and their technical
advisors should sign-off the stage as completed, along with the lead
designer/contractor from that stage (e.g. Feasibility Consultant). If an independent
assessor has been appointed to oversee the project according to the Code of
Practice, they should also sign-off the stage. If agreed performance targets have not
been met, or are assessed to be “at risk”, or aspects of the Code of Practice have not
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

been adhered to, the Client may still choose to sign-off the Stage if acceptable
justifications have been made by their technical advisors. Otherwise remedial action
must be taken as appropriate.
The overall project summary shall be completed at the end of each individual stage
to provide a summary of how the project has performed against the Code of Practice
objectives and the Client’s requirements.
Additional guidance to support setting and monitoring of performance targets, such as
recommended methodologies for metering, commissioning, and acceptance testing is
provided in Appendix F. The steps in a typical stage of the Code are shown in Figure
EEE.

Figure EEE – Steps in each stage of the Code

Figure FFF shows some key milestones that could be used by the Client/Assessor for
monitoring the progress of the project and completing the checklists. However, these
are illustrative only, and alternative approaches could be agreed between the key
parties as required. Each Stage is likely to be an iterative process and it may be
necessary to check individual elements of say the design as they are completed. Also,
it may be appropriate to carry out intermediate checks, e.g. say the design stage, as
only checking at the end may mean it is too late to challenge early design
assumptions.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 29 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure FFF – Possible timing of the CP1 Code checks

Where a project is already underway, it is acceptable to introduce CP1 at any stage,

although, where possible, every effort should be made to complete the checklists and
evidence pack for the stages already carried out. Where a project is being built-out in
phases then the checklist should be applied to each phase such that the final overall
scheme meets CP1.
Where ownership of scheme development changes throughout the project lifecycle,
then clear handover procedures will need to be put in place to ensure CP1 continuity.
For example, a Local Authority promoter handing over a project to a design, build,
operate ESCo, see Figure RRR. The original project promoter/Client will need to
require the new owners to be compliant with CP1. The new owners will then need to
review work to date and the evidence pack in order to be content that they can take on
the obligation to be CP1 compliant. There may also need to be a sign-on form at the
start of a stage where there is a change in owner.
Measuring performance
The checklists provide a framework for a Client to set performance targets for a heat
network project. Additional guidance is provided in Appendix F on recommended
performance metrics and measurement of these.
Metering requirements
The use of data is key to ensuring optimal performance of a heat network and
consultants should follow the principle that “if you can’t measure it, you can’t manage
it”.
Due to legislation, almost all new and existing buildings connected to a heat network
will need to incorporate heat meters. Therefore, metering infrastructure in new
developments will need to be installed by default. Through the introduction of a few
additional meters and temperature sensors, much more information can be gathered
about the behaviour of the heat network. Early consideration of the planned metering
approach is recommended. This should include installing electricity meters to monitor
pumping costs which can contribute significantly to the cost of running a heat network.
Meter points should be specified in order to substantiate design assumptions and be
linked to performance assumptions used in cost models.
The financial value of metering is dependent on the potential energy savings that can
be obtained by using the data. Most meters are only used to record energy data
whereas the monitoring of volume flow rate, flow and return temperatures is also of
great value in providing information that will help improve the efficiency of the heat

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 30 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

network. A small fault on a heat network has the potential to greatly increase the
return temperatures and, in turn, significantly increase the heat loss of the network.
Heat meters and temperature sensors in critical locations on the network are almost
always economically justified.
Heat metering is addressed throughout the Code particularly in Objectives 2.6, 3.8,
5.3 and 6.2. Further information is provided in Appendix F. Figure BBB2 shows the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

basic heat metering required at the energy centre, building/block and normally in each
dwelling. It is essential that the metering strategy provides a good understanding of
the Primary, Secondary and Tertiary parts of the heat network separately.

Primary
energy
input

Tertiary
heat
Primary network
heat
network Secondary
heat
network

Figure BBB2 – General heat metering arrangement (Courtesy of Max Fordham & Partners)
(Re-draw BBB2 to show some horizontals as secondary, before entering tertiary (also Fig BBB1))
(Re-draw BBB2 to show some individual house and a second block without HIUs (also Fig BBB1))
(Re-draw BB2 to include some input meters on the energy centre)
Performance requirements
As part of the commissioning process, tests must be carried out to verify that the
system conforms to minimum performance requirements. These tests should be
conducted by a suitably trained/qualified commissioning engineer with heat network
experience. See Stage 5.
Tests will be carried out for each dwelling/thermal substation and for the overall
system. The test methodology to be used is set out in Appendix F. Where
performance is below requirements, performance deficiencies must be remedied by
the contractor before practical completion and recorded in the evidence pack.
A second analysis of system performance, using metered data, should be carried out
by a suitably trained/qualified commissioning engineer throughout the defects liability
period, in order to ensure that performance requirements are being met. Further
information is provided in Appendix F.
There are many different types and scale of heat network project and the
metering/measurement strategy will need to be carefully tailored to each scheme.
Acceptance testing

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 31 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

As part of the commissioning process, tests must be carried out to verify that the
system actually provides the expected service and conforms to minimum performance
requirements. These acceptance tests are detailed in Objective 5.6.
Acceptance Tests are to be carried out for the Energy Centre, the on-site Heat
Network, the District Heating Network (where applicable), and for each individual
dwelling/thermal substation (where applicable).
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

It should be noted that meter error rates are to be taken into account when calculating
performance. Further information on acceptance testing is provided in Appendix F.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 32 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Part B – The Requirements

This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 33 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

1. Preparation and briefing

Objectives:
1.1 To commission the project in accordance with the Code of Practice
1.2 To develop contracts that are fair and equitable with customers
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

1.3 To define appropriate service levels for the heat supply

1.4 To develop a detailed CP1 monitoring plan and feasibility study brief

Objective 1.1 – To commission the project in accordance

with the Code of Practice
Why is this objective important?
The Client organisation will wish to procure a heat network that will provide a high
level of service for customers, be reliable and be cost-effective. The owner/developer
will also need to comply with planning conditions set for new developments and in
many cases will require a low carbon supply with other environmental and
sustainability benefits. This Client organisation may be a local authority, an ESCo, a
property developer or a community organisation, but all will ultimately be responsible
for the performance of the project and should therefore take the lead in implementing
this Code. There are very different technical and commercial routes to reach a
successful heat network, examples are shown in a series of case studies on different
types of heat networks in Heat Networks Investment Project: Case Studies
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/heat-network-case-studies.
Minimum requirements
1.1.1 The Client shall ensure that this Code of Practice is included as a key
requirement in briefs and specifications, as appropriate for the delivery of:
- masterplanning and feasibility studies
- design services
- construction contracts
- commissioning contracts
- operation and maintenance contracts
- comprehensive energy services contracts or concession agreements.
1.1.2 The Client shall monitor implementation of the Code on a regular basis, and in
particular at the end of each stage of the project. This shall be achieved using the
associated CP1 checklists to establish compliance of the heat network scheme
against the minimum requirements listed under each objective. Clear evidence shall
be collected throughout the project into an ‘evidence pack’ to provide an audit trail to
demonstrate that the Code requirements have been met. It worth noting that the value
of the checklists/Code review process is likely to be directly proportional to the heat
network knowledge and experience of the person undertaking the assessment.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 34 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

1.1.3a The Client shall monitor the predicted and actual performance against the
metrics shown in the associated CP1 checklists. This should be at least at the end of
each stage of the project to ensure that performance targets set at the briefing stage
are achieved in operation.
1.1.3b The Client shall ensure that the evidence pack is signed-off as complete at the
end of each stage, and formally handed over to the technical lead on the subsequent
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

stage, to ensure a connected supply chain throughout the whole project.

1.1.3c The Client shall ensure that all those working on the project are fully conversant
with their CP1 responsibilities, in particular to conduct an effective handover process
between each stage and this shall be clearly documented in the evidence pack.
1.1.4 The Client shall provide feedback to CIBSE/ADE as to the operation of the
Code and any points where compliance has been found to be too onerous or
impractical, so that the Code can be progressively improved.
1.1.5 The Client shall ensure that suitably qualified and experienced (internal and/or
external) people are employed on the project, appropriate to each stage, see 1.1.2.
Also, to ensure that appropriate resource is available to carry out the work.
Consideration should be given to appointing a technical feasibility study advisor at an
early stage to help plan the Stage 2 work.
1.1.6 The Client shall provide designers with clear responsibilities using the guidance
in the BSRIA Design Framework (BG 6/2018) where appropriate.
1.1.7 The Client and their technical advisors shall develop a Statement of
Applicability to clearly define and document where any of the Requirements in the
Code are not to be included in the brief or specification. Also see 1.4.2. This may
particularly be the case when carrying out early stage feasibility studies. However,
Clients need to use the Statement of Applicability in a responsible manner, taking an
‘everything is included’ approach and then providing significant justification as to why
certain aspects are not applicable to their particular scheme.
1.1.8 Where there is an existing heat network operator, their advice shall be sought
throughout the development of any new connections or extensions.
1.1.9 The Client shall outline the level of risk that is appropriate to the particular
project and their investment, also see objective 2.12. Clients should assign risks to the
party best able to manage the risk. This should be done in a responsible way so that
risks are not assigned to customers.
Best practice
BP1.1a It is expected that in the future, a quality assurance system of certified
individuals or companies will be set up who have the capability, systems and expertise
to develop and operate heat networks. Best practice would then be to use such
certified individuals or companies to implement the scheme. It would also then be best
practice to appoint an independent certified individual to carry out an audit of the
project, to check that all of the Code’s minimum requirements have been met, and to
produce an audit report.
Objective 1.1 – Key outputs
Output 1.1a – Project brief/specification for the project
Output 1.1b – Client plan for monitoring progress and begin the initial evidence pack

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 35 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Output 1.1c – Team roles, responsibilities and qualifications log

On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 1.2 – To develop contracts that are fair and

This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

equitable with customers

Why is this objective important?
At an early stage in any heat network project, it is important to set out the future
contractual intentions to ensure customer satisfaction. Any successful business needs
satisfied customers that will continue to purchase the product and pay their bills. For a
natural monopoly such as a heat network this is particularly important. Customer
satisfaction and retention will depend to a large degree on having affordable heat with
fair and equitable contracts. See the Heat Networks Market Study (2018) (UK
Competition and Markets Authority).
Minimum requirements
1.2.1a The Client shall set out the intended target cost of producing heat, cooling and
power (and price, where applicable) and the proposed charging structure to be offered
to both non-domestic and domestic customers. The target heat price shall include all
components, namely p/kWh, standing charge, capital replacement charge and any
other charges.
1.2.1b In residential and micro business schemes, the Client shall set out an intention
to join the Heat Trust, directly with the Heat Trust, and enter evidence of this intention
in the evidence pack.
1.2.1c The service standards proposed for residential and micro-business heat
customers shall be in line with the requirements of the Heat Trust scheme.
1.2.2 The intended contracts for the sale of heat, cooling and power (where
applicable) to non-domestic customers shall not discriminate between customers
except for valid reasons (including in relation to technical issues such as capacity,
temperature, capital contribution etc.).
1.2.3 The intended level of information provided to the customer shall be defined
including the charges for heat, both fixed and variable together with predictions of
annual costs and how these compare to alternative heating systems.
1.2.4 A target level of availability of heat supply shall be defined for planned and
unplanned shutdown periods which recognises the cost-benefit balance in setting the
target.
1.2.5 Proposed customer compensation payments shall be defined. Where the
supply has been interrupted and the targets not achieved by an agreed margin, and
for domestic customers, compensation shall be in accordance with the terms of the
Heat Trust scheme.
1.2.6 The proposed maximum response time to attend to a heat supply fault shall be
clearly defined; different times may be set for faults occurring outside the heating
season, or for emergencies.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 36 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

1.2.7 Specific arrangements shall be established to identify vulnerable customers

and provide additional support as appropriate, in accordance with the Heat Trust
scheme.
1.2.8 The method for providing alternative heating supply to vulnerable customers, or
to all customers, in the event of a prolonged fault shall be defined.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

1.2.9 The proposed contract shall state how long-term heat network plant
replacement is to be funded, also what the DH operator owns and maintains, and
what the customer owns and maintains.
Best practice
BP1.2a Given the importance to the network owner/operator of maintaining low return
temperatures, the proposed heat sales contract for non-residential customers should
include suitable incentives to the building owner/landlord and residents that might
include:
- A discount for low return temperatures OR
- A penalty charge for high return temperatures OR
- A separate charge for volume of water drawn from the network
In this case, all customers should be treated equally and fairly in this respect, and
technical support should be offered by the heat network operator to assist customers
in achieving low return temperatures or low volume use.

Figure 5 - New build housing supplied by a heat network – Queen Elizabeth Olympic Park

Objective 1.2 – Key outputs

Output 1.2a – Proposed service level plan in line with the Heat Trust requirements
Output 1.2b – Heat, cooling and power sales proposed contracts

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 37 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Output 1.2c – Target heat price

Output 1.2d – Intention to join Heat Trust
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Objective 1.3 – To define appropriate service levels for

the heat supply
Why is this objective important?
It is important that the service level for the heat supplied is defined as ultimately this
will determine the design and hence the costs of delivering the heat. A clear statement
of service level will enable customers to understand the service offered and there will
be less likelihood of disputes occurring.
Minimum requirements
1.3.1 An external air temperature shall be defined at which the heat supply capacity
shall be at its maximum. This design external air temperature shall be determined
using appropriate guidance, taking account of the location of the scheme.
1.3.2 The intended maximum heat supply capacity (in kW) for each customer shall be
defined at the design external air temperature and for the assumed flow and return
temperatures of the heat network. This also defines the maximum flow rate from the
heat network.
1.3.3a The intended type of space heating and DHW systems shall be established and
the required heat network flow and return operating temperatures shall be determined.
1.3.3b The intended minimum flow temperature that will be available from the network
in the summer period shall be defined, taking into account the use of variable flow
temperature control and heat losses from the network.
1.3.4 Any variations in flow temperature of the network, e.g. seasonally or in relation
to the external air temperature shall be defined in the heat supply contract with the
customer.
1.3.5 For systems where the supply of space heating is shutdown in summer (e.g.
centralised systems as shown in Appendix D), the dates when space heating will be
unavailable or the external air temperature above which it will be shutdown shall be
defined.
1.3.6 For systems which are planned to operate intermittently, the operating hours
when the heating is unavailable shall be defined (e.g. at night).
1.3.7 The intended points at which the heat supply will be metered shall be defined
and the arrangements for meter reading or prepayment shall be detailed including
how access will be obtained to read the meter when necessary.
1.3.8 The intended arrangements for monitoring the supply to the customer,
recording of flow and return temperatures, pressures, flow rates and annual
consumptions shall be defined; a regime for this monitoring system shall be defined
including periodic checks/calibration.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 38 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

1.3.9 Where regular access is required to maintain equipment (e.g. HIUs) within the
customer’s property, the details of the required frequency of visits and the nature of
the work shall be defined in the heat supply contract with the customer.
1.3.10 The demarcation point between the heat supplier’s system and the customers
system shall be clearly defined, together with the extent of responsibility for operation
and maintenance of each system, including the method of isolation by each party in
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

the case of an emergency.

Best practice
BP1.3a Best practice would be a commitment to provide regular information to
customers regarding their demand profiles and operating conditions with the aim of
improving the overall operation of the heat network for the benefit of both suppliers
and customers.
BP1.3b Best practice would be a commitment to the provision of information to
customers on intended penalties/payment deductions for failure to meet service
levels.
BP1.3c Best practice would be a commitment to implement an online portal for
consumers to view their energy consumption data.
Objective 1.3 – Key outputs
Output 1.3a – Proposed heat supply service levels
Output 1.3b – Proposed metering & monitoring arrangements
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 1.4 - To develop a detailed CP1 monitoring

plan and feasibility study brief
Why is this objective important?
It is essential that the whole of the CP1 process is monitored to underpin compliance
with the Code, but the ultimate objective is to build a heat network that operates
correctly and performs to the Client’s requirements. This monitoring also plays a vital
part in achieving high levels of customer satisfaction. Best practice would be to
appoint a suitably qualified and experienced heat network specialist to monitor
compliance and this should follow a clear CP1 assessment plan covering all stages of
the heat network development.
At this early stage it is important to set a clear brief for the next stage of work in order
to ensure that any feasibility study is carried out in a structured and thorough way by
experienced professionals. Without a focussed brief it is unlikely that the feasibility
stage will provide the optimal heat network and low carbon technology solutions that
are necessary to underpin the remainder of the development process.
Minimum requirements
1.4.1 The Client and their technical advisors shall agree the CP1 monitoring
plan/programme. The plan must cover all aspects of the heat network scheme:

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 39 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- heat generation (energy centre)

- heat distribution (the primary heat network and interfaces to the buildings)
- building internal heat distribution (the secondary heat network within the
buildings)
- heat supply (the HIUs, tertiary space heating and hot water systems in dwellings)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- customer engagement (information, meter reading and billing system)

1.4.2 The feasibility study brief shall include the ‘Statement of Applicability’
developed in 1.1.7 to reflect issues that are not applicable to the particular scheme
being developed. However, this needs to be carried out in a responsible manner,
taking an ‘everything is included’ approach and then providing significant justification
as to why certain aspects are not applicable to their particular scheme.
1.4.3 The Client and their technical advisors shall develop a clear brief for the
feasibility study to be carried out in Stage 2. This shall be tailored to the locality and
will include:
- Energy/heat mapping and masterplanning to identify the main opportunities for a
heat network, the core scheme options, anchor loads, future phases, their
timeline, key dependencies, constraints, and strategic risks.
- Techno-economic feasibility and modelling of the main scheme options using a
range of potential low carbon technologies to supply the heat network.
- Stakeholder engagement to establish the appetite/suitability to connect to a future
heat network, stakeholder drivers and possible scheme governance options.
- A feasibility study report at the end of Stage 2 recommending the optimum
scheme with sufficient detail to allow the design process to go forward, if a viable
scheme has been identified.
Clients should consider the wider steps necessary to progress a heat network project
towards implementation, as shown in Table LLL. Although much of Detailed Project
Development and commercialisation fall outside CP1, the technical feasibility and
design teams need to support this work. See Heat Networks: guidance for developers
and the supply chain (BEIS 2016) https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/heat-
networks-guidance-for-developers-and-the-supply-chain.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 40 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Table LLL – Steps in implementing a heat network (BEIS)

STEPS ACTIONS

HEAT MAPPING AND • Area-wide exploration, identification and prioritisation of

MASTERPLANNING heat network project opportunities
• Identify anchor loads that could catalyse/underpin a heat
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

network
TECHNO-ECONOMIC • Technical feasibility and options appraisal
FEASIBILITY STUDY • Scheme definition and concept design
• Detailed techno-economic modelling
• Development of whole life financial model
• Initial scheme specific business model/commercial
structures options identification and evaluation
• Delivery programme & Risk Register
DETAILED PROJECT • Development of business/commercial model and
DEVELOPMENT financing options
• Development of outline business case (for public sector
this is typically, green book compliant depending on
scheme size)
• Development of detailed financial model
• Development of procurement strategy
• Further scheme design including development of
proposed network
• Route, network sizes, and customer connections,
development of proposed energy centre solution and
location
• Costing reviews to improve cost certainty; initial scoping
and development of commercial agreements
• Soft market testing
COMMERCIALISTION • Reasonable legal input e.g. developing customer
commercial agreements, heat supply contracts,
necessary land purchase, land access arrangements,
etc.
• Further development of tariff structure for customer
contracts
• Further development of financial model and business
case and associated commercial advice costs where
necessary
• Potential for preparatory works depending on scheme
needs, assessed on a case by case basis.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 41 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Best practice
BP 1.4a Best practice would be to appoint a suitably qualified CP1 assessor, trained
in checking compliance with CP1.
Objective 1.4 – Key outputs
Output 1.4a – A detailed CP1 monitoring plan
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Output 1.4b – Statement of applicability

Output 1.4c – Feasibility study brief
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 42 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2. Feasibility
Objectives:
2.1 To achieve sufficient accuracy of peak heat demands and annual heat
consumptions
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

2.2 To identify the most suitable low carbon heat sources and location of an
energy centre
2.3 To determine the location of top-up and standby boilers and use of
existing boilers
2.4 To select suitable operating temperatures
2.5 To define heat network distribution routes, pipe sizes and costs
2.6 To determine building connection costs including heat metering
2.7 To minimise the negative impacts of phasing the development
2.8 To assess lifecycle operation, maintenance and replacement
requirements, costs and revenues
2.9 To conduct a consistent economic analysis and options appraisal
2.10 To analyse risks and carry out a sensitivity analysis
2.11a To assess environmental impacts and benefits
2.11b To develop a comprehensive feasibility study report
2.12 To contribute to the development of business structure, contract strategy
and procurement strategy

Objective 2.1 – To achieve sufficient accuracy of peak

heat demands and annual heat consumptions
Why is this objective important?
The feasibility process begins with heat mapping to identify potential connectable
loads. An estimate of both the peak heat demand (MW) and annual heat consumption
(GWh/year) is the first step in any feasibility work. The peak heat demand is the
highest demand that the network is designed to supply and will typically determine the
peak boiler capacity. The diameter and cost of the network, and the pump selection
are a function of both the peak demand and the dT at peak demand. The annual heat
consumption is the total heat delivered to the customers in an average year and this
determines the heat revenues to the scheme and, together with the daily and annual
profiles of this consumption, will determine the capacity of the low carbon plant which
will supply the majority of the heat. These estimates are therefore fundamental to the
feasibility study and sufficient accuracy is needed.
For existing buildings, the estimates will mainly rely on fuel use as recorded by meters
and other site information. It will normally be of benefit for the building owner and the
heat network operator to examine opportunities to reduce peak heat demands and

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 43 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

maximise building LTHW system dT before committing to the investment in the heat
network, in order to avoid unnecessary investment in capacity and less efficient
operation. Economic energy efficiency improvements should be undertaken prior to
DH connection such that the long-term economic assessment of the DH connection is
correct.
For new buildings, a modelling approach will be needed. It is important that the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

modelling reflects the expected operation of the building in practice which may differ
significantly from modelling needed to show compliance with Part L of the Building
Regulations.
Minimum requirements
2.1.1a For existing and new buildings, heat, cooling and electricity demands (where
appropriate) shall be based on the highest frequency data available e.g. half hourly, or
estimated on an hourly monthly basis. This estimate should be based on actual fuel
used from meter readings wherever available, and using an assessment of existing
equipment efficiencies. As a last resort, energy benchmarks and appropriate demand
profiles can be used to estimate the half hourly consumption patterns. All of this work
should take account of any potential for cost-effective investments in energy
efficiency.
2.1.1b (MOVED FROM 2.1.5) When actual consumption data is not available then
annual hourly energy demand profiles, including peak demands, shall be estimated
from a combination of: a knowledge of the installed boiler capacity and how these are
operated in practice, benchmarks using building type, floor areas and age of the
building, or from half hourly energy meter readings if available and supplemented by
modelling using CIBSE TM54 (CIBSE, 2013). Benchmarks for peak and annual heat
demand estimates based on floor areas which can be used in feasibility studies are
given in the following references:
- TM46: Energy benchmarks (for existing buildings) (CIBSE, 2008)
- Guide F: Energy efficiency in buildings (for existing buildings) (CIBSE, 2012)
- BG9: Rules of Thumb, 5th Edition (for new buildings) (BSRIA, 2011)
- BG14: Rules of Thumb, 4th Edition (for existing buildings) (BSRIA, 2003)
- Building Energy Efficiency Survey, Overarching Report (BEIS 2016)
Benchmarks should only be used when actual consumption data is not available, and
should be clearly referenced. An iterative approach should be used, beginning the
feasibility with benchmark data and gradually replacing this with actual data where
possible. Data from the local heat network operator or data obtained from similar
operational schemes can also be used.
2.1.1c Temporary monitoring of key existing buildings and buildings with atypical heat
loads should also be considered at this stage so that accurate data on peak heat
loads and seasonal/daily variation in heat loads is available. Where possible, such
monitoring should continue for at least a year. Half hourly data collection from gas
meters can be arranged through the gas suppliers at minimal cost, from which heat
demand profiles can be estimated.
2.1.1d Annual heat consumption and peak demands for new buildings shall be
estimated using established modelling software, bespoke software or by using data
obtained from recently constructed buildings. The estimates shall take into account

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 44 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

that future new buildings will adopt higher fabric standards and may use mechanical
ventilation with heat recovery.
2.1.2 The data shall be analysed to separately estimate: the heat demand for space
heating, domestic hot water and any system losses within the building.
2.1.3 The space heating element shall be adjusted by means of degree days or other
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

weather correction method to provide a monthly and half hourly heat demand profile
for an average year using an appropriate baseline temperature for the building
concerned (although it is important that in any later analysis the sensitivity of this
profile is tested for extremes).
2.1.4 Where possible, an understanding of the daily, weekly and annual occupancy
pattern of each building shall be established to inform the energy centre design and
the need for thermal storage, together with any future expected changes which may
have an impact.
2.1.5 (MOVED TO 2.1.1b)
2.1.6 Future heat, cooling and electricity demands for extensions of the network shall
be estimated in a similar way and where appropriate a sensitivity analysis carried out
to show the impact on the heat network and energy centre design.
2.1.7 An assessment of the potential stakeholders shall be carried out in order to
identify the shape and size of the energy demands likely to be involved. This shall
include an assessment of the appetite/likelihood of connecting to a future heat
network. In existing buildings this should take account of public versus commercial
stakeholders and the likelihood of becoming an anchor load or possible energy centre
location. In new developments this should include the timing/phasing of the
development coming onstream and any potential contributions from developers.
Further guidance is available in BEIS (2018) Stakeholder Engagement in Heat
Network - A guide for project managers.
2.1.8 Data about each potential building connection to be included in the feasibility
study shall be recorded in the evidence pack. The CP1.2 Excel workbook provides a
sheet titled CONNECTION CHECKLIST to aid this process.
Best practice
BP2.1a Best practice would be to obtain actual measured hourly or half-hourly fuel
use data from meters throughout the year where this is available or to install
monitoring equipment to establish the demands more accurately. Best practice would
also include the use of operational data from other similar sites to generate a heat
demand profile. From this data an annual heat load duration curve can be produced.
BP2.1b Where gas consumption is not monitored on a half hourly basis, best practice
would be to install half-hourly recording on gas meters to identify peak demands,
demand profiles and variation of heat demand with external temperature. This would
normally be achieved through the current gas supplier (it is usually only available on
larger gas demands).
BP2.1c Best practice would be to take account of local climates such as the heat
island effect in large cities when assessing space heating demands and the lower
demand for hot water that may be seen in summer (due to higher cold water feed
temperatures and lower temperatures used for showers).

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 45 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BP2.1d In existing larger buildings being considered, best practice would be to

monitor LTHW temperatures in order to obtain an understanding of temperature
difference to support calculation of peak DH flow and hence pipe sizes.
District cooling also requires an estimate of cooling demand which for existing
buildings is often hard to establish as cooling is rarely measured directly and electricity
use for chillers is also not usually metered separately. Cooling demand tends to be
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

more peaky than heat demand and more limited in duration e.g. for offices typically for
weekday afternoons in the summer months. For new buildings, dynamic simulation
modelling can be used to provide the cooling demand profiles.
Objective 2.1 – Key outputs
Output 2.1a – Energy (heat, cooling & electricity) mapping report
Output 2.1b – Accurate estimates of heat demands
Output 2.1c – Predicted future heat demands
Output 2.1d – Report on potential stakeholders
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.2 – To identify the most suitable low carbon

heat sources and the location of an energy centre
Why is this objective important?
Energy masterplanning is generally the next part of the feasibility process to help
identify, plan and deliver the overall strategic, large-scale technology and district wide
energy opportunities. The approach is to define the ultimate potential for heat
networks across an area and then to establish the pathway and individual phases that
could realise that potential.
One of the benefits of heat networks is that they can use a variety of heat sources and
at the masterplanning stage it is important to consider a range of technology solutions
and identify the best mix of heat sources for any given project. The project should not
proceed to the next stage without a firm decision on the type of suitable heat sources,
even if the exact capacities of each will be refined later.
Minimum requirements
2.2.1a An energy masterplan shall be developed, based on the heat/energy mapping
carried out earlier. This should show:
- Existing anchor heat loads
- Existing major energy sources and existing or planned heat networks
- Planned new developments
- Existing and potential energy sources/technologies including waste heat/cooling
sources
- Defined focus area (red line boundary) where these have been recommended
from a heat mapping study

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 46 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- Opportunity Areas, Area Action Plan areas or other growth/regeneration area

boundaries.
Further guidance on energy masterplanning can be found in:
• Decentralised Energy Masterplanning (Arup 2014)
• Community Energy – Planning, development and delivery (King M, Shaw R
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

CHPA & TCPA 2011)

• BEIS (2018) Stakeholder Engagement in Heat Network - A guide for project
managers.
2.2.1b Available heat sources and technologies shall be reviewed and the most
suitable compared in more detail. Where feasible, this shall include renewable and
waste heat sources.
2.2.2 The heat sources shall be compared primarily on the basis of whole life costs,
contributions to CO2 reductions, taking into account future trends in energy prices and
electricity decarbonisation, and level of technology risk.
2.2.3 The heat sources shall also be compared on the basis of: local environmental
impact, space and access requirements, sustainability credentials including origin of
fuel (especially for biofuels), transport requirements and security of supply issues.
2.2.4a A mix of heat sources shall be considered, recognising that lower capital cost
but higher running cost sources may be advantageous to meet peak demands (e.g.
gas-fired boilers).
2.2.4b (MOVED FROM 2.2.8) One or more suitable energy centre sites shall be
selected from a range of options comparing these across a number of criteria such as:
proximity to heat loads, visual impact, noise disturbance, flue emissions and air quality
impact, viability of fuel supply and electricity connection, space for both initial plant
and for expansion, fresh air supply for combustion (which shall be via natural
ventilation wherever possible), access for plant installation, removal and fuel
deliveries.
2.2.5 Financial incentives (see Appendix Y) such as FiTs, RHI and CfDs shall be
identified and the lifecycle cost comparisons carried out both with and without these
incentives. Cost of carbon should also be used in the comparison. Modelling shall also
include the impact of any tax exemptions (e.g. CCL), grants and feed-in tariffs (e.g.
LECS, CRC, EUETS, and HNIP). In particular, the impact that constructing a network
and linking buildings will have on such current costs, either positive or negative.
2.2.6a An operating model shall be set up to establish the size of each heat source
and how much heat, and cooling. annually, This will also provide the data on fuel and
electricity use and, in the case of CHP, electricity generated, for use in the economic
model. Using hourly data and modelling part-load conditions, the operating model
shall establish an annual run-hours of plant/energy balance. This is then reflected into
economics based on STOD tariff structures.
2.2.6b The model shall take account of the potential benefits from thermal storage at
least at this stage to estimate establish the approximate level of likely economic and
environmental benefits and practical feasibility e.g. space requirements. The model
shall also include realistic assumptions on the efficiency, availability and output of
each plant item and an analysis of the network primary and secondary losses from the
work undertaken in accordance with Objective 2.5. The efficiencies used in

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 47 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

determining fuel use shall be gross (higher) calorific value to avoid the common error
of using net (lower) calorific value which leads to underestimating fuel costs.
Figure LLL shows just one example technology taken from an hourly operating model
for a CHP plant, showing the way the plant and thermal store operate in relation to the
demand. Figure MMM is an example load duration curve from an hourly model,
showing the proportion of heat from each source and the effect of thermal storage.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure LLL – Example taken from an hourly operating model for a CHP plant

LOAD DURATION CURVE

Thermal store Heat demand

discharging

Thermal store charging

Boiler

CHP

Figure MMM – Example load duration curve for a CHP plant

2.2.7a The operating model shall adopt an hour by hour approach throughout the
year, unless otherwise agreed with the Client. Even if the knowledge of daily demand
profiles is limited, this type of modelling will be more accurate and is often required to
establish how a network will operate in practice, particularly where there are multiple

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 48 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

consumer types, a range of heat sources and thermal storage. The operating model
should take account of both the variation of heat (and electricity) demands and the
variation of electricity and fuel prices over the year. It should therefore differentiate
between seasons, differentiate between night and day periods, and also weekdays
and weekend periods, if there are significant differences in heat demand expected.
2.2.7b For CHPs that predominantly export, the electricity export prices used to
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

economically assess the optimum CHP and thermal store size should use a day/night
or STOD (Seasonal Time Of Day) tariff structure. Similarly, the import STOD pricing
structures including DUoS charges should be used for electricity supply to heat
pumps.
2.2.7c The operating model shall be used to optimise the heat network in relation to
different heat source types, different sizes of heat source and thermal storage. The
model shall determine the whole life economic IRR and NPV of the various options to
establish which is the optimum design from an economic perspective as well as
achieving any other objectives that the Client has specified. The model must include
day/night (STOD) electricity prices that reflect the market in order to properly assess
the sizing/operation of CHP, heat pumps and thermal stores. The assessment shall
determine the most economic optimum size for the low carbon plant and thermal
store. This shall be achieved by showing that a smaller CHP/thermal store and a
larger CHP/thermal store have lower economic returns, as shown in Figure NNN from
Crane M (2018) – Carbon savings from gas CHP supplying heat networks, - how to
maximise and estimation of carbon savings in operation.

Scheme NPV for larger CHPs and thermal store sizes

1100
3360kWe
NPV £k (@ 6% over 30 years)

1000 2679kWe

1999kWe
900
1487kWe
800
1200kWe
700

600

500
12 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 250 300 350 400 500
Thermal store size m3
Figure NNN – Example of optimising thermal storage sizes

2.2.8 MOVED TO 2.2.4

2.2.9 Even where different types of heat sources are used, a large number of energy
centres on the network shall be avoided as this will lead to a reduction in the
economies of scale and the network will become too hydraulically complex to operate
to maximise the use of low and zero carbon (LZC) plant.
2.2.9 Where possible, systems shall be future-proofed to provide flexibility in meeting
changes in fuel prices, tariff structures carbon factors etc. Future potential heat
sources and the potential growth in demand shall also be considered in relation to fuel
type and CO2 emissions, recognising that the wider electricity supply system will

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 49 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

change over time as it decarbonises, and that major items of energy plant on the
network will typically require replacement after circa 15 years.
Objective 2.2 – Key outputs
Output 2.2a – Energy Masterplanning report
Output 2.2b – Heat network energy model
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Output 2.2c – Heat source(s) assessment report

Output 2.2d – Energy centre location report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.3 – To determine the location of top-up and

standby boilers and use of existing boilers
Why is this objective important?
To ensure a satisfactory level of service it is normal practice to include gas-fired
boilers as standby plant should the primary heat source fail. Such boilers are often
also used to help meet peak demands during the coldest weather, often referred to as
top-up duty. The low carbon plant that supplies the majority of the heat to the scheme
is normally a higher capital cost and it would be uneconomic to size this plant to
supply the peak demands. The top-up and standby boilers can be located either at the
energy centre or distributed within the scheme or some intermediate arrangement
between these two extremes.
In some cases, the existing boilers within buildings can be retained for these top-up
and standby duties. The disposition of the top-up and standby boilers will determine
not only the capital cost of the boiler plant but also of the heat network – as distributed
boilers would allow the network to be sized only to deliver heat from the primary
heating source which may be half or less of the peak capacity. The location of the
boilers also influences the security of heat supply and the need to allow for temporary
boilers in the event of a failure of the heat network. It is therefore important that this
issue is considered at the feasibility stage and an optimal approach developed.
Minimum requirements
2.3.1 Discussions shall be held with the heat customers where appropriate to
determine their requirements with respect to security of supply and the capacity and
condition of existing boilers. This may have an impact on the heat sales contract
offered to the customer e.g. where they retain their boilers. Also see 2.9.5.
2.3.2 The feasibility study shall examine the options of centralised boilers and
distributed boilers, including the incorporation of existing boilers into the scheme
where appropriate and make suitable recommendations. In new developments it may
be appropriate to include decentralised boilers in order to manage the timing/phasing
and programme risk to ensure alignment between the heat network installation and
the overall development itself. The ongoing maintenance, management and capital
replacement costs of decentralised boilers shall be evaluated and compared with the
savings of central plant costs.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 50 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2.3.3 Consideration shall be given to the principles of hydraulic control to be

employed to ensure that use of the low carbon heat supply source is maximised,
especially where multiple heat generation sources and distributed boilers are used.
2.3.4 The feasibility study options appraisal shall take account of the space required
for boiler plant and the associated cost of any building area needed.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Best practice
BP2.3a Best practice could include consideration of additional heat recovery, where
applicable, on the lead top-up and standby boiler to improve system efficiency as
these boilers may well be older less efficient units and capable of upgrading.
Objective 2.3 – Key outputs
Output 2.3a – Top-up & standby heat source(s) report
Output 2.3b – Control strategy report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.4 – To select suitable operating temperatures

Why is this objective important?
Operating temperatures are a key aspect of heat network design and will determine
both the capital cost of the network and the heat losses and pumping energy. The
temperatures selected will also determine the efficiency of the heat source (especially
for heat pumps and steam turbine extraction) and also the volume of thermal store
required for a given energy storage. Whilst there will be scope for further optimisation
during the design stage, the feasibility stage needs to be based on assumptions which
are practical and achievable. These assumptions can then be used to carry out the
pipe sizing and produce the cost and performance data needed for the feasibility
stage.
Minimum requirements
2.4.1 The operating temperatures shall be selected to achieve the required service
level for the customers throughout the whole year. Where possible, information shall
be obtained from each building owner/operator to determine the flow and return
temperatures used for their existing heating system under peak demand conditions
and the potential for reducing these, especially the return temperature. It is important
that any original design temperatures are established and if the building/boiler plant is
currently operating to a different regime establish why this is taking place and whether
current practices can be changed for the benefit of both the heat consumer and the
proposed network. See also 1.1.3a.
2.4.2 The most suitable operating temperatures for the heat sources selected shall
be identified, taking into account how efficiencies will vary with operating
temperatures. Where different technologies are being used together, then different
supply temperatures from each heat source may be appropriate in order to maximise
efficiency. Heat sources where efficiency is less dependent on flow temperature e.g.
boilers, may be used to increase the flow temperature at times of peak demand.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 51 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2.4.3 The potential to reduce the flow temperature as demand falls (weather
compensation) to reduce heat losses under part-load conditions shall be analysed,
taking into account pumping energy and impact on return temperatures. This is
subject to providing sufficiently high flow temperature to safely produce domestic hot
water for all customers.
2.4.4 The targeted difference between flow and return temperatures on the primary
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

heat network under peak demand conditions shall be greater than 30°C for supply to
new buildings and greater than 25°C for existing buildings (where feasible), to reduce
the capital costs of the network, unless a detailed analysis of lifecycle costs and
performance shows otherwise.
2.4.5 The option of using a higher flow temperature for the heat source and the
thermal store, and a lower flow temperature for the heat network, shall be considered
in order to maximise the heat stored per unit of volume.
2.4.6 The temperature difference that occurs at any hydraulic separation (e.g. at a
heat exchanger) shall be taken into account in defining operating temperatures; the
use of multiple levels of hydraulic separation leads to higher primary return
temperatures, more complexity and higher heat losses so should be avoided where
possible.
2.4.7a The network flow temperature shall be sufficient to heat the domestic hot water
to the required temperature with good temperature control and to minimise health
risks from Legionella growth. Alternative methods of Legionella control may be used to
permit the use of lower flow temperatures.2
2.4.7b The hot water delivery temperature at the instantaneous HIU shall be set to 50-
55°C. These temperatures are acceptable provided the volume of water is small and
the Legionella risk can be controlled. HSG 274 (Part 2) and ACOP L8 state that
instantaneous water heaters are low risk. The requirements of BS EN 8558 (2015)
and BS EN 806 (2012) shall be followed.
2.4.8 Where polymer carrier pipes (or other materials where lifetime is related to
temperature) are considered advantageous, then the acceptable maximum
temperatures (and pressures) of the pipework to deliver the required design life shall
be determined (which may involve the use of variable flow temperatures) and the
overall benefit of such pipe systems assessed accordingly. It is essential that the
resulting operating temperature constraints are documented clearly and issued to the
designer, construction contractor and the future operator to ensure that the
relationship between operating temperature and pipe material selection is fully
understood and the design life is maintained.
2.4.9 For new and replacement building services systems the peak (design)
operating temperatures for heat emitters shall be selected to be as in Table 2.

2
Research on the use of low temperature district heating and the implications for Legionella control has
been published by the IEA under Annex X (IEA, 2011). See also TM13: Minimising the risk of
Legionnaires’ Disease (CIBSE, 2013).

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 52 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Table 2 - Preferred design temperatures for sizing new and replacement building services systems (i.e.
non-domestic secondary or tertiary dwelling systems)
Circuit Flow temperature (°C) Return temperature (°C)

Radiators Max 70 Max 40

This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Fan-coil units Max 60 Max 40

Air handling unit Max 70 Max 40

Underfloor heating See Note 1 See Note 1

Domestic Hot Water Service See 2.4.7b Max 25 for 10°C cold
(DHWS) instantaneous heat feed temperature
exchanger on maximum load

DHWS cylinder with coil See Note 2 Max 45 when heating up

from cold at 10°C

DHWS calorifier with external See Note 3 Max 25 for 10°C cold
plate heat exchanger feed temperature

Note 1: Underfloor heating systems will typically operate with floor temperatures below 35°C and
typically flow temperatures of 45°C which is advantageous for heat networks as this will result in low
return temperatures.
Note 2 moved to 2.4.7b
Note 2: Hot water storage involves a Legionella risk and the stored temperature is normally above
55°C. For acceptable heat-up times a minimum flow temperature of 70°C is typical. The return
temperature will generally be higher than for instantaneous heat exchangers as heat from cold rarely
occurs and so higher heat losses will result.
Note 3: A central hot water calorifier would normally be designed to store water at 60°C and with a
minimum recirculation temperature of 55°C. Typically a flow temperature of 70°C or higher would be
needed.
Note: Where direct connection is used, the radiators shall be sized in accordance with this table.
However, in operation, a higher flow temperature may be used to suit the network design, provided that
radiator return temperatures shall be less than 40°C.
Note: In all cases, the variation of flow temperature across the primary network needs to be considered,
especially for the summer low-flow condition where temperature drops can be significant. The
temperatures given in this table are at the consumption point and higher flow temperatures will be
needed at the energy centre supply point.
2.4.10 For existing buildings, at a feasibility stage, it can be assumed that radiator
circuits designed for 82°C flow 71°C return can be rebalanced to achieve lower return
temperatures, e.g. to achieve 80°C flow 60°C return, as radiators are often oversized,
especially where fabric improvements have been made subsequently to the original
heating installation.
2.4.11 The approach temperature on the return – the difference between the primary
return (outlet) temperature and the secondary return (inlet) temperature across a
space heating or total heating plate heat exchanger – shall not exceed 5°C, in order to
reduce return temperatures on the network. Designers shall consider how the
substation will operate with variable flow temperature and the impact of typical short-

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 53 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

term variations in flow temperature, especially when approach temperatures on the

flow are small.
2.4.12 For existing buildings the type of control system shall be established. Where
constant volume systems and three-port control valves are used, discussions shall be
held with the building owner to evaluate changing to a variable volume, two-port
control valve system that would benefit both the heat network and the heat customer.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Best practice
BP2.4a Best practice would be to carry out a specific temperature optimisation study,
taking account all impacts to derive whole lifecycle costs and environmental
performance for a range of temperatures. The study would also take account of future
heat technologies that might be used and the potential need to connect to other
networks.
BP2.4b Best practice would be to seek to achieve return temperatures lower than
those in Table 2, and to consider more complex ‘cascade’ systems, as shown in
Figure QQQ, where the return temperature from a space heating circuit is used to pre-
heat the cold feed to a centralised DHWS, subject to suitable control against
legionella. In some cases, lower flow temperatures may be advantageous, e.g.
55°C/35°C radiator circuits, especially where heat pumps are anticipated as the heat
source. This can also be achieved using the return water from a higher temperature
system to cascade heat to a lower temperature system.
BP2.4c Best practice would be to specify the DHW generation equipment (e.g. HIUs)
to deliver the full design output at low DH primary temperatures, such that the DH can
operate efficiently and effectively at lower flow temperatures outside the space heating
season.
BP2.4d The use of lower approach temperatures on the return for heat exchangers of
3°C would be best practice. However, it is important to check that there is sufficient
heat transfer at low loads and low flow rates when low velocities may occur within the
heat exchanger and detailed consultation with the heat exchanger supplier is
recommended.
BP2.4e Best practice would be to achieve a return temperature below 20°C when
producing hot water with an incoming cold water temperature of 10°C.
BP2.4f In existing buildings, best practice would be to install monitoring equipment
and/or set up the BEMS to record secondary temperatures and heat loads to provide
robust data for the design stage. This will allow the DH connection size to be
assessed, and to economically optimise options within the building to lower the
operating temperatures and peak loads.
District cooling systems are more constrained in operating temperatures than district
heating, as they have to operate between a minimum flow temperature close to 0°C
and a return temperature below the typical space temperature of 20°C. Within a single
building, typical temperatures of 6°C flow and 12°C return have become established.
In order to reduce pipe sizes, district cooling systems increase the delta T to about
10°C, e.g. 5°C flow 15 °C return. Even so, the pipe sizes will generally be much larger
than for the heating supply. As a result, direct connection should be considered to
avoid a further deterioration of temperature difference. The use of chilled beams is
favourable for district cooling as a higher return temperature is possible. The

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 54 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

possibility of supplying chilled beams from the return from air handling units in a
cascade manner would also be beneficial for district cooling.
Objective 2.4 – Key outputs
Output 2.4a – Target operating temperatures report
Output 2.4b – Network control strategy report
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Output 2.4c – Heat Exchanger approach temperatures report

On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.5 – To determine heat network distribution

routes, pipe sizes and costs
Why is this objective important?
The capital cost of the heat network is likely to be a major component of the project
cost and will therefore influence the economics. The routes for the network will define
the length, installation difficulty and hence cost. The feasibility of the routes needs to
be established especially where there are major barriers such as road or rail
crossings.
Note: Although pre-insulated pipe systems with steel carrier pipe manufactured to EN 253 are
commonly used there are a range of other materials available for the carrier pipe: plastic PEX, PB, PP-
R and more innovative design using GRE (Glass Reinforced Epoxy) or other multi-layer plastic
composites. These all have different characteristics and can result in lower capital and lifecycle costs
depending on the application and should be assessed either at the feasibility stage or early in the
design stage. In general, polymer pipes, at least for smaller diameters, will have lower installation costs
because of the greater flexibility and because fewer joints are needed. A further option to the designer
is the use of twin-pipe systems which may offer lower heat losses, and lower installation costs.

Minimum requirements
2.5.1a Pipework routes shall be analysed and selected with the aim of minimising the
length of the network to reduce both capital costs and heat losses.
2.5.1b Where the project programme allows, heat network pipework routes in new
developments shall be fully integrated with other utility routes and overall phasing
requirements, and shall follow NJUG Street Works UK Guidelines (Volumes 1-6)
where possible.
2.5.2 Routes through service areas of the connected buildings shall be identified to
reduce the costs associated with the buried network.
2.5.3 Consideration shall be given to the feasibility of the routes in relation to major
barriers such as major roads, railways, rivers and canals.
2.5.4 For detailed feasibility studies, existing utility service plans shall be reviewed,
and routes shall be selected to avoid major known existing utility services or areas
where services are known to be congested.
2.5.5 Pipe routes shall avoid passing underneath existing or future buildings or
structures that may prevent future access to the pipes. Pipe routes shall consider the
constraints of existing basement structures, contaminated land and archaeology.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 55 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2.5.6 Where routes need to be taken through land owned by third parties the
necessary wayleaves shall be identified and agreed in principle at an early stage.
2.5.7 Discussions with the Highways Department in the Local Authority and other
utilities/stakeholders shall be held at an early stage, where appropriate, to identify
constraints and opportunities to co-ordinate the heat network installation with other
works that may be planned, e.g. re-surfacing of roads, other utility works etc. All street
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

works should follow the NRSWA 2012 Code of Practice recommendations and Advice
Note SA 10/05 (2005) (Highways Agency), after liaison with the appropriate
authorities.
2.5.8 An initial pipe sizing calculation shall be carried out to establish network costs.
The guidelines in Tables 3 and 4 on typical flow velocities may be used which will
avoid over-sizing, however a more detailed approach as described in Objective 3.6
may also be used at the feasibility stage. See paper by Martin-Du Pan (BSER&T
2018) for further guidance on pipe sizing.
Table 3 - Typical flow velocities for steel pipes to EN 253 for initial sizing of external networks [Note:
these are not strict velocity limits, higher velocities are allowed]
Pipe size (mm) Pipe internal diameter Typical velocity (m/s)
(mm)

DN25 29.1 0.9

DN32 37.2 0.9

DN40 43.1 1.0

DN50 54.5 1.0

DN65 70.3 1.3

DN80 82.5 1.4

DN100 107.1 1.5

DN125 132.5 1.8

DN150 160.3 2.0

DN200 210.1 2.4

DN250 263.0 2.4

DN300 312.7 2.5

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 56 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Table 4 - Typical flow velocities for PEX pipes to EN15632 for initial sizing of external networks [Note:
these are not strict velocity limits, higher velocities are allowed]

Pipe size (mm) Pipe internal diameter Typical velocity (m/s)

(mm)

25 20.4 1.0
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

32 26.2 1.0

40 32.6 1.1

50 40.8 1.3

63 51.4 1.4

75 61.4 1.5

90 73.6 1.55

110 90 1.6

125 102.2 1.7

140 114.6 1.8

160 130.8 1.9

2.5.9 An alternative pipe sizing approach based on achieving approximately 250

Pa/m pressure drop in each branch may be used, however higher pressure drops can
be acceptable on non-critical side branches and for welded polymer pipes.
2.5.10 (MOVED TO 3.6.9) For steel pipe systems, if higher velocities than 3 m/s are
used a specific transient pressure check (water hammer) shall be carried out
simulating the effect of valve closure and pump trips and the resultant pump discharge
pressures from the energy centre.
2.5.11 The thickness of insulation shall be selected when assessing pipe costs, and
greater thickness may be required especially for areas of low heat density, for high
cost heat sources and for new-build schemes. Note: Steel pipe to EN 253 is typically
available with three different insulation thicknesses (Series 1, 2 or 3). Some
manufacturers of pre-insulated polymer pipes offer pipes with an increased thickness
of insulation. See also Objective 3.5 for system heat loss requirements at design
stage.
Best practice
BP2.5a Best practice would include obtaining and reviewing drawings of the existing
utilities and other record information in the area covered by the heat network to
determine additional barriers, e.g. no space underneath certain roads due to
congestion of other utilities or opportunities such as the use of existing service
tunnels, basements etc. This could be supplemented by undertaking ground

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 57 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

penetrating radar surveys, in line with PAS 128:2014 and PAS 256:2017, to map
existing services at critical points.
BP2.5b Best practice would also include more detailed calculations to optimise the
pipe sizing to minimise lifecycle costs taking account of: construction costs, electricity
used for pumping and heat losses may be carried out. This is a requirement at the
design stage but could be considered as best practice at a feasibility stage if the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

additional cost is justified.

Objective 2.5 – Key outputs
Output 2.5a – Network pipe routes & sizing report
Output 2.5b – Initial insulation thickness calculations
Output 2.5c – Initial network cost calculations
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.6 – To determine building connection costs,

including heat metering
Why is this objective important?
Building connections and heat metering are significant costs and need to be taken into
account in the economic evaluation. Either direct (where the heat network water is
used within the building) or indirect connections (where a heat exchanger separates
the heat network water from the building heating system) may be used. The
equipment used in building connections are often referred to as ‘thermal substations’
for larger buildings, as shown in Figure 7, and ‘Heat Interface Units’ or ‘Hydraulic
Interface Units’ (HIUs) for dwellings. Heat metering is usually included within the
substation or HIU in indirect systems.

Figure 6 - Indirect connection packaged thermal substation for a large building, prior to insulation

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 58 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Minimum requirements
2.6.1a The costs and benefits of direct or indirect connections shall be assessed to
determine the most appropriate solution at both building level and dwelling level, (see
objective 3.3 and Appendix D for guidance).
2.6.1b The costs and benefits of the various types of domestic hot water service
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

provision shall be assessed to determine the most appropriate solution for each
building/dwelling (see objective 3.3 and Appendix D for guidance).
2.6.2 Cost estimates shall reflect the type of connection and the capacity of supply,
including the provision of redundancy of any heat exchangers (e.g. 2 at 60%
maximum demand), or secondary circulating pumps. Where appropriate, costs shall
be included for the provision of plantroom space to house the equipment.
2.6.3 The capacity of the building connection shall reflect the peak demand (see
Objective 2.1) and whether the network is to supply the peak or only a proportion of
the peak (see Objective 2.3), taking care not to oversize any heat exchangers.
2.6.4 Costs shall be included for the supply to each building to have a heat meter
installed to comply with the Heat Metering and Billing Regulations (2014) regulations
implementing the Energy Efficiency Directive (EED) (EU, 2012).
2.6.5 For new dwellings, costs shall be included for each dwelling to have a heat
meter installed to comply with the Heat Metering and Billing Regulations (2014).
2.6.6 If necessary, a separate study shall be undertaken to determine if retrofitting
dwelling level heat metering to existing dwellings is cost-effective and desirable and
costs included as necessary.3
2.6.7 For all buildings, a suitable method of heat meter reading and billing shall be
defined, and cost estimates prepared for both capital and operating costs of the billing
system. for at least a system of billing at quarterly intervals or less
2.6.8 (MOVED FROM BP) In new and extended heat networks, meter data collection
shall be automatic remote meter data collection either by cable network, wireless or
GSM signalling. The metering system shall include an online data portal or energy
display device linked to the heat meters to provide additional information to customers
in real time. This shall include the amount of heat energy currently being consumed,
and over recent periods of time, together with the costs incurred in order to help
customers reduce consumption and cost.
Best practice
Objective 2.6 – Key outputs
Output 2.6a – Direct/indirect connection report
Output 2.6b – Connection/metering cost report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

3
Further guidance on the cost-effectiveness of installing heat meters is available from BEIS at
https://www.gov.uk/ heat-networks.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 59 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 2.7 – To minimise the negative impacts of

phasing the development
Why is this objective important?
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Most large heat networks, whether new-build or existing, will be developed in phases.
This raises issues on the need to make provision for future expansion of the scheme
and the planned installation capacity of the central plant. Such decisions will need to
minimise initial investments whilst maintaining environmental benefits. For new
buildings, there will be a period of load build-up that is not just related to the phasing
of construction but also to the progressive occupancy of the building.
Minimum requirements
2.7.1 Where appropriate, an overall phasing plan shall be produced showing which
buildings will be connected, by when, and how the heat demand will build up over
time.
2.7.2 The Client and their technical advisors shall give careful consideration to
making provision in pipe sizing to allow for future expansion in later phases. This
provision shall be based on realistic expectations to avoid unnecessary over-sizing
and additional cost. A future-proofing plan should be developed including a
cost/benefit/risk analysis around any provision for future expansion.
2.7.3 For new-build schemes, early agreement shall be reached with the planning
authority and Building Control on the timing of the installation of the low carbon heat
source (for example when 50% of the site has been developed).
2.7.4 For larger schemes, multiple primary heat sources shall be considered as these
may be required to maintain environmental benefits during the build-out period.
However, this should not significantly compromise the long-term cost and operational
efficiency.
2.7.5 The energy centre location shall be selected taking account of the overall
planning constraints of the scheme, the phasing of the network and space provision
for future expansion of plant capacity. Where necessary, consideration shall be given
to the use of temporary plant and associated fuel and utility supplies for emergency
use. Also see section 2.2.
2.7.6 If there is a cost penalty in the early years, and these costs have to be passed
on to customers, then a clear explanation shall be provided justifying any additional
charges.
Best practice
BP2.7a A phased development has the advantage that monitoring and recording of
energy usage data in the early phases can be used to inform the design, construction
and commissioning of later phases. Best practice could be to calibrate operational and
hydraulic models using this data.
BP2.7b Best practice could also be to consider opportunities to reduce carbon
emissions in future phases of the network, e.g. identifying alternative/additional heat
sources, future heat loads etc.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 60 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BP2.7c Best practice would be to set a carbon intensity of heat from the network at all
stages and then meet this in design and operation, even when taking into account
phasing of the development. Guru systems
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 7 - Examples of energy display devices linked to a heat meter

Objective 2.7 – Key outputs

Output 2.7a – Overall phasing plan
Output 2.7b – Future-proofing plan
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.8 – To assess lifecycle operation,

maintenance and replacement requirements, costs and
revenues
Why is this objective important?
Operational revenues/costs and maintenance requirements need to be considered at
the feasibility stage so that costs can be included in the economic model. The main
costs will be for fuel and electricity and the main revenues will be for heat sold and in
the case of CHP, electricity sold. Electricity may be sold to a licensed supplier or sold
direct to customers via a ‘private wire’ network.
Estimates also need to be made for non-energy operating costs. It is useful to split
these into fixed and variable costs. CIBSE Guide M provides further detail and
guidance related to all aspects of this objective.
Minimum requirements
2.8.1 An operational model shall be set-up for use in the economic analysis which
shall calculate the energy balance for the system including network heat losses from
which operating costs and revenues can be determined for use in the economic
model. Also see section 2.2.
2.8.2 Maintenance costs, including spares and consumables, shall be estimated for:
CHP, heat pumps or other primary plant, peak boilers, heat network (including the

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 61 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

surveillance system, make-up water and water treatment, energy centre building,
meters and the meter reading system, pipework, substations and HIUs within
buildings). See the BEIS Report (2014):
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/assessment-of-the-costs-performance-
and-characteristics-of-uk-heat-networks
2.8.3 Costs shall be estimated for heat meter reading and billing.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

2.8.4 Costs shall be estimated for staffing, management, business rates, insurances
and other overheads. Support from financial experts should be sought where
necessary.
2.8.5 The cost of parasitic energy electricity consumption e.g. electricity for pumping
energy, ventilation and burner fans, lighting, etc within the energy centre shall be
included. In the absence of detailed information, a figure for such electricity use of 2%
of the annual heat supplied to the heat network shall be used.
2.8.6 A long-term repair and replacement strategy shall be developed including
estimating the time at which major plant will be replaced, and the cost of this
replacement. This should ensure that the true long-term costs of maintaining and
replacing the plant required for the scheme are fully taken into account, including the
long-term carbon reduction implications. The scope of this strategy shall extend from
the energy centre to the final customer including the HIU and the metering system.
Best practice
BP2.8a Best practice would be to base costs on data obtained from actual operating
schemes where full details of the scheme are available to ensure it is of a similar type
to that being proposed.
Objective 2.8 – Key outputs
Output 2.8a – Operational energy model
Output 2.8b – Repair/replacement strategy
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.9 – To conduct a consistent economic

analysis and options appraisal
Why is this objective important?
The feasibility stage needs to establish a technically feasible scheme but should also
produce an economic analysis of the scheme which typically compares a number of
options with respect to lifecycle costs of heat supply and rate of return on the
investment in a consistent manner. Clearly, the operational costs and revenues are
key to this economic analysis, as discussed in section 2.8. However, the accuracy of
the capital cost model is also critical if robust figures are to be obtained from the
techno economic modelling.
Minimum requirements
2.9.1 An economic analysis shall be conducted in accordance with the Client’s
requirements and agreed in advance. This may not always accord with the

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 62 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

requirements set out below and shall take precedence. The financial appraisal shall
use the outputs of the plant techno economic optimisation, as detailed in section 2.2
and should use the same clearly documented assumptions. Clients need to implement
the Code in a responsible manner to ensure heat networks ultimately provide
customer satisfaction, affordability, longevity and sustainability.
2.9.2 The scheme shall be analysed using a discounted cashflow model taking
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

account of all costs and revenues, capital, replacement and operating, over a defined
period of analysis, and with an agreed discount rate to reflect the Clients cost of
capital.
2.9.3 The cashflow model shall be constructed for the agreed period of analysis
which is typically 25 years (but may be in the range 20 to 40 years) and shall include
costs for capital equipment replacements as needed (e.g. CHP plant). Further
guidance can be found in a suite of Detailed Project Development Guidance
Documents (BEIS 2016). See Heat Networks: guidance for developers and the supply
chain https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/heat-networks-guidance-for-
developers-and-the-supply-chain.
2.9.4 Energy prices shall be obtained either from existing customer’s contract prices,
where available, market indices such as Heren, or using quarterly prices as published
by BEIS. Electricity import/export prices shall be based on a day/night or STOD
(Seasonal Time Of Day) tariff structure, including DUoS charges where appropriate.
2.9.5a To assess the economic benefit of the scheme, revenues from heat, cooling
and power sales (where applicable) shall initially be determined by setting these equal
to the total heating costs (fuel, maintenance and capital replacement) that the
customer would have incurred over the same period if retaining the existing equipment
in operation i.e. the overall avoided costs. In the case of new developments, the
predominant form of conventional heating used for similar developments at the time of
the study (e.g. gas boilers) shall be used as a counterfactual. Alternative heat revenue
assumptions may be made in addition, e.g. to address fuel poverty.
2.9.5b A capital cost model shall be developed showing a full breakdown of the cost
components including: fuel supplies, energy centre, each individual low carbon
technology, heat network pipework (including trenching and road crossings), pumps,
transformers, thermal substations, HIUs and overall installation costs. Costs shall also
include estimates for commissioning, design fees, project management and a
contingency depending upon overall project risk. Capital costs should be as realistic
and robust as possible, based on discussions with suppliers/contractors and initial
budget quotations where possible. This CAPEX model should be within a target
tolerance of ±15% but shall not exceed ±20%. Feasibility is likely to include several
iterations with improving accuracy of CAPEX (and OPEX).
2.9.6 Where there are viable retrofit energy efficiency measures, these shall be
included in the analysis both for the counterfactual heating case and for the heat
networks case.
2.9.7 The discount rate to be used shall reflect the cost of capital to the investor, e.g.
for UK public sector investments this is normally set to 3.5% (in real terms), and the
analysis shall follow HM Treasury – The Green Book – Central Government Guidance
on Appraisal & Evaluation (2018). For other investors alternative figures shall be used
and agreed in advance with the Client body.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 63 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2.9.8 As a minimum, the project real pre-tax Internal Rate of Return (IRR) and the
Net Present Value (NPV) of each scheme option shall be determined.
2.9.9 The IRR and NPV shall be calculated initially for a base case assuming current
energy prices remain constant for the analysis period in real terms, and a sensitivity
analysis used to determine a range of outcomes depending on future trajectories of
key variables, see 2.10.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Best practice
BP2.9a (PART MOVED to 2.9.9) create a detailed profit and loss (P&L) and balance
sheet and a simplified indexed P&L and balance sheet for the duration of the scheme.
BP2.9b Best practice would be to value the CO2 saved using a social cost of carbon or
equivalent measure.
Objective 2.9 – Key outputs
Output 2.9a – Initial CAPEX model
Output 2.9b – Life cycle cashflow model
Output 2.9c – NPV and IRR calculations
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.10 – To analyse risks and carry out a

sensitivity analysis
Why is this objective important?
At the feasibility stage it is important to consider the risks of the project and a
sensitivity analysis can assist in quantifying the impact of these risks. This will aid the
decision as to whether to take the project to the next stage. A risk register should be
produced during the feasibility stage and maintained throughout the project, being
reviewed regularly, particularly when a decision is being made to proceed to the next
stage. Further detailed guidance on risks and sensitivities can be found in the Detailed
Project Development Guidance Documents (BEIS 2016).
Minimum requirements
2.10.1 A risk register shall be developed (a risk analysis workshop is often used to
assist in this) considering risks in different categories including:
- health, safety and environment
- construction costs and programme (including impact of phasing of new
developments)
- performance of plant and equipment
- broader economic risks – future energy prices, regulation
- planning and land ownership
- customer acceptance, heat sales volume risk, bad debt
- reputational risk.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 64 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2.10.2 The risk analysis shall examine the likelihood and severity of each risk, on
which party the risk will impact and propose mitigating actions. The likelihood and
severity of each risk shall be re-scored assuming the proposed mitigation measures
are in place.
2.10.3a Where actions can be taken to mitigate risks these shall be assigned to the
relevant party to take forward.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

2.10.3b Suitable contingencies shall be included in the OPEX and CAPEX models to
reflect the levels of risk shown in the risk register.
2.10.4 A sensitivity analysis shall be carried out to show the impact of each major risk
(both capital expenditure and operational expenditure risks) on the project economics
where possible, and to test the mitigation approach. The sensitivity analysis should
include modelling variations in:
- inflation assumptions
- the discount rate
- Assessing impacts of construction cost overspend and program overruns
- Varying heat/energy demands, both for predictions for new-build, and where
existing buildings do not connect or connect later than planned
- Projections of future fuel/energy/electricity prices such as those published by the
Interdepartmental Analysts Group (IAG), HM Treasury
- Projections of electricity grid emissions factors that reflect grid decarbonisation to
establish more realistic long-term carbon savings, see ‘Valuation of Energy Use
and Greenhouse Gas – Supplementary Guidance to the HM Treasury Green
Book (2018)’.
The aim of this analysis is to establish the impacts on the IRR and NPV, and the
impact on heat costs/prices if the IRR and NPV is held constant.
Best practice
BP2.10a Best practice would be to carry out more detailed studies of particular risk
mitigation measures so that the project can move into the next stage with a lower risk
profile.
Objective 2.10 – Key outputs
Output 2.10a – Risk register & risk analysis
Output 2.10b – Sensitivity analysis report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.11a – To assess environmental impacts and

benefits
Why is this objective important?
As a key purpose of a heat network is to help meet our climate change goals, an
analysis of the reduction in CO2 emissions between the current system and the

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 65 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

proposed heat network is important. However, there is also the potential for negative
environmental impacts that need to be considered. In particular there may be
additional NOX and particulate emissions, increased noise and visual impact. High
NOX emissions may prohibit the use of CHP and biomass in inner city areas and
particulate emissions may restrict the use of biomass, unless specific flue gas
treatment is included. Some understanding of impacts during construction may also
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

be important to consider at feasibility stage. It is assumed that more detailed work

would be needed during the design stage to support a planning application, see
Objective 3.13, however initial discussions with planners will be helpful at this stage.
Minimum requirements
2.11a.1 CO2 emission calculations shall be based on published emission factors and
realistic efficiencies for central plant both for the full build-out and the early years of
growth. For the purposes of planning and building control compliance calculations in
new-build schemes, emission factors used in Part L of the Building Regulations should
be used. However, for both new and existing buildings, the DH feasibility study shall
use emission factors taken from ‘Valuation of Energy Use and Greenhouse Gas –
Supplementary Guidance to the HM Treasury Green Book (2018)’ to ensure a
consistent approach to electricity grid emissions factors that reflect grid
decarbonisation.
2.11a.2 Heat losses from the network and electricity used for pumping and other
purposes shall be calculated and taken into account in the CO2 emissions
calculations.
2.11a.3 The potential impact of NOX emissions and particulate emissions shall be
estimated. A full dispersion model to assess ground level concentrations would not
normally be undertaken at this stage unless these emissions were considered to be a
significant factor in the viability of the project, or the potential flue height could present
planning or aesthetic issues. However, the local environmental policies in relation to
air quality should be investigated.
2.11a.4a Where biofuels or other low carbon fuels are used, there may need to be an
assessment of wider environmental impacts such as their sustainability credentials
around production, processing and transport requirements.
2.11a.4b Where gas-fired CHP (>300 kWe) is to be used without further treatment in
an air quality management area, the TA-Luft standard for NOx of 250 mg/Nm3 at 5%
O2 shall be specified, or the requirements of the local planning authority where these
are more onerous. The design shall also comply with the Medium Plant Combustion
Directive and associated regulations.
2.11a.4c Where refrigerants are to be used in low carbon plant e.g. heat pumps, then
these shall be selected to minimise total Global Warming Potential using predicted
refrigerant leakage rates. An assessment of the likely greenhouse gas emissions
associated with refrigerant leakage shall be made and expressed as CO2 equivalent
emissions. Careful consideration should be given to the longevity of refrigerant supply,
as many are being gradually phased-out.
2.11a.5 Normally an acoustic survey is not undertaken at this stage. However, the
selection of a site for the energy centre shall take account of the potential for
noise/vibration impacts and seek to minimise these by appropriate choices ensuring
that sufficient mitigation and cost has been allocated.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 66 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2.11a.6 The choice of a suitable site for the energy centre shall take into account
visual impact issues. At this stage, visual impact will be quantified by considering the
plan area and height of the energy centre and stack. The disturbance or removal of
trees/roots, including any approvals required, should also be given careful
consideration. Also see sections 2.2 and 2.7.
2.11a.7 Where appropriate, pre-application discussions shall be held with the local
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

planning authority to establish the key policies and issues that will enable a planning
application strategy and scope of work to be developed for the next stage of the work.
For example, environmental impact assessment of particular impacts such as air
quality analysis, using a dispersion model.
Best practice
BP2.11a (NOW COVERED BY 2.11.1) Best practice would be to calculate the lifetime
CO2 savings, taking account of changes to the electricity and gas systems over time
and the likely plant replacement options.
BP2.11a.b Best practice would be to calculate the CO2 emissions based on hourly
future predicted marginal electricity emission factors. Alternatively, an analysis using
marginal emission factors could be carried out. In the future, the average emissions
factor and the marginal emissions factor are likely to be significantly different as more
nuclear and renewables are added to the mix, so best practice could include an
analysis of benefits using marginal emission factors.
Objective 2.11a – Key outputs
Output 2.11a.a – Life cycle CO2 emissions calculations
Output 2.11a.b – Network heat losses calculations
Output 2.11a.c – NOx emissions calculations
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.11b – To develop a comprehensive feasibility

study report
Why is this objective important?
It is essential that the whole of the CP1 Stage 2 process is summarised into a
comprehensive feasibility study report. This should set out the reasoning behind a
particular single solution being taken forward into detailed design and
commercialisation. The Client must agree a final version with the feasibility team and,
where possible, with the designers that are appointed to conduct Stage 3. The
feasibility study report should provide a clear brief for the next stage of work in order
to ensure that any design work carries forward the optimal solution. Without a
comprehensive feasibility study then it is unlikely that detailed design will bring the
optimal heat network and low carbon technology solution to fruition.
Minimum requirements

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 67 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

2.11b.1 The Client and their technical advisors shall develop a clear and
comprehensive feasibility study report to provide a summary of Stage 2 and a brief for
design work in Stage 3. This shall include:
- Outcomes from energy/heat mapping and masterplanning, identifying the main
opportunities for a heat network, the core scheme options, anchor loads, future
phases, their timeline, key dependencies, constraints, and strategic risks.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- Results of techno-economic feasibility and modelling of the main scheme options

using a range of low carbon technologies to supply the heat network.
- Outcomes of stakeholder engagement, setting out the appetite/suitability to
connect to a future heat network, stakeholder drivers and possible scheme
governance options.
- A clear recommended optimal solution with sufficient detail to allow the design
process to go forward, if a viable scheme has been identified. This shall identify:
o peak heat demands and annual heat consumptions
o the most suitable low carbon heat sources and location of any energy
centre(s) including the location of top-up and standby boilers and use of
existing boilers
o optimal operating temperatures and control strategies
o heat network distribution routes, pipe sizes and costs
o building connection costs including heat metering
o operation and maintenance requirements and costs
o a full breakdown of CAPEX and whole life OPEX
o whole life NPV, IRR and carbon savings
o phasing of the development
o risks and mitigation strategies
o environmental impacts and benefits
o possible business structures and procurement strategies
- a proposed heat tariff structure. Preferably with a structure that charges for peak
supply and high return temperatures as operators need to reduce both prior to
committing to DH connection.
2.11b.2 The ‘Statement of Applicability’ shall be updated, setting out which parts of the
Code are not applicable to the particular scheme being recommended/developed.
2.11b.3 A delivery programme (Gantt chart) shall be developed to show stages,
timescales and key milestones.
2.11b.4 A risk register shall be developed including mitigation measures around
technical, commercialisation, business case and legal issues, including procurement
and delivery issues.
Best practice
BP2.11b Best practice would be to develop a report on low cost actions that can be
undertaken between feasibility and design stages to improve the understanding of

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 68 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

heat loads, also the potential to optimise the building connections and proposed DH
scheme. This might include detailed monitoring of existing buildings, trials of lower
operating temperatures and optimum start systems, also cost-effective modification to
existing building fabric and services.
Objective 2.11b – Key outputs
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Output 2.11b.a – Feasibility study report

Output 2.11b.b – Updated Statement of Applicability
Output 2.11b.c – Delivery programme
Output 2.11b.d – Risk register
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 2.12 – To contribute to the development of

business structure, contract strategy and procurement
strategy
Why is this objective important?
Although a feasibility stage report will focus on the technical aspects of scheme
development, at this stage Clients should consider the wider steps necessary to
progress a heat network project towards implementation, as shown previously in Table
LLL. It is usual at this stage to begin to develop an implementation strategy and to
consider issues of ownership, control, contracts and procurement. It is essential that
this involves legal and financial experts alongside the technical feasibility consultant,
see Figure PPP showing the collaborative approach at this stage. Although much of
detailed project development and commercialisation fall outside CP1, the technical
feasibility and design teams need to be fully involved in supporting this work.

LEGAL

FINANCIAL TECHNICAL

Figure PPP – The combination of skills required to develop an overall business case and
implementation strategy

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 69 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure GGG – Typical heat network development project lifecycle (BEIS)

A typical heat network development project lifecycle is shown in Figure GGG and
further guidance can be found in a suite of Detailed Project Development Guidance
Documents (BEIS 2016) covering:
- Guidance on the economic and financial case, development of the financial
model heat pricing and maximising opportunities
- Guidance on the strategic and commercial case
- Guidance on powers, public procurement and State Aid
- Template Heads of Terms
The degree of scrutiny that should be applied to assessing the business case for a
project should be commensurate with the project value and risk, and the Client’s own
requirements. A business case will typically be produced jointly by legal, financial and
technical advisors to recommend a preferred option for the procurement, construction,
ownership, and operation of the preferred business aspect of the scheme including
heat generation, heat distribution and heat supply.
There is a broad spectrum of models available for implementing projects. This can
include use of special purpose vehicles which can be either wholly owned by a public
or private sector stakeholder, or with joint public and private shares. Some of the more
common options are illustrated in Table 5 taken from Detailed Project Development
Guidance Documents (BEIS 2016).

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 70 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Table 5 - Different options for ownership and operation of heat network schemes (BEIS)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

The definition of the overall preferred business strategy helps to define the contracts
that need to be put in place. The business case will identify these, and provisional
contract terms shall be developed e.g. to cover who the contracting parties are in each
case, responsibilities being proposed, charging arrangements (including tariff
structures) and risk allocation (including use of KPIs and SLAs, guarantees, damages,
etc. to ensure parties are correctly incentivised).
The business case will also consider exit strategy and termination provisions (e.g.
bankruptcy of any of the parties) and the position at the end of any long-term contract
for operation, including the required condition of the plant at termination. To ensure
continuity of service, the process for re-tendering for appointment of a future
operator/ESCo shall be considered and a suitable period allowed as well as a
procedure for contract extensions by mutual agreement.
Minimum requirements
2.12.1 The Client shall appoint financial, legal and project management experts to
assist in developing a business case, procurement strategy and delivery programme.
The roles set out in the introduction to the Code (see Section v) shall be allocated
appropriately in the business case.
2.12.2 The technical feasibility study advisor shall collaborate with the other advisors
to develop the business case.
2.12.3 The Client shall ensure that suitable resource (internal and/or external) is
available to provide the necessary financial, legal and project management expertise
to develop the business case and this should clearly define the interface with the
technical feasibility study advisors’ work.
2.12.4 The business case shall include an assessment of the potential and preferred
business vehicle taking into account key aspects including, for example:

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 71 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- Procurement strategy – how should works & services be procured, when and by
whom?
- Finance – how is the investment capital to be raised for the project?
- Risk – how should the high level risks be allocated?
- Legal and contractual structures/issues
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- Customer billing approach, accompanying tariff structure(s), indicative minimum

contract duration(s) and method(s) proposed for price escalation
- Governance – where does overall control of the development of the scheme best
lie?
- Exit strategy at the end of any contractual period (see 2.12.6 below)
This process will lead to a definition of the responsibilities of the various stakeholders
in the scheme and a joint understanding of the overall project objectives.
2.12.5 A recommended procurement strategy shall be developed in line with the
business case above.
Best practice
BP2.12a Best practice would include a more detailed analysis of potential scheme
extensions and new connections. This could include a list of target buildings and the
main stakeholders to be contacted in the future. This should also include building
owners such as health care trusts, social landlords and developers seeking planning
permission.
Objective 2.12 – Key outputs
Output 2.12a – The business case (redacted if necessary to protect sensitive
commercial information)
Output 2.12b – Procurement strategy
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 72 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3. Design
Objectives:
3.1 To design for safety in construction, operation and maintenance and to
achieve quality of design
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.2 To accurately assess and minimise peak heat demands and annual heat
consumptions
3.3 To select suitable building interfaces, direct or indirect connections
3.4 To design or modify suitable space heating and domestic hot water
services systems
3.5 To achieve an energy-efficient primary heat network
3.6 To achieve a low cost network – optimisation of routes and pipe sizing for
minimum lifecycle cost
3.7 To achieve a reliable network with a long life and low maintenance
requirements
3.8 To define a metering strategy, select heat metering, pre-payment and
billing systems that are accurate and cost-effective
3.9 To achieve an efficient heat distribution system within a multi-residential
building, and to reduce the risk of overheating
3.10 To design a cost-effective and efficient central plant
3.11 To optimise the use of thermal storage
3.12 To finalise the economic analysis, risk analysis and sensitivities
3.13 To assess environmental impacts and benefits
3.14 To collaborate in establishing scheme investability

Objective 3.1 – To design for safety in construction,

operation and maintenance and to achieve quality of
design
Why is this objective important?
Reducing health and safety risks is of primary importance in any project. The designer
has a key role to carry out a designer’s risk assessment and then to mitigate these
risks by taking appropriate design decisions. The designer needs to consider how the
design will be constructed and operated. The health and safety of the general public
during construction must be considered particularly as heat networks are often
installed through publicly accessible areas.
There is a need to set general standards for the design work and for this to follow
recognised standards.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 73 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Minimum requirements – safety

3.1.1 The Client body shall recognise their role and obligations under the CDM
Regulations and register the project as one governed by the CDM Regulations prior to
the start of the design process. The Client shall appoint the Principal Designer.
3.1.2 The designer shall diligently carry out the requirements under the CDM
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Regulations carrying out a designer’s risk assessment at an early stage of the design.
Where appropriate a HAZID or HAZOP assessment should be carried out involving
contractors, equipment supplies and operators, and this should be ongoing throughout
the process.
3.1.3 The designer shall mitigate risks in construction, operation, maintenance and
decommissioning as far as possible and provide a risk register containing the residual
risks for use in the construction stage.
3.1.4 The design shall provide suitable access to plant and equipment in the energy
centre to enable maintenance work to be carried out safely. Equipment that may need
to be operated in an emergency or that requires regular maintenance shall be installed
at low level or provided with access gantries.
3.1.5 The design shall locate valve chambers and other facilities across the heat
network requiring access (including surveillance system monitoring terminals) in a
suitable location so that safe operation and maintenance can be carried out.
3.1.6 Adequate access and other provisions shall be made to enable safe
replacement of plant in the future. A plant replacement strategy report shall be
produced during the design stage, to include: a schedule of plant with sizes and
weights, access arrangements, any requirements for specialist lifting equipment and
the need for temporary plant during the replacement work.
3.1.7 Trench depths shall be minimised as far as possible to reduce the risks to
trench operatives, provided these are in accordance with the network pipe
manufacturer’s guidance, EN standards and that the network design is not
compromised.
3.1.8a Consideration shall be given when selecting suitable operating temperatures
and pressures to safety risks for both heat network operators and customers.
3.1.8b The design of DHW system shall follow appropriate guidance in relation to any
risks associated with legionella, see HSG 274 (Part 2, 2014) and ACOP L8 (2013).
Further guidance can be found in CIBSE TM13 (2013). The requirements of BS EN
8558 (2015) and BS EN 806 (2012) shall be followed.
3.1.9 An assessment of residential customers shall be carried out to establish if low
surface temperature radiators and temperature control of hot water outlets is required
even when not a regulatory requirement.
3.1.10 A fire risk assessment shall be carried out for the Energy Centre and
plantrooms. The risk assessment shall include fuel types, plant and equipment, the
location in proximity to residential or commercial buildings and the interface with fire
systems in these buildings. The local fire service shall be consulted about the project.
3.1.11 COSHH and DSEAR risk assessments shall be carried out to determine
mitigation or control measures of associated risks. These control measures shall be
included in the design at an early stage.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 74 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Minimum requirements – quality

3.1.12 The appointed design company shall be certified under ISO 9001: 2008 Quality
Management System or operate in accordance with an equivalent quality assurance
scheme.
3.1.13 The design shall be developed so that the heat network operator can achieve
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

ISO 14001 and ISO 18001 certification.

Objective 3.1 – Key outputs
Output 3.1a – Health & Safety plan
Output 3.1b – Quality Management Plan
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.2 – To accurately assess and minimise peak

heat demands and annual heat consumptions
Why is this objective important?
At the design stage the values used for peak heat demand will determine the capacity
of the heat network, the capacity of the building connections, the capacity of the peak
boilers and this will therefore determine much of the capital cost. The annual heat
consumption and daily demand profiles will determine the capacity of the primary heat
source such as a CHP plant and the capacity of the thermal store, also important
elements of the capital cost. The annual heat consumption will determine the heat
revenues that could be received to finance the project.
For new buildings the heat demand estimates should be produced by the appointed
building services designer although the heat network designer may have valuable
advice to offer based on previous experience. It is vital that a consensus is reached at
this stage to avoid the potential for significantly oversizing or undersizing the network.
For existing non-domestic buildings, it will normally be the responsibility of the
Client/designer to define the peak heat demand that they wish to contract for and to
provide an estimate of their annual heat energy consumption. However, this analysis
should be with the close involvement of the heat network designer/operator who may
be able to draw on experience of supplying similar buildings.
For existing residential buildings, the heat network company will need to estimate
peak and annual demands based on modelling or experience from supplying buildings
of similar size and type, or where block boilers are used from fuel consumption data.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 75 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Diversity of demand
With large heating systems it is important to consider the impact of diversity in
demand. The diversity factor at any point in the network can be defined as:
= Peak demand that occurs at this point in the heat network (kW)
The sum of the peak demands at each customer supply point downstream (kW)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

(See Figure 8)
The design peak demand at each customer is normally the maximum demand that the
heat network can supply, which is set at commissioning by limiting the maximum flow
rate. This may be higher than the actual heat demand of the building experienced as
design margins are often built-in.
Hence there are normally two elements that contribute to an overall diversity factor as
seen in practice – ‘true’ diversity as a result of the demand peaks not being coincident
and ‘inherent oversizing of connections’ meaning the design peak demand is higher
than the actual demand of the building and which does not occur in practice, or for
only a very short period under cold start-up conditions.
On very large heat networks with a wide mix of customers, the overall diversity factor
(space and hot water heating) at the heat supply point can be significant, e.g. around
70%, (see CIBSE Guide A, Table 5.13) which would enable pipe sizes near to the
supply point and peak boiler capacities to be reduced accordingly.
On residential systems, the peak demand for the block is always found to be
significantly less than the sum of the peak design demand calculated for each
dwelling. Many dwelling space heating demand calculations e.g. using BS12831
assume that there is heat loss to adjacent unoccupied properties. If these heat
demands are then multiplied up by the number of dwellings to give a block heat
demand there will be significant oversizing. See requirement 3.2.9.

Figure 8 - Diagram to show definition of diversity factor

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 76 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Space Heating diversity

An alternative approach is to apply a space heating diversity factor using the dwelling
space heating demands calculated with heat losses to adjacent properties. The
following ‘rule of thumb’ is often used in Denmark (Varme Stabi 7th edition, 1st print
2015, published by Praxis – Nyt Teknisk Forlag 2015, see http://staabi.dk/.)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Space heating diversity = 0.62 + 0.38/N where N is the number of dwellings

This is shown in Figure JJJ.

Diversity factors are important when instantaneous hot water heat exchangers are
used which may have peak demands of 35kW to 45kW per dwelling. The probability of
all hot water outlets being in use in a multi-dwelling building at any one time is very
remote and so the diversity factor is significant and must be applied to avoid
oversizing of the distribution pipework (see separate box below).
In some circumstances there may be much less diversity even for domestic hot water,
e.g. for buildings such as student accommodation blocks where use patterns may be
more coincident.

Figure JJJ - Rule of thumb space heating diversity factors

In both new-build and retrofit schemes there are significant uncertainties in how the
heat demands may develop over time and there will be a need to make a judgement
regarding the potential for expansion. In practice some oversizing of the primary
network is not a major economic penalty as the pumping energy will be lower. Within
the pressure constraints of the system, it will be possible to supply more heat than the
original design through the same network by increasing pump pressures and
operating energy. Network capacity can also be increased through increasing dT, by
increasing DH flow temperatures and / or reducing return temperatures from existing
network customers. This means that most networks, if conservatively designed, will
have considerable flexibility in the heat demands that can be economically supplied.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 77 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Minimum requirements
3.2.1 Peak demands for existing buildings shall be assessed by the Client/designer
from a combination of data on fuel use (accounting for system efficiency), existing
boiler use, and building simulation modelling or other calculation of heat losses as
appropriate. This assessment should be supported by the heat network designer who
may be able to use data from monitoring demands at similar buildings to assist.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Temporary monitoring of existing buildings should also be considered at this stage,

where this has not been carried out at the feasibility study stage.
3.2.2 For existing non-domestic buildings, space heating consumptions in each
month shall be estimated by the Client/designer, in conjunction with the heat network
designer, from fuel or heat meter readings together with a degree day analysis to
produce hourly heat consumptions for each month for an average year taking account
of the location of the building, the required internal space temperature and an
appropriate baseline temperature for the building. The designer shall identify the
existing LTHW system dT in order to minimise the required DH supply capacity. The
DH connection will be cheaper if the designer can find opportunities within the building
to lower the peak demands and lower the return temperature.
3.2.3 For existing dwellings, calculations shall be carried out by the building
owner/operator (e.g. local authority or housing association) using established
calculation methodologies and these calculations shall be agreed with the heat
network designer. For private dwellings the heat network designer shall carry out the
calculations. Sample dwelling types shall be used where necessary to determine peak
heat demands and annual consumptions for space heating and hot water and then
extrapolate these for the whole area/load.
3.2.4 For new non-domestic buildings, heat demands shall be estimated using a
combination of modelling software, guidance in CIBSE Guide F (CIBSE, 2012) and
TM46 (CIBSE, 2008). Other sources of benchmark data, including data from the local
heat network operator, or data obtained from similar operational schemes can be
used.
3.2.5 For new dwellings, heat demands shall be estimated using standard design
calculation methodologies based on the proposed fabric standards, and where
possible, in combination with data from the local heat network operator.
3.2.6 For dwellings, the space heating consumption shall be profiled using degree
days to obtain hourly monthly consumptions and a 24-hour variation in demand
created for heating and hot water demand.
3.2.7 Where instantaneous hot water heat exchangers are used for the domestic hot
water service, the peak demands shall be diversified using the BS EN 806 curve in
Figure 9 and Appendix R. Alternatively, the designer may also use one of the other
diversity curves in Figure 9 and Appendix R or a combination of these. Where the
designer has access to measured demand data taken at short time intervals of less
than 1 minute, obtained from a group of dwellings of similar type and occupancy, then
this data can be used to define a more specific diversity curve. It is important to
consider the probability distribution of the measured diversified demand, also
separating out space heating demands from hot water demands, and to consider the
impact of variations in cold water feed temperature. A detailed modelling approach
may also be used to simulate the expected demands based on assumptions for the
numbers of outlets, the occupancy, and the timing and duration of use of each outlet.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 78 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.2.8 An appropriate diversity factor shall be applied to the space heating demand.
This can be derived from operational data for a heat network of similar size and mix of
heat customers, or where the results from detailed modelling can be used to calculate
a diversity factor. Where operational data is not available and detailed modelling not
possible, then the rule of thumb formula shown in Figure JJJ, which is commonly used
in Denmark, may be used.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.2.9 For new blocks of flats, the peak space heating demand for the block as a whole
shall be calculated assuming full occupancy with no heat transfer between dwellings
and no margin for heat-up times i.e. a steady state heat loss. This will avoid the over-
estimation of the block peak demand which would result from simply adding up the
individual dwelling space heating demands that may have been calculated using
methods which allow for losses between dwellings. This peak space heating demand
shall be used for sizing the connection to the block and the thermal substation heat
exchanger (if used). However, the secondary distribution pumps (if used) shall be
selected to deliver the required space heating flow rate under a cold start-up
condition. This will mean that heat will be uniformly distributed throughout the block
during early morning peak periods.
Diversity curves for domestic hot water services
There are a number of sources of diversity curves which may be used to estimate
peak demands at any point within the distribution pipework, and hence determine pipe
sizes and the peak capacity required for the block. These sources (discussed below)
all assume that domestic hot water is generated centrally and so do not apply directly
to the case of instantaneous hot water production at the dwelling. However, the flow
rates in the heat network within the block (secondary system) will be closely related to
the flow rates of the domestic hot water supply when using instantaneous water
heaters.
BS EN 806 Part 3: 2006
This part of BS EN 806 provides a method of pipe sizing for domestic hot and cold
water services supplied from a central source for the block. The graph presented in
the standard has been used to derive a diversity factor for a typical dwelling containing
one bath, one wash hand basin and one kitchen sink. See Figure 9.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 79 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

1.000

0.900

0.800

0.700
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

0.600
Diversity factor

0.500

0.400

0.300

0.200

0.100

0.000
1 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 91 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191
Number of dwellings

Danish DS439 Swedish DHA BSEN806 LUmax=4

Figure 9 - Diversity factors for instantaneous domestic hot water systems for dwellings (this data is also
provided in Appendix R)
F101 – DH Substations, February 2016 Energi Foretagen/Swedish District
Heating Association
Appendix 10 of this reference provides a formula to calculate the required maximum
flow rate of a centralised heat exchanger supplying hot water with a recirculating
system. For pipe sizing it is recommended to use BS EN 806-3:2006. This formula has
been used to derive the curve in Figure 9 and the diversity factors in Appendix R.
DS 439 – Danish Standards Institute
This standard is for the design of hot and cold water services within a building. It has
been widely used in designing UK schemes for over 20 years and is applicable to
most situations. The absolute power required to serve N standard dwellings, including
an allowance for heat exchanger fouling, is calculated from the following equation in
DS 439:
Pmax = 1.19 × N + 18.8 × N ^ 0.5 + 17.6
Where Pmax is the total heat rate required for DHW production for the group of
dwellings in kW and N is the number of ‘normal’ dwellings (see below).
By putting N = 1 in this equation it can be seen that the instantaneous hot water
heating rate for a single dwelling has been taken as 37.6 kW which is a typical heat
exchanger capacity.
In DS 439 a ‘standard’ dwelling is assumed to have 3.5 residents, including a
bathroom with a bathtub or shower. The calculation is based on an energy demand for
hot water of 4.36 kWh per day. The standard includes a methodology for assessing
demands for groups of dwellings which differ from this ‘standard’ dwelling.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 80 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

There has been limited data published which has been obtained from monitoring
recently constructed schemes. However, the work by Guru Systems Ltd, completed
under the DECC SBRI research programme, has indicated that the use of DS439
would tend to overestimate the demands.
https://www.cibsejournal.com/technical/on-a-mission-using-data-to-optimise-heat-
networks/
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Non-standard dwellings
The diversity curves presented here are considered to be suitable for most
applications i.e. average sized apartments with one bathroom. For other cases, more
detailed calculation and modelling is recommended. The following factors need to be
considered in relation to sizing of instantaneous hot water heat exchangers and
diversity factors. It is the combination of these that determine the design flow rates.
Diversity within a dwelling
Where there are dwellings in a block that have multiple bathrooms, the designer will
need to consider the potential for diversity within the dwelling and hence the required
design condition. For example, although there may be a bathroom and two en-suite
shower rooms it is unlikely that all of these will be in use at the same time. So, for
example, the heat exchanger may be sized for say one bath and one shower to be in
use at any time and the occupant advised that the performance would be affected if
three outlets are used at the same time.
Occupancy level
For dwellings with high occupancy and a single bathroom, the hot water load will be
more continuous over a longer period of time than dwellings with low occupancy
where use will be more intermittent. This will mean there is less diversity (higher
diversity factor) across a number of such dwellings as the demands are more likely to
overlap.
Type of hot water outlet
For some types of hot water outlets e.g. multiple outlet high volume showers, the rate
of flow required may justify a larger heat exchanger, especially if there is more than
one such outlet in the dwelling and the design requirement is for both to be in
operation together. The diversity factor applied would be the same as for the standard
case (or could even be lower if it is assumed that the duration of the shower use was
shorter).
Lifestyle impacts
Diversity will also be influenced by the lifestyle of the occupants. Where the occupants
are expected to have similar lifestyles in terms of their daily routine, the diversity will
be less (higher diversity factor) e.g. student accommodation. Whether people use
baths or showers will also have an impact as shower use is typically shorter.
Occupancy level
Designers would normally assume full occupancy of a block to ensure the demands
can be met should this circumstance occur at any point in the future. In practice, full
occupancy on any given day is unlikely, which means some margin on the design will
exist.
A ‘normal’ dwelling

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 81 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

In DS 439 a ‘normal’ dwelling is assumed to have 3.5 residents, including a bathroom

with a bathtub or shower. The calculation is the same and with a resulting energy
demand of 4.36 kWh. The kitchen sink is not included in the calculation. A hand
washbasin and bidet are only included in the calculation for flats with 2 bathrooms.
The number of ‘normal’ dwellings is calculated from the actual/real number of
dwellings, number of residents per dwelling, as well as number of bathrooms and
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

‘effects per tapping’. The number of the building’s ‘normal’ dwellings are found as the
building’s energy demand per day divided by the energy consumption per day of a
‘normal’ dwelling:

N= S (nxpxvxE)
3.5 x 4.36
where N is the number of ‘normal’ dwellings, n is the actual number of dwellings, p is
the number of residents per flat, v is the number of DHW units in the dwelling and E is
the calculated energy demand per DHW unit.
To calculate the numerator in the equation, the dwellings are divided into groups, so
that the dwellings within one group are the same in terms of number of residents and
the number of DHW units (i.e. number of bathrooms). For each group the product of n,
p, v and E is calculated, and finally the sum of the results for the respective groups is
found.

Best practice
BP3.2a Best practice, initiated at the feasibility study stage or at the start of the design
stage, would be to determine peak demands for existing buildings by monitoring the
heat currently supplied to existing buildings, including monitoring external air
temperature, using existing or temporary meters and recording data at hourly or half-
hourly intervals. Datalogging can be carried out using the BEMS, AMR or separate
data logger. Gas suppliers and other metering service providers can now provide half-
hourly gas meter data at very low costs and this should be sought at the earliest
opportunity. This data can be used to help produce a heat profile for a typical year for
use in the operating model. For new developments it may be possible to monitor the
operation of the first phase, provided occupancy levels are known, to inform the
design of later phases.
Objective 3.2 – Key outputs
Output 3.2a – Report confirming peak/annual heat demands
Output 3.2b – Report re-estimating likely future heat demands
Output 3.2c – Report confirming energy centre plant capacities
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.3 – To select suitable building interfaces,

direct or indirect connections
Why is this objective important?

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 82 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

A fundamental design choice is whether the buildings or dwellings are directly

connected to the heat network (where the water in the network flows directly through
the heating circuits of the building) or indirectly where a heat exchanger is used to
provide a physical barrier to the water. The choice has an impact on cost and
operating temperatures and pressures. Both types have been used in UK schemes,
with indirect connections more prevalent. Direct connection can also use a mixing
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

control valve such that the secondary flow temperature can be set lower than the
primary flow temperature and can be varied with outside air temperature. Further
guidance can be found in Heat Networks Design Guide (Parsloe Consulting, 2018)
and Guidelines for Connecting to Heat Networks – Part 2 (LB of Islington 2015).
Indirect connection has the following benefits:
- Any leaks within the building or dwelling will have limited potential for damage
and will not impact other customers as there is a hydraulically separate system of
limited volume.
- The building’s heating systems are not subject to the heat network pressures
(and pressure transients), which are often higher, so radiators, valves, etc. do not
need to have high pressure ratings and the heat network pressures do not need
to be constrained – the heat network parameters can be changed over time more
easily. Tall buildings usually operate at higher pressures and so may be the
exception to this.
- The heat network minimum static pressure is not determined by the required
static pressure for any high buildings.
- Building and network water is kept separate so there is less scope for contractual
disputes over contamination or loss of system water if these systems are in
different ownership.
- HIUs and thermal substations can provide a clear boundary setting out ownership
and operational responsibilities.
Direct connection has the following benefits:
- Avoids the cost of HIUs or thermal substations
- Lower cost than indirect as it is a simpler system.
- Less complex, fewer components, so lower maintenance cost and fewer points of
failure e.g. pressurisation plant, pumps
- No need for secondary pumps to be installed together with the power supplies
and controls.
- No increase in primary return temperatures across a heat exchanger.
- Lower flow temperatures can be used
- More compact - less plantroom space needed.
- No risk to supply from fouling of heat exchanger
- Secondary/tertiary system water treatment and water make-up is not required as
the DH water system circulates in the building and is already treated centrally.
- Reducing flow temperatures using weather compensation is easily achieved.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 83 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Direct connection is usually used for smaller systems, especially within apartment
blocks and is more common on continental schemes than in the UK.
Current practice for both dwellings and non-domestic buildings is to pre-fabricate the
necessary heat exchangers and control valves in a compact unit called a substation or
in the case of dwellings a Heat Interface Unit (HIU). BESA operate an HIU testing
scheme, details are shown in BESA UK Test Regime – Technical Specification (2018)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

(www.thebesa.com/ukhiu).
Minimum requirements
3.3.1 A study shall be carried out to assess the costs and benefits of direct and
indirect connections at a building level and at an individual dwelling level. This study
may be project specific or generic where a number of projects are being developed to
a standardised design to keep costs down. Costs to consider for an indirect
connection should include:
- Increased pipe sizing due to lower secondary/tertiary temperatures and higher
primary return temperatures
- Higher operating costs due to higher return temperatures (higher pumping, higher
heat loss, lower plant efficiency, low effective thermal storage capacity)
- Higher operating and maintenance costs for additional plant and increased
number of systems to manage water quality
- Higher capital cost for plant (heat exchangers, pumps, pressurisation units),
electrical connections, monitoring and control systems, space requirements,
builders work, additional commissioning costs.
3.3.2a Where indirect connection is used the heat exchanger shall be sized with an
approach temperature [primary return (outlet) temperature – secondary return (inlet)
temperature] of less than 5°C.

Figure 8 - Typical dwelling hydraulic interface unit – shown with cover on and removed

3.3.2b The design of thermal substations shall aim to deliver low return temperatures
over a wide range of loads. This is dependent on the selection and control of the
primary-side control valve, and the selection and design of the heat exchanger. The
designer shall consider one or more of the following:

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 84 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- the use of two control valves with one sized for the low demand condition
- the use of two heat exchangers each with their own control valve and controlled
as duty/assist (which will also improve security of supply) so that the flow in the
heat exchangers remains turbulent rather than laminar at low flow rates
- the use of a temperature difference between primary flow and secondary flow of
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

more than 5°C to take account of variations in flow temperature

- a control system where the secondary set-point is overridden to ensure that it is
always lower than the primary flow temperature by a suitable margin
- a control system that also incorporates return temperature control
- the use of a heat exchanger to generate domestic hot water from the primary DH
supply, instead of from the secondary circuit, enabling the space heating heat
exchanger to be shut down in summer
- for larger buildings with higher DHW loads, the use of a two-stage design where
domestic hot water is heated first by the space heating return circuit. See Figure
QQQ from the Euroheat & Power Guidelines for district heating substations
(2008).

Figure QQQ – Indirect 2-stage thermal substation connection (Courtesy of Euroheat & Power)

3.3.3 Where boilers are being retained within the building for use at times of high
demand, the connection design shall ensure that the heat network heat supply is
prioritised, and the boilers used only when required to supplement this. This may be

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 85 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

achieved by connecting the heat network supply either in series with the boilers, i.e.
into the return circuit or in parallel. The parallel connection requires the flow into the
boilers to be controlled so that the supply from the heat network is maximised.
3.3.4 For either direct or indirect systems, large bodied strainers with appropriate
mesh size shall be specified to reduce the risk of dirt accumulating on valves and heat
exchangers. Equipment manufacturers shall be consulted to ensure that all items are
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

protected including HIUs, pumps, valves and meters.

3.3.5 For either direct or indirect systems, control valves shall be two-port so that a
variable volume control principle is established.
3.3.6 The design of plantrooms for the heat network interface substations shall
include future-proofing by providing sufficient space for maintenance access and for
future replacement of equipment. Designs shall provide suitable power supplies
including for use when carrying out maintenance, lighting, ventilation, water supply
and drainage facilities.
3.3.7 Where remote control and monitoring of substations is to be implemented, the
data communication system shall be selected at an early stage to ensure the correct
interfaces are specified for all equipment and to allow any new communications
infrastructure (e.g. fibre network) to be installed at the same time as the pipe network.
Best practice
BP3.3a The responsibility of the heat network operator should include the heat
distribution system within a block of flats wherever possible. Whenever there is a
hydraulic break in a system there will be an increase in return temperature which will
increase heat losses and reduce the temperature difference on the primary network
leading to higher costs (for a fixed flow temperature). Where apartment blocks are
connected it would be considered best practice to have an indirect connection either
at the dwelling or at the entry to the building but not both. However, where there are
high tower blocks, static pressures need to be considered and a further hydraulic
break may be needed e.g. half way up the block to form a pressure break. Automatic
leak detection systems are available with direct connection HIUs.
BP3.3b Best practice, especially for new-build residential schemes, would be to
design the connections so that the HIU is accessible from outside the dwelling to
enable maintenance to be carried out, although all user controls and meter displays
shall be internal to the dwelling. The ability to isolate the property with external valves
is of value to minimise the risk of damage in the event of a leak within an unoccupied
property.
BP3.3c Where indirect connection is used, best practice could include sizing the heat
exchanger with an approach temperature (primary return temperature – secondary
return temperature) of less than 3°C.
BP3.3d Best practice would be to include a self-learning keep-warm setting that
determines the required keep-warm operation to provide good DHW response times.
This should self-learn the times of day that DHW is rarely used hence when a slower
DHW response time has less customer impact. High maximum flows and low dP
across the HIU will reduce the DHW response time.
BP3.3e Best practice would be to allow remote access into the HIU settings to be able
to make changes, address any faults and check performance without needing to visit
the HIU.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 86 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BP3.3f Best practice would be to design-out permanent HIU flushing bypasses, for
example by allowing flushing prior to HIU installation. This removes the scope for
bypasses to be left open, accidently opened later, or issues if the valve fails in future.
Flushing bypassing are often difficult to insulate and hence increase heat losses.
Bespoke insulation products for the HIU valve rail are also recommended in order to
reduce heat loss from all the valves at HIU connection.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

BP3.3g Best practice would be to use HIUs with a tested high temperature VWART
(Volume Weighted Average Return Temperature) of less than 33°C, as defined in the
BESA HIU Test Regime.
BP3.3h Best practice would be to use HIUs that operate over a wide dP range and
hence require no flow regulation and/or dP control on the DH network.
Objective 3.3 – Key outputs
Output 3.3a – Report confirming direct/indirect connection
Output 3.3b – Specification of HIU’s (or thermal substations) as necessary
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.4 – To design or modify suitable space

heating and domestic hot water services systems
Why is this objective important?
Where a new building is planned to be connected to a heat network, or where major
refurbishment is being carried out, the designer has a number of design choices
available for the heating and Domestic Hot Water (DHW). How these services are
designed can have a significant impact on the capital costs and operating costs of the
heat network. For example, achieving consistently low return temperatures will reduce
capital costs for the network and thermal store, result in lower heat losses and
pumping energy, and in some cases can reduce the cost of low carbon heat
production. The use of lower mean temperatures will increase the size of heat emitters
which will result in higher costs and may make it more difficult to find acceptable
locations for radiators within a small dwelling. But the designer must assess the
balance of costs, in particular the relatively small cost of larger radiators versus the
lower capital and operating cost of the DH. It should be recognised that different
parties may be paying/benefiting, but it is the designer’s role to identify and promote
the solution with the lowest total lifecycle cost.
It is emphasised that the most important design decision that impacts the heat
network – the design return temperature for the heating systems – is not in the control
of the heat network designer. Hence the building developer or owner/operator and
their building services designers have an important responsibility to ensure that the
design return temperature is optimised for the system as a whole. However, the heat
network designer needs to take a pro-active role in engaging with the
developer/operator of the buildings to explain the economic importance for the heat
network of maintaining low return temperatures and designers should will normally
specify the maximum return temperature acceptable. Lower operating temperatures
will also reduce the likelihood of year-round hot corridors in new developments.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 87 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

For retrofit situations it may be more acceptable to the customer to make minimal
changes to the existing building/system. For example, in dwellings, retaining a hot
water cylinder if one exists, or installing instantaneous hot water, if a combi-boiler is
currently used. However, the impact on the heat network of these decisions still needs
to be assessed. In some cases, thermal insulation improvements to an existing
building will enable lower temperatures to be used for the space heating circuit which
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

can benefit the heat network.

Appendix D provides guidance and descriptions of the various options available for
space heating and DHWS heating in relation to supply from heat networks.
Minimum requirements
3.4.1 For existing buildings, the building services designer shall provide a specific
design study which assesses the heat losses of the building, the output of the existing
heat emitters and selects heating circuit operating temperatures for peak design
conditions. The return temperature should be reduced as far as practical and the
report shall show how the new operating temperatures will be achieved through re-
balancing or other changes. Further temporary monitoring of existing buildings should
also be considered at this stage if it was not carried out as part of feasibility.
3.4.2 For both new and existing buildings the design study shall also consider how
the system operates at part-load and how low return temperatures can be achieved
under part-load conditions including modification of the control system e.g. weather
compensation of primary/secondary flow temperature. This study shall be developed
with the heat network operator.
3.4.3 A specific design study shall review the options for domestic hot water services
and assess the costs and benefits for the building concerned. This study shall be
developed with the heat network operator or designer.
3.4.4 For new and replacement building services systems (in existing or new
buildings), peak (design) operating temperatures for the heating and hot water service
circuits shall be optimised to deliver the lowest lifecycle costs, but shall comply with
the limits given in Table 6 below.
3.4.5 Where new cylinders are used in dwellings, the coils shall be oversized and
shall be controlled to deliver lower return water temperatures. Alternatively, an
external plate heat exchanger may be used, preferably with a return temperature
limiting valve to give low return temperatures. This latter approach can also be used in
retrofit situations where cylinders are being retained in order to save capital cost.
Retaining storage can provide a less intermittent demand on the heat network in
summer and may avoid the need for keep-warm facilities.
3.4.6 Where centralised DHWS storage heating is used within the building, it shall
use an external plate heat exchanger (controlled with a two-port valve) and not a coil
within the storage vessel, in order to provide lower return temperatures.
3.4.7 Where there is a risk of scaling of domestic hot water heat exchangers from
hard water, consideration shall be given to the HIU controls to limit scaling and the
use of a centralised softening plant or other form of scale prevention. In hard water
areas there is a risk that DHW heating coils and plate heat exchangers may scale-up,
reducing heat transfer and increasing return temperatures. Scaling risk is much
reduced if DHW temperatures are below 55°C and if there is turbulent flow at the
heating surface. For HIUs with a DHW plate heat exchanger, the maximum

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 88 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

recommended DHW temperature is 55°C and so there should be minimal scaling risk.
For heating coils in DHW cylinders, where Legionella risk require higher temperatures
(e.g. 60°C) and the flow is not turbulent, the risks of scaling are higher.
The lowest return temperatures are usually obtained from radiators which are
connected as ‘Top entry and Bottom Opposite Exit’ (TBOE). Radiators shall be
connected with the flow entering the top of radiators and the return out of the bottom,
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

see Figure SSS and UUU. On longer radiators, the return should leave from the
opposite end to that where the flow enters. TRVs shall be orientated horizontally such
that the thermostatic head is away from the heating effect of the radiator supply pipe.

Figure SSS - Radiator connection methods

Figure UUU - Danish / Swedish DH connected radiators with flow into top return from bottom

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 89 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

(Note the air vent above the TRV location which ensures no air in TRV)

3.4.8 (Previously 3.4.11) Flow limiting pre-settable thermostatic radiator valves

designed for low flow rates shall be used. These valves are designed with integral
adjustable apertures enabling a flow rate to be set for a given pressure difference.
These valves must be used on radiators with and without TRVs. Commonly this
functionality is built into the TRV valve. The designer must ensure the range of flows
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

that the radiator valve can be set at matches the required flow rates based on radiator
outputs, design temperature drop and the dP required to give TRV sufficient control
authority see 3.4.11.
3.4.9 For new heating systems, the radiator pipework shall be sized to provide a
sufficiently rapid response of the radiator circuit, and micro-bore pipework shall be
considered for low flow rate systems. No automatic ‘boiler’ bypasses shall be fitted to
the space heating circuit, or circuit to a DHW cylinder coil. For indirect connections,
when heat is not required the thermostat or programmer shall stop the tertiary pump
and close-off the secondary flow to the plate heat exchanger.
3.4.10 (Previously 3.4.8) Flow temperatures for the tertiary space heating circuit shall
be selected so that flow rates to individual radiators, or fan-coil units (FCUs), can be
set-up accurately to achieve the design return temperature. For new dwellings with
low space heating demands and a return temperature of 40°C, a radiator flow
temperature of around 60°C is likely to be needed, otherwise the flow rate may be too
low and difficult to set up accurately. A high quality radiator valve designed for low
flow rates is required (see 3.4.8).
3.4.11 (Previously 3.4.10, now guidance)
To enable the TRVs to have sufficient control authority to control the radiator heat
output, the dP across the TRV needs to be approximately equal to the dP across the
other elements of the system (plate heat exchanger, radiator and pipework) under
typical operating conditions (i.e. at average rather than peak load). For indirect
connections, the HIU manufacturer should be able to supply the plate heat exchanger
dP, and it is also stated in BESA HIU Test reports. The dP across the radiator will be
virtually zero, (the lock shield valve on the radiator with pre-settable valves should be
left fully open), the dP of the radiator pipework can be estimated. The dP across the
valve needs to be assessed such that the valve pre-settings for each radiator can be
established in order to check valve compatibility (see 3.4.8) and to complete the space
heating commissioning sheet (Appendix B).
From this calculation the required HIU pump dP can be calculated for indirect
connections, or the setting on the DPCV can be determined for direct connections.
Setting the tertiary pump to a proportional pressure setting will help maintain a
constant dP across the TRV despite the dP across the pipework and plate heat
exchanger varying with changes in heating load (flow rate). The tertiary pump should
be turned off by means of a programmer or room thermostat. The same logic should
be followed for underfloor heating systems, which have higher dP and lower dT than
radiators systems, and also are commonly already fitted with sufficient controls to
balance the circuits and achieve the required temperature drop.
3.4.12 Room temperature control shall be provided by thermostatic radiator valves,
which will reduce volume flow rates and hence return temperatures under part-load.
For direct connection systems, TRVs shall be fitted to all radiators in the circuit. For
indirectly connected space heating systems, at least one radiator (known as the

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 90 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

reference radiator) located in the same area as the room thermostat, should NOT
have a TRV installed but should still use a pre-settable valve to control flow rate.
3.4.13 All cold water service and potable water pipework shall be insulated to limit
heat gain from adjacent heat network pipes and hence minimise legionella risk, or
where possible they should be installed in separate risers to the heat network
distribution.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.4.14 Pipework, heat exchangers and other components within a HIU shall be
insulated to reduce heat losses and unwanted heat gains, or the entire HIU enclosure
shall be insulated. The HIU shall have heat losses less than 1.46 kWh/day, but
typically losses should be below 1.0 kWh/day, as tested in standby according to the
BESA UK Test Regime Technical Standard (current version) (Non-load characteristics
of units in keep-warm mode test) or using an equivalent accredited independent
testing methodology.
3.4.15a Where dwelling HIUs are required, the designer shall select HIUs that will
deliver the required design performance. Where these HIUs are of a type and duty
that can be tested to the BESA UK Test Regime Technical Specification (current
version), the HIU shall be tested and registered with BESA, or tested using an
equivalent accredited independent HIU testing and registration scheme.
The designer should use results from the BESA (or equivalent) testing to set
commissioning/acceptance requirements, for example to ensure the HIU performs
with regard to the temperature control of domestic hot water under a range of draw-off
rates and delivers low return temperatures. Where the designer has specified HIUs of
a type that is not within the scope of the BESA Test Regime then the designer shall
select units whose performance is evidenced by verifiable in-use monitoring. The
designer may also wish to commission additional tests on their proposed HIU that
reflect operating requirements that are specific to the project/application.
3.4.15b Where an HIU is installed in a cupboard, consideration shall be given to
providing high and low level ventilation openings if any equipment is affected by high
ambient temperatures.
3.4.15c The hot water delivery temperature from an instantaneous hot water heating
system shall be set to between 50°C and 55°C at the plate heat exchanger. These
temperatures are acceptable provided the volume of water is small and the Legionella
risk can be controlled. HSG 274 (Part 2, 2014) and ACOP L8 (2013) state that
instantaneous water heaters are low risk. Further guidance can be found in CIBSE
TM13 (2013). Where NHBC specifications apply, the temperature shall be set to 55°C
which is a service requirement at the kitchen sink.
3.4.15d Unless provided as part of the HIU, flushing bypasses shall be included at the
heat network connections to each HIU to protect sensitive equipment from the flushing
process. The bypasses should comply with the HIU manufacturer’s requirements. It is
essential that flushing bypasses do not remain open after flushing. It is preferable to
use temporary flushing bypasses to allow them to be disconnected after use, avoiding
the possibility of the bypass being left open. Alternatively, any flushing bypasses
should be tamper-proof and lockable. It should be possible to unambiguously identify
the bypass state with a simple visual check. Instructions and drawings should clearly
indicate the correct operation of the bypass.
3.4.16 The location of the HIU within a dwelling shall be such that it can be removed
and replaced without major disruption and changes to walls, fixtures or fittings.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 91 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.4.17 Designers shall ensure that the system complies with the Water Supply (Water
Fittings) Regulations and Scottish Water Byelaws and shall consult with the local
water supplier as early as possible.
3.4.18 DHW plant should be designed to operate at as low a DH flow temperature as
possible to allow low DH flow temperatures in the summer months.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Table 6 - Preferred design temperatures for sizing new and replacement building services systems (i.e.
non-domestic secondary or tertiary dwelling systems)
Circuit Flow temperature (°C) Return temperature (°C)

Radiators Max 70 Max 40

Fan-coil units Max 60 Max 40

Air handling unit Max 70 Max 40

Underfloor heating See Note 1 See Note 1

Domestic Hot Water Service See 3.4.15c Max 25 for 10°C cold
(DHWS) instantaneous heat feed temperature
exchanger on maximum load

DHWS cylinder with coil See Note 2 Max 45 when heating up

from cold at 10°C

DHWS calorifier with external See Note 3 Max 25 for 10°C cold
plate heat exchanger feed temperature

Note 1: Underfloor heating systems will typically operate with floor temperatures below 35°C and
typically flow temperatures of 45°C which is advantageous for heat networks as this will result in low
return temperatures.
Original Note 2 moved
Note 2: Hot water storage involves a Legionella risk and the stored temperature is normally above
55°C. For acceptable heat-up times a minimum flow temperature of 70°C is typical. The return
temperature will generally be higher than for instantaneous heat exchangers as heat from cold rarely
occurs and so higher heat losses will result.
Note 3: A central hot water calorifier would normally be designed to store water at 60°C and with a
minimum recirculation temperature of 55°C. Typically a flow temperature of 70°C or higher would be
needed.
Note: Where direct connection is used, the radiators shall be sized in accordance with this table.
However, in operation, a higher flow temperature may be used to suit the network design, provided that
radiator return temperatures shall be less than 40°C.
Note: In all cases, the variation of flow temperature across the primary network needs to be considered,
especially for the summer low flow condition where temperature drops can be significant. The
temperatures given in this table are at the consumption point and higher flow temperatures will be
needed at the energy centre supply point.

Best practice
BP3.4a Best practice would include the use of heating systems with return
temperatures below 40°C. The lowest return temperatures are usually obtained from
radiators which are connected as ‘top entry and opposite bottom exit’.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 92 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BP3.4b Where centralised DHWS are used in buildings, best practice would be to use
a two-stage heating system where the return from the space heating circuit is used to
pre-heat the cold feed to the DHWS. This usually results in a lower return temperature
on the DH circuit and is particularly beneficial in buildings with large hot water
demands.
BP3.4c The use of variable speed pumps for the dwelling radiator circuit is
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

recommended as best practice to reduce electricity use and the need for high bypass
flows.
BP3.4d ON/OFF space heating temperature control is not recommended as it can
lead to higher peak demands, TRV’s are preferred as best practice.
BP3.4e The use of wall mounted thermostats for use with thermostatic radiator valves
would be considered to provide a better measure of the air temperature in the room,
whilst still retaining the variable volume control approach.
BP3.4f.a The use of electronic thermostatic radiator valve heads would be considered
best practice to provide enhanced time control of room temperatures.
BP3.4f.b The use of fast acting gas-filled thermostatic radiator valve heads would be
considered best practice to provide improved response to changes in room
temperatures. Wax-filled thermostatic sensor heads should generally be avoided.
BP3.4g The use of return temperature limiters can also be considered best practice
provided they cannot be easily adjusted by the occupant and that good room
temperature control is maintained. The use of a return temperature limiter on heated
towel rails (in addition to a thermostatic radiator valve) is particularly useful as the
output (and hence return temperatures) is otherwise determined by the number of
towels. Return temperature limiters may also be available inside the HIU and these
can also be used for domestic hot water to ensure that excessive flow cannot be taken
with consequent lowering of tap temperature.
BP3.4h In commercial buildings, best practice would be to specify that where TRVs
are used they should be limited to a suitable maximum design temperature (e.g.
22°C). Appropriate tamper-proof fittings should be provided to prevent adjustment
other than by the facilities management staff.
BP3.4i Further encouragement to customers to limit return temperatures may be
achieved through incentives within the contract (see best practice BP1.2a).
BP3.4j Where suitable, best practice would be to use pre-settable pressure
independent thermostatic valves (PI-TRVs) as these will maintain the required flow
rate through the radiator regardless of the pressure difference available, which may
vary as flow in other radiators changes. The benefit of these is likely to be more
significant on circuits with a larger number of radiators.
BP3.4k Weather compensated dwelling tertiary flow temperatures may be best
practice in some situations. In particular, where weather compensation is a built-in
feature within the HIU. This may lower the DH return temperature when heat demands
are lower and may also allow weather compensation of the DH primary. Studies also
show that accuracy of TRV room temperature control improves where there is less
variation in secondary flow rates, which occur with weather compensated flow
temperature.
BP 3.4L DHW supplies could be installed at dishwasher and washing machine
locations. Many dishwashers, and some washing machines, can take hot water

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 93 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

feeds. This can reduce more expensive and higher carbon electricity use in these
appliances and increased DHW use improves the economic viability of the heat
network.
Objective 3.4 – Key outputs
Output 3.4a – Building heat loss/DHWS & operating temperature design report
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Output 3.4b – Building control design strategy report

Output 3.4c – Building approach temperature optimisation report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.5 – To achieve an energy-efficient primary

heat network
Why is this objective important?
The energy efficiency of the primary heat network will influence the environmental
benefits and the operating costs and hence the overall economic case for the network.
As with most energy systems there is an economic balance to be made between
energy efficiency and capital cost. The requirements set out below have been found to
be appropriate in most cases, but the designer should carry out an economic
appraisal to determine an optimal design. Public perception of what constitutes energy
efficiency may also be important.
The energy inputs required to operate a heat network are:
- Heat energy input to compensate for heat losses on the network less the heat
gained from friction loss.
- Electrical energy input for pumping needed to overcome friction within the
network.
Even though most of the electrical energy is recovered as heat it will have a higher
cost and CO2 content than the heat energy which is typically supplied from a low cost
and low carbon source.
The selection of operating temperatures for peak design conditions and how they vary
with demand requires an optimisation study for any given scheme as it will be
impacted by the type of heat supply plant and the characteristics of the heat network.
The designer has also to consider constraints such as the temperatures used for
existing heating systems and the degree that these can be varied. Hence the
requirements given below may not be valid in all cases and may be overruled by the
conclusions of a detailed study for an individual scheme. Further guidance can be
found in Heat Networks Design Guide (Parsloe Consulting, 2018) and Guidelines for
Connecting to Heat Networks – Part 2 (LB of Islington 2015).
Networks may require bypasses around HIUs and thermal substations, but they can
be misused, resulting in poor heat network performance. Bypasses, need careful
design and are actually required for three reasons:
- to keep flow temperature high enough to achieve good instantaneous hot water
response

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 94 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- to protect pumps from a very low flow condition

- to maintain circulation and avoid deadlegs to prevent corrosion
This objective relates to the primary heat network up to the point of connection to the
buildings. The efficient design of the heat distribution within a building (especially an
apartment block) is covered in Objective 3.9.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Minimum requirements
3.5.1 The design shall seek to minimise the total length of the network.
3.5.2 The type and thickness of insulation shall be selected to minimise lifecycle
costs, i.e. balancing additional capital cost with the value of the heat energy saved
and shall take account of degradation of the insulation over time. See Figure ZZZ (for
a pair of flow and return pipes at fixed ambient and fluid temperatures). This analysis
shall include the use of twin-pipe solutions. The insulation thickness may be increased
further to reduce CO2 emissions.
Note: Series 2 insulation for EN 253 pre-insulated pipework is normally cost effective

Figure ZZZ - Indicative heat losses from insulated pipes and relative performance of series 1-3 (London
Heat Manual 2014)

3.5.3 The total network heat loss shall be calculated for the primary heat network
between the energy centre supply point(s) and the point of connection to each
building, taking realistic weighted average flow and return temperatures across both
summer and winter. The calculated total annual heat loss from the primary network up
to the point of connection to each building when fully built out is typically expected to
should be less than 10% of the heat supplied by the energy centre(s) for most
schemes. Designers should provide justification for heat losses greater than 10% as
these or more would indicate either a low-density development or the need for a re-
evaluation of the design and pipe insulation specification. Total primary network heat
losses shall not be greater than 20% of the heat supplied by the energy centre(s).
3.5.4 A specific study shall be carried out to determine optimum operating
temperatures for the scheme to minimise lifecycle costs, taking account of: heat
losses, pumping energy, the cost of the heat network, the cost of the building services
and the cost of heat production which will depend on the type of plant.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 95 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.5.5 Unless the study in 3.5.4 shows otherwise, the design flow temperature on the
primary heat network i.e. under peak demand conditions, shall be less than 95°C.
3.5.6 The study shall consider whether reducing flow temperatures under part-load
conditions will be advantageous in economic and environmental terms; although
pumping energy will increase, heat losses will be lower. However, for variable primary
flow temperatures to be of benefit, it is important that the setpoints on secondary
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

circuits and tertiary circuits are not higher than the primary flow temperature.
Otherwise the primary control valve will open to deliver maximum flow rate and return
temperatures will rise.
3.5.7 The target return temperature on the primary network at peak demand
conditions shall be set as low as possible, taking account of the constraints, and
where feasible shall be less than 60°C for supplies to existing buildings and less than
40°C for supplies to new buildings.
3.5.8 Existing building heating systems shall be investigated, and agreement
reached with the building owner to modify operating temperatures where possible to
achieve secondary return temperatures less than 60°C, which can typically be realised
as there will usually be some oversizing of the secondary heating system. The
investigation should include costs and DH system benefits of weather compensating
the secondary flow temperatures which may result in lower return temperatures on all
but the coldest days depending on the existing building control system.
3.5.9 The control system at each building connection whether using direct or indirect
connections shall only use a variable volume principle and two-port control valves.
3.5.10 Variable speed pumps shall be used and controlled such that the pump
pressure differential reduces at part-load to a level just sufficient to maintain minimum
design pressure differentials at the extremities of the network.
3.5.11 Duty and standby pumps shall be used to provide the required level of
resilience.
3.5.12 Multiple pumps shall be selected to match the network’s requirements at part-
load, e.g. a summer/jockey pump sized with a lower flow rate and lower head could be
included. The pump control strategy (e.g. how switching between main and jockey
pumps is achieved) must be fully considered as part of the pump-set selection.
3.5.13a Where bypasses are required to maintain flow temperatures above a
minimum level at times of low demand, temperature-controlled bypass valves shall be
used.
3.5.13b Common or ‘low loss’ headers shall not be used at the connection to
buildings, and where existing, shall be removed or split into two sections to prevent
the flow water entering the return as this will result in higher primary network return
temperatures.
3.5.14 Fixed bypasses shall be avoided wherever possible but, if required, the bypass
flow rate shall be limited by means of a differential pressure control valve and
regulating valve, or similar controls. The total bypass flow shall be set at less than 1%
of peak demand flow at all times, unless a detailed calculation shows that a higher
rate will be required.
3.5.15 Where a flow or dP controlled bypass is necessary to protect the energy centre
pumps, this shall be installed locally to the pumps themselves between the outlet and
inlet of the pumps. This bypass shall be controlled to open only when the pump speed

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 96 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

is at minimum and the pressure across the pump has risen above a set-point
indicating that the flow rate is too low for the pump. A form of heat dissipation and/or a
safety valve may be required to prevent excessive temperatures and pressures should
a zero or very low flow condition exist for long periods. The pump manufacturer shall
be consulted.
3.5.16 Where side-stream filters are used, they should be placed across the DH
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

pumps, to help provide a flow for the pumps at minimum system load.
Common headers shall not be used as these will raise return temperatures.
Best practice
BP3.5a For best practice, the calculated total annual heat loss from the primary
network up to the point of connection to each building when fully built out should not
exceed 10% of the heat supplied by the energy centre(s) sum of the estimated annual
heat consumption of all of the buildings connected. However, in some cases, low-
density networks with a low cost of heat and a low carbon heat source can be viable
with higher heat losses and still be considered best practice. The most important
requirement is 3.5.2 which requires an analysis of the cost benefit of additional
insulation on a lifecycle basis.
BP3.5b Best practice would aim to achieve return temperatures below 55°C for a
scheme supplying only existing buildings and below 40°C for a scheme supplying only
new buildings.
BP3.5c Best practice would be to use twin pipe (two pipes within one insulated casing)
where feasible in order to reduce heat losses.
District cooling systems also need to consider pump selection carefully as there may
be a wider variation in demand than for heating. Variable speed pumps are important
as the volume of water to be pumped is greater and any temperature gain through the
pump is a disadvantage not a benefit.
Objective 3.5 – Key outputs
Output 3.5a – Optimised pipework design (including internal pipework)
Output 3.5b – Optimised pipework insulation thickness report
Output 3.5c – Pump & control design
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.6 – To achieve a low cost network –

optimisation of routes and pipe sizing for minimum
lifecycle cost
Why is this objective important?
The cost of heat networks is a major barrier to their implementation and the designer
needs to take every opportunity to minimise cost. Costs should be minimised over the
life of the asset using discounted cashflow analysis to produce designs with minimum
net present cost but with due regard for opportunities for future-proofing. Further
guidance can be found in Heat Networks Design Guide (Parsloe Consulting, 2018).

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 97 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

The type of pipe system and the construction techniques used also have an impact on
costs. For example, the use of polymer pipes can reduce installation costs as
expansion compensation may not be necessary and the flexibility assists in
circumventing other services. Special installation methods can also be used, e.g. the
pull-through technique or horizontal directional drilling. This objective is conditional
that the life and reliability of the network/plant are not adversely affected by the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

requirement to minimise capital costs.

Minimum requirements
3.6.1 The design shall be developed to minimise overall lifecycle costs – typically this
will be achieved by minimising the overall length of the network, but longer routes
where soft dig may be possible. Also, by avoiding other barriers such as rail and busy
road crossings may lead to lower costs and reduced risks.
3.6.2 Pipe sizing shall be carried out to minimise the lifecycle cost taking account of
capital cost, pumping capital and energy cost and heat loss cost (see Figure 11).
When determining the flow rate for pipe sizing, future-proofing the potential growth in
demand of the network shall be taken into account so that a reasonable level of
expansion can be achieved.

Figure 9 - Typical optimisation of pipe sizes on lifecycle cost basis

Change legend in Figure 11 “pipe costs” to “pipe & trenching costs” and “pumping costs” to
“pumping energy costs”
3.6.3 Routes shall be selected where appropriate to avoid major roads and to utilise
‘soft-dig’ areas, subject to consultation with local residents as such areas may have
high amenity value. All street works shall follow the NRSWA 2012 Code of Practice
recommendations and Advice Note SA 10/05 (2005) (Highways Agency), also NJUG
Street Works UK Guidelines (Volumes 1-6), after liaison with the appropriate
authorities. Where trees are impeding a proposed route then permission shall be
sought to remove them or re-route the system.
3.6.4 Above ground routes, e.g. in underground car parks and other service areas
within connected buildings, shall be examined as this can lead to major cost savings.
However, expansion provision needs to be considered, there may also be higher heat
losses and greater risk of accidental damage.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 98 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.6.5 Drawings of all existing buried services shall be obtained to assist in selecting a
suitable route.
3.6.6 Surveys of all surface equipment, manholes, etc. along the route together with
ground surveys using ground penetrating radar shall also be carried out together with
trial holes at critical points where necessary to establish a viable route. This work
should be in line with PAS 128:2014 and PAS 256:2017.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.6.7 The designer shall assess the range of pipe materials and systems available
and select the optimum system for each section of the network, taking account of
capital cost, operating cost including heat losses and lifetime, for the operating
temperatures and pressures selected.
3.6.8 The location of the energy centre shall be considered at an early stage in the
design as its location can have a major influence on the costs of the network and will
normally be subject to planning consent.
3.6.9 (MOVED FROM 2.8.2) For steel pipe systems, if higher velocities than 3 m/s are
used then a specific transient pressure check (water hammer) shall be carried out
simulating the effect of valve closure and pump trips and the resultant pump discharge
pressures from the energy centre.
Best practice
BP3.6a Best practice would involve the use of industry standard heat network analysis
software to improve the optimisation process.
District cooling systems may use steel pre-insulated pipework as it provides a good
vapour seal preventing condensation on the steel carrier pipe. As the flow temperature
is close to the ground temperature the heat losses are relatively small especially for
larger diameter pipes and so some schemes have used conventional uninsulated
polyethylene pipes, normally used for potable water applications, with a significant
saving in capital cost.
Objective 3.6 – Key outputs
Output 3.6a – Life cycle network optimisation study
Output 3.6b – Underground services survey report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.7 – To achieve a reliable network with a long

life and low maintenance requirements
Why is this objective important?
A heat network is a high capital cost asset and usually needs a long period to provide
a sufficient return on investment. It is therefore essential that the network is designed
for a long life and low maintenance requirements. In addition, reliability is very
important if customer satisfaction is to be achieved.
There is a range of pipe materials available in addition to the typical pre-insulated
steel systems produced to EN 253. Polymer materials and glass-reinforced epoxy may
offer advantages with respect to cost and performance and should be seriously

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 99 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

considered. Similarly, twin pipe systems can offer advantages including lower heat
losses and lower trenching costs. In some cases, a mix of systems may be the most
suitable approach, e.g. a steel spine with local polymer distribution, although the need
for future flexibility should be considered.
Achieving a high quality installation is also critical (see 4.2) as is maintaining high
water quality (see 6.3.1).
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Minimum requirements
3.7.1 The full range of pipe systems and materials shall be assessed for suitability for
use in each part of the network and appropriate selections should be made, taking
account of cost and performance. This requirement may be satisfied by a generic
study of the options available where a standardised design has been developed to
reduce costs.
3.7.2 Routes for the heat network shall provide a minimum separation distance of
0.6m from adjacent services where feasible, in order to reduce the risk of third party
damage to either the heat mains or other utilities. Other spacing distances may be
required, specific to each utility type, and considering whether crossing is in parallel or
perpendicular. See NJUG Street Works UK Guidelines (Volumes 1-6) for further detail.
3.7.3 If a steel carrier pipe is used for the buried sections, the designer shall specify
pre-insulated pipe systems that comply with EN 253 and associated EN standards
(see References and Further Reading) and the design shall be developed in
accordance with EN 13941. Flexible polymer pipes shall comply with EN 15632(1-4).
3.7.4 The joint closure system, whether using heat activated mastic lined shrink
sleeves or fusion welded joint casings, shall allow for an air test to be carried out to
prove that the joint is sealed against ground water ingress.
3.7.5 Where shrink sleeve type joints are used there shall be an additional protection
seal at each end of the joint (dual sealing).
3.7.6 Where pipe systems other than steel are to be used, the designer shall verify
that the predicted life for the operating temperatures and pressures that are expected
is in accordance with the requirements of the investors in the heat network.

Figure 10 - A typical pre-insulated pipe system

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 100 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 11 - Diagram of a typical surveillance system

3.7.7 Where polymer pipes are used, the need for a diffusion barrier around the
outside of the carrier pipe shall be considered to limit oxygen diffusion into the DH
water and diffusion of water into the insulation.
3.7.8 Pre-insulated isolating valves shall be used for isolating sections of the buried
network and shall be directly buried with access to the valve spindle provided by using
self-draining enclosures and not a conventional valve chamber.
3.7.9 The pre-insulated pipe shall terminate above ground or inside the building and
an end cap fitted to the insulation to prevent water ingress, especially during
construction.
3.7.10 Isolating valves shall be located at each branch to a customer or group of
customers and immediately adjacent to the main run so that a fault in a local circuit
can be isolated and the remainder of the scheme remain in operation.
3.7.11 The design shall consider the need for further in-line isolating valves, the
provision of looped networks, the location of standby boilers and the provision for
connecting temporary boilers when developing the overall strategy for maintaining
supplies in the event of a leak at any point in the network. This shall take account of
the probability of failure, the likely impact and cost of improving resilience.
3.7.12 Isolating valves in secondary circuits within buildings shall be located where
there will be good access available from public spaces.
3.7.13 Isolating valves for residents’ emergency use shall be located within the
property immediately after the service enters the property (or just outside) so that
these can be easily shut-off by the resident in the event of a leak within the property.
3.7.14 For steel pipe systems a surveillance system in accordance with EN 14419
shall be specified, see Figure 13.
3.7.15 A stress analysis of pipe systems shall be carried out either by an independent
specialist, or the manufacturers, in accordance with EN 13941 for steel pipework and
EN 15632(1-4) for flexible polymer pipes.
3.7.16 Pipe expansion of buried sections shall be permitted through the use of bends
and loops or the use of pre-stressing techniques. The use of expansion bellows shall
be avoided on buried sections.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 101 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Expansion of above ground sections shall be provided where possible through the use
of bends or loops together with suitable anchors and guides, rather than expansion
bellows. Where possible, expansion bellows should be designed-out as they have a
much shorter life than the rest of the pipework and are a point of weakness especially
if the anchoring is not robust and additional stresses are put on the bellows. Fig VVV
demonstrates how expansion bellows can be designed-out of a riser.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure VVV - Accommodating expansion in risers without expansion bellows

3.7.17 The steel pipe system shall be installed at the minimum depth as
recommended by the manufacturer unless a greater depth is necessary to avoid
existing buried services. For polymer pipe, manufacturer’s recommendations on depth
of burial shall be followed.
3.7.18 Suitable provision for venting and draining of each section of the network shall
be provided.
3.7.19 Marker tape shall be specified to be installed above each line of pipe.
3.7.20 Site and factory welds for steel systems shall be specified as being subject to
non-destructive testing in accordance with the requirements of EN 13941 as a
minimum.
3.7.21 Where polymer pipe systems are used the designer shall specify a water
pressure test according to EN 806-4 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.7.22a Designers shall consider and define the requirements for: system cleaning,
initial filling, pressurisation and the control of system water quality during the
operational phase. The designer shall consult with the future operator (where known)
and water treatment specialists. The design shall take account of the system volumes
and materials used in each circuit, and shall take account of the need for sectional
completion of the network where necessary. The design shall include the appropriate
facilities to deliver all of these requirements.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 102 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.7.22b Where it is necessary to fill one hydraulic circuit from another, particular care
shall be taken to ensure compatibility of water treatment regimes, especially where
different materials are used in each circuit.
3.7.22c There shall be provision within each hydraulic circuit for the control of water
quality with facilities for:
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- chemical dosing of the system, suitable for the pipe materials being used
- a method for removing air from the system e.g. vacuum degassing
- side-stream filtration to remove suspended solids with the unit fitted either in the
flow or the return
- sampling of the system water for monitoring and chemical testing, with a water
meter to monitor the make-up water volume, also an electronic signal linked to
the BEMS for early warning of a significant loss of water.
3.7.23 To ensure that the network can be maintained, appropriate access rights shall
be negotiated with the landowner as part of the wayleave or easement.
3.7.24 Throughout the whole design stage of a project, it is essential to consider the
future reliability of the heat network from a customer perspective. Customer service,
satisfaction and system reliability shall be built-in to the whole design process.
3.7.25 The design shall minimise the length of pipework that would have no flow of
water in normal operation (dead-legs) as these will have a higher risk of corrosion.
Where such sections are unavoidable, provision shall be made for circulating the
system water at suitable intervals. Permanent bypass flows shall be avoided as this
will raise return temperatures.
Best practice
BP3.7a The installer of the system may be willing to offer an extended warranty on the
materials and possibly installation of the system (e.g. for up to 20 years) and it would
be best practice to establish the availability, scope and cost of such warranties at the
time of tender, including whether these are underwritten through an insurance
scheme.
BP3.7b For steel systems, the use of fusion welded casing joints would be considered
as best practice to provide greater confidence in the prevention of water ingress which
could cause corrosion of the steel. However, a higher quality of training is required for
those carrying out the work. Larger diameters where the highest security of jointing is
needed would more easily justify the use of this type of joint.
BP3.7c Methods that reduce the diffusion of the insulant gas would be considered
best practice as the decay in insulation effectiveness would be slowed down as the
gas escapes and is replaced with air.
BP3.7d Best practice would include the greater use of welding and jointing above
ground under more controlled conditions or the greater use of off-site pre-fabrication.
BP3.7e Systems that continuously monitor pH, conductivity and potentially other water
quality parameters would be best practice and are often used for larger heat networks.
BP3.7f An automatic chemical dosing system based on continuous monitoring of key
parameters would be best practice and is often used for larger heat networks.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 103 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BP3.7g Best practice would be to install strainers incorporating an automatic cleaning

system to improve water quality, customer service and reduce maintenance costs.
BP3.7h A 3-D model of the network using the principles of BIM would be produced as
best practice, indicating key points such as bends, tees and valves having precise co-
ordinates, determined by site surveys. Such modelling combined with ground
penetrating radar surveys should significantly reduce the risk of cost increases due to
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

unforeseen issues during the DH pipe installation.

Objective 3.7 – Key outputs
Output 3.7a – Heat network component specification
Output 3.7b – Water quality system design
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.8 – To define a metering strategy, select heat

metering, pre-payment and billing systems that are
accurate and cost-effective
Why is this objective important?
Meters are an essential tool for improving heat networks to make them more efficient
and enhance performance. The data provided by the energy meters throughout the
system can be used to monitor system efficiency, peak demands, heat losses and
return temperatures, which can then be used to target maintenance and
improvements within the system. Further information on measuring performance is
provided in Appendix F.
Customer acceptance of a heat metering system is important if revenues are to be
secure and customer satisfaction with the overall system maintained. Individual
dwelling heat meters are a requirement under the Heat Network (Metering and Billing)
Regulations 2014 for all new buildings and for buildings undergoing major
refurbishment. Building-level meters are also a requirement under the Metering and
Billing Regulations for all multi-apartment/multi-purpose buildings connected to a heat
network.
All other premises served by a heat network must undertake cost effectiveness and
technical feasibility assessments for the installation of individual meters or heat cost
allocators. Other heat meters may be installed to aid the operator in managing the
heat network and to provide a greater understanding of where heat is being lost.
Minimum requirements
3.8.1a A metering strategy (see CIBSE TM39) and communications strategy shall be
developed and documented to measure and monitor performance of the overall
energy centre, heat network and customers. Understanding the losses in the system
and changes in demand and flow/return temperatures can enable the system to be
properly maintained and improved. Where centralised DHW systems are used in
residential blocks, the heat supplied to hot water shall be separately metered.
3.8.1b Heat meters shall be in accordance with the Measuring Instruments Directive
(MID) and shall be Class 2 accuracy.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 104 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.8.1c All new/replacement metering systems shall be able to provide half hourly
meter readings to give residents/customers and the scheme operator the ability to
make informed decisions about control settings.
3.8.2 Metering of heat, electricity and fuel may also need to be in accordance with
requirements of the Renewable Heat Incentive as published by Ofgem, or the CHPQA
scheme as required for the individual energy centre solution.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.8.3a Heat meters shall be selected to provide the required level of accuracy for the
flow rates predicted.
Ultrasonic meters tend to be more accurate than turbine meters. Heat meters with no
moving parts are recommended (e.g. ultrasonic rather than turbine) as turbine meters
typically have shorter life, are more prone to failure, create additional risk of blockage
and disintegrating turbine parts can cause fouling in other parts of the system.
Pipework design should allow for heat meters that need periodic calibration to be
replaced with minimal disruption to customers.
3.8.3b Heat meters shall be selected to provide a suitable level of output resolution for
the range of heat demands predicted. For example, one transmitted reading (or pulse)
every half hour at low-load will not provide the granularity to properly monitor and
understand consumption patterns.
3.8.4 The minimum static pressure stated by the heat meter manufacturer shall be met
at all times for each meter and this requirement shall be taken into account in the
overall hydraulic design. If cavitation occurs this can severely impact the accuracy of
the meter.
3.8.5a A strainer shall be fitted upstream of the meter where the manufacturer’s
instructions require this level of protection.
3.8.5b Meters shall be protected from air ingress into the system water through the
installation of automatic air vents within the secondary pipework e.g. at the top of
risers. Air ingress can have a detrimental effect on the readings from ultrasonic heat
(flow) meters.
3.8.6a To ensure compliance with the MID, the meter installation shall be designed
taking account of the manufacturer’s recommendations with respect to orientation, the
minimum length of straight pipe before and after the meter and ensuring that it is
possible to easily access the meter and integrator for maintenance, calibration and
taking readings. In particular, heat meter temperature sensors shall be correctly
located in the flow and return, as marked on the sensors. Where feasible, the
electronic integrator units shall be installed remotely from hot pipework or hot
enclosures to protect the electronics and batteries.
3.8.6b Heat meters/integrators shall be mounted in a location where the customer can
easily read the kWh readings, temperature readings and the meter serial number. A
wireless remote readout or web/phone is not an acceptable substitute for this as
regular manual ‘check’ readings should be taken to confirm meter outputs are correct.
3.8.7 Heat meters shall be fitted with security seals to reduce the potential for fraud
and preferably within a tamper-proof enclosure, which may be formed by the HIU
cover.
3.8.8 A pre-payment system (where proposed) shall have an emergency facility
whereby a limited amount of heat energy can be purchased before automatic
disconnection results. A range of routes to make payments shall be provided including

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 105 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

online and mobile phone, as well as from local retail outlets and the local management
office.
3.8.9a In new buildings, new heat networks, and where large numbers of existing
meters are being replaced, then smart metering systems shall be installed that give
residents/customers a local (in-home) display to monitor their energy consumption,
providing good quality AMR and a range of payment options including pre-payment.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

This will help residents/customers manage budgets and the scheme operator to
manage the risk around bad debt.
3.8.9b AMR systems shall be capable of reading an extended heat meter register
including total volume and temperatures. This information should then be used during
commissioning and on-going operation to identify poor performance in the
secondary/tertiary heating systems.
3.8.9c On all larger schemes (more than 50 dwellings) a fully automatic meter reading
(AMR) system shall be specified to record and report on energy flows for the entire
system (as required by the Heat Network Metering and Billing Regulations and the
Building Regulations) including:
- fuel input
- electricity consumption including for heat pumps
- pumping and parasitic electricity consumption
- electricity generation (where relevant)
- heat sent out from central plant
- heat generated from each individual heat source
- heat delivered to each main building/block
- heat delivered to each dwelling
- flow temperature (at the Energy Centre and at the customer connections)
- return temperature (at the Energy Centre and at the customer connections)
- instantaneous heat produced at the Energy Centre and delivered at each of the
customer connections (kW)
- make-up water consumption.
Note: Direct data readings should be obtained using M-bus communications or other
proven AMR technology. Heat meters that provide data via pulsed outputs are not
normally recommended for use with AMR systems.

Figure 12 - Typical heat meter

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 106 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.8.10 Where mains electricity is used for the meter, non-volatile memory or battery
back-up shall be included. Where batteries are used, a minimum lifetime of 10 years
shall be specified.
3.8.11 In addition to individual dwelling/unit metering, buildings containing multiple
dwellings/units shall also be metered at the heat exchanger or point of supply into that
building. as required by the Heat Network Metering and Billing Regulations. See
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Appendix F.
3.8.12 The minimum frequency of data collection and billing shall be quarterly for
residential and micro-businesses, and monthly for non-residential customers. Where
AMR systems are deployed, the minimum frequency for billing shall be monthly and
half-hourly readings should be gathered to allow the heat network to be analysed,
improved and performance targets met.
3.8.13 The designer shall carry out a connectivity/communication study to ensure that
wireless meter readings can be transmitted successfully. This shall take account of
both the vertical separation between dwellings and the materials used in the
construction of the building.
3.8.14 The design and selection of metering and billing systems shall be carried out
with the customer in mind. Metering and billing are key parts of customer satisfaction
and this begins in decisions made at design stage.
3.8.15 The meters and AMR system shall be capable of providing feedback to
customers on the heat used compared to norms and advice on how to manage their
consumption. For non-residential customers the monitoring of heat demand profiles on
a half-hour basis can enable both parties (customer and heat supplier) to identify
control modifications that would reduce peak demands or change the timing of peak
demands for the benefit of the heat network and hence result in lower customer costs.
3.8.16 Where there is a thermal substation in a building/block, then sufficient
temperature and pressure measurement points shall be included to allow flow
temperature stability and pump differential pressure to be monitored during operation
on the secondary network within the building/block. See Sections 3.3.7 and 6.3.10.
Best practice
BP3.8a (MOVED TO 3.8.15) Best practice would include the use of metering data etc
BP3.8b To provide future-proofing around the choice of data collection and billing
providers, best practice would be to select an AMR or smart metering system from a
vendor providing an open interface, i.e. so that the choice of metering equipment
should not tie the operator to one customer service and billing provider.
BP3.8c Best practice would be to refer to International Performance Measurement
and Verification Protocol (IPMVP) as far as is relevant and apply the IPMVP principles
where possible.
BP3.8d Best practice would be that the meters and meter reading system should be
capable of providing meter readings at 5-minute intervals to give the resident and
scheme operator and customers even greater granularity, and hence more informed
analysis/decisions about control settings.
BP3.8d (INCLUDED IN BP3.8B) To provide future-proofing and a change of heat
supplier best practice would involve the provision of AMR systems that comply with
the Open Metering System Specification, see http://oms-group.org/en.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 107 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 3.8 – Key outputs

Output 3.8a – TM39 metering strategy
Output 3.8b – Heat metering specification
Output 3.8c – AMR system specification
Output 3.8d – Billing system specification
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.9 – To achieve an efficient heat distribution

system within a multi-residential building and to reduce
risk of overheating
Why is this objective important?
Controlling heat losses from the network is important to maintain the energy efficiency
benefit of the overall system and to reduce costs to customers. It is normally the case
that heat losses from the small diameter branches to the final customer are the most
significant as the total length of such branches is relatively high. Where there is a
block of flats, the secondary pipework within the building can also have significant
heat losses, e.g. losing heat in corridors and service areas. In winter these losses may
provide useful heat into the building, but this heat is uncontrolled and occurs before
dwelling meters if installed. In summer the heat gain may cause unacceptable levels
of overheating especially in corridors where the pipework may be run in the ceiling
void.
This objective is particularly important for new residential buildings (and existing
buildings being thermally upgraded) where space heating demands are low and the
secondary network heat losses can therefore be relatively high in percentage terms.
Overheating risks will also be more of a concern in a well-insulated building. It is
essential that the designer considers this whole issue from the outset as the best
solution is likely to have architectural implications.
There are a number of reasons why the heat losses from secondary networks may be
higher than an acceptable limit and these should all be reviewed:
- Length of pipe installed, especially the use of horizontal runs in corridors
- High flow and return operating temperatures and fixed bypasses leading to high
return temperatures under part-load
- HIUs with standby (keep-warm) flow rates that are too high
- Insufficient thickness of insulation specified
- Insulation not specified over valves, fittings and pipe supports.
- Oversized pipe (on average reducing pipes by one size reduces heat loss by
10%)
Networks often require bypasses around HIUs and thermal substations, but they can
be misused, resulting in poor heat network performance. Bypasses, need careful
design and are actually required for three reasons:

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 108 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- to keep flow temperature high enough to achieve good instantaneous hot water
response
- to protect pumps from abnormally low flow condition
- to prevent stagnant water in deadlegs.
Minimum requirements
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.9.1 When designing the heat distribution system within a block of flats the primary
aim shall be to minimise the length of pipework. In blocks of flats, this will typically
require more vertical risers so that the use of horizontal distribution pipework within
corridors is minimised, see Figure 15 and Figure HHH. HIUs shall be located as close
to the horizontal distribution pipework as possible to further reduce the length of the
terminal connections. Pipes supplying each flat from the riser shall be kept to a
minimum, e.g. running individual horizontals to each dwelling such that there are
many pairs of LTHW pipe running down a corridor will not comply with this Code.

Figure 13 - Benefits of using shared risers compared to horizontal runs for typical flat layouts
Change caption in Figure 15 to:
a) Multiple shared risers minimising horizontal distribution
b) Single riser – excessive horizontal distribution (avoid if possible)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 109 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Single riser – very long

laterals to HIUs placed
near external walls
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Middle – Single riser,

short laterals

Bottom – Multiple
risers, shortest laterals

Figure HHH – Typical floor plan showing effect of HIU location (Courtesy of Max Fordham & Partners)

3.9.2 Where new dwelling heating systems are to be installed, these shall be
designed for maximum return temperatures of 70C flow with 40°C from space heating
circuits and 25°C from instantaneous DHWS heat exchangers (see Table 6 and
Objective 3.4).
3.9.3 The use of keep-warm bypasses shall be avoided, but where they are
necessary the bypass flow rate should be minimised. – where instantaneous heat
exchangers are used, the standby flow will normally result in a sufficient bypass flow.
Figure HHH shows some typical pipework layouts. Lowest losses will be achieved by
using the pipe layout shown in the bottom diagram which will allow HIUs without a
keep-warm function to still deliver DHW rapidly. In these situations, temperature-
controlled bypasses at the top of risers will be required.
Constant fixed bypasses shall not be used, and any bypasses shall be temperature-
controlled so that the bypass only operates when flow temperatures are below a
minimum set point. Bypasses do not need to keep the pipework at the design flow
temperature. At low loads, lower supply temperatures will be able meet the customer
demands. At higher system loads, the flow temperature will be higher as the higher
system flow rates result in less temperature drop at the energy centre.
3.9.4 Where a ‘keep-warm’ facility within an HIU is used, this will provide sufficient
bypass flow. The function of the HIU keep-warm is to ensure sufficiently rapid DHW
delivery. Lower standby temperatures will tend to lead to longer delivery times for
DHW, but the performance varies between different HIUs. Higher standby
temperatures will result in higher network heat losses. The BESA HIU Test Regime
tests for both DHW response time and no-load (standby) return temperatures. Where
this test data is available, the designer shall use this to set an achievable but efficient
HIU specification. Lower system heat losses may be possible where only the risers
and not the HIUs are kept-warm, but the pipe length between HIU and riser will need

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 110 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

to be kept short to achieve acceptable DHW response times. The designer should
also consider that smaller diameter DHW distribution pipework from the HIU will speed
the delivery of DHW to the tap and save water.
Bypass flows within the dwelling Hydraulic Interface Unit (HIU) to maintain the DHWS
instantaneous heat exchanger in readiness shall be temperature controlled so that
return temperatures are at least 5°C below the outlet (tap) water set-point. Fixed
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

bypasses within HIUs shall not be used.

3.9.5a Heat losses from the heat network within the building shall be calculated, from
the point of connection to the heat meters in each dwelling. The thickness of pipe
insulation shall be carefully considered taking account of:
- The cost benefit of using additional insulation, e.g. using the methodology of BS
5422 and taking account of the continuous operation of the network.
- The CO2 emissions benefits of additional insulation.
- The need to control heat gain within corridors to provide a comfortable
environment in summer.
- The ambient temperature which may be lower than normal in exposed areas such
as underground car parks.
Note: Experience to date has shown that insulation thicknesses typically will need
to be much greater than is normally used in most building services applications,
e.g. 40 mm phenolic foam insulation. This is likely to have implications on the
architectural design, e.g. depth of ceiling voids. With appropriate design the heat
loss within the building should be less than 15%; part of this loss will be useful heat
gain within the building during the heating season.
3.9.5b The following minimum insulation thickness in Table ZZZ shall be used for all
heating distribution pipework within the building where practical. Designers deviating
from these minimum thicknesses shall justify their selection. However, the designer
can choose other materials and thicknesses to achieve the same heat loss if desired.
Table ZZZ – Minimum pipework insulation thicknesses for internal and external spaces
Pipe diameter Phenolic foam Phenolic foam Mineral fibre Mineral fibre
(mm) (Steel) (Internal (external (Internal (external
space) (mm) space) (mm) space) (mm) space) (mm)

15mm 50 50 50 50

20mm 50 50 50 50

25mm 50 50 50 50

32mm 50 50 50 50

50mm 50 50 60 60

65mm 50 50 60 60

80mm 50 50 60 60

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 111 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Note 1: Insulation thicknesses are calculated assuming a conductivity (K-factor or lambda) of

0.035W/m.K for mineral fibre and 0.025W/m.K for phenolic foam insulation with a low surface emissivity
of 0.05.
Note 2: If alternative materials are used, a thickness which results in a heat loss equal to, or lower than,
the loss using the materials in the table shall be selected. These insulation thicknesses are greater than
would be typically used in other applications as the pipework is in continuous operation.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.9.5c The total annual heat loss from the secondary pipework distribution and other
equipment within the building shall be calculated and divided by the number of
dwellings. This calculated value shall be less than 876 kWh/dwelling/year, equivalent
to 100W on average, or 2.4kWh per day on average. The heat loss shall be calculated
for that part of the system between a building/block heat meter and heat meters at the
dwellings (typically within an HIU) so that the heat loss can be measured during
operation and compared with the calculated value.
The calculation shall be carried out using the methodology in CIBSE Guide C and
BS5422 assuming still air and an ambient of 20°C for pipework in corridors and risers,
and local dry air bulb temperatures for external pipework in basements, and with
appropriate assumptions on level of exposure. The calculation shall be carried out
either on an hour by hour basis through the year, or by dividing the year into a number
of operating modes with the flow and return temperatures estimated for each hour or
operating mode.
Note: The above (3.9.5c) is for multi-residential buildings only. Most of the heat loss is from the lateral
pipework from riser to dwelling. In larger properties, the lateral pipework would not necessarily be any
longer, and indeed could be much shorter e.g. one flat per floor and a single riser. The pipe sizing is
only for space heating loads less than 7kW and domestic hot water sizes of less than 45kW.
3.9.6 All valves, flanges and fittings shall be insulated, see examples in Figure
WWW.

Figure WWW – Examples of valve insulation

3.9.7 Pipe supports shall use rigid low conductivity inserts to maintain the insulation
quality at the support.
3.9.8 The insulation shall be continuous and close fitting at all joints.
3.9.9a Heating pipework shall not be run adjacent or below cold water pipework to
keep cold water temperatures low and reduce legionella risks in the cold water supply.
3.9.9b All pipework within buildings should be accessible for maintenance purposes,
e.g. above suspended ceilings, in riser cupboards or behind screwed panels. In
particular, all valves and pipe fittings must be accessible.
3.9.10 Pipe sizing shall be based on flow rates calculated from realistic diversified
demands for space heating and hot water heating, and applying the appropriate
temperature difference (flow-return) that will be seen under peak conditions for each
part of the demand (see Objective 3.2).

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 112 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.9.11a Care shall be taken to avoid overestimation of the DHW demand and hence
the HIU plate heat exchangers as the oversizing will lead to poor temperature control
and oversized pipework. Similarly, oversized space heating heat exchangers lead to
high return water temperatures at typical operating conditions. Typical sizes are
shown in Table YYY from Blackwell H - A technical note investigating the Combination
Boiler Market to provide a proxy for a simple thermal Quality of Service Standard in
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Heat Interface Units (BSER&T 2019). Designers departing from these values need to
justify their selection.
Table YYY - Typical sizes of DHW HIU plate heat exchangers
Property Maximum Number of Typical maximum Notes
type/suitability occupancy bathrooms power @ 10°C feed

Studio/1-bed 1 1 25-30 kW Suitable for servicing a shower and

potentially a small bath, where the risk
of a second draw-off (e.g. wash basin)
is nil or low because of a limited
occupancy

Large 1-bed/ Small 3 1 30-35 kW Suitable for servicing a single bathroom

with larger fittings (e.g. higher flow rate
2-bed
shower, larger bath) and low risk of
occasional additional draw-off

Medium 2-bed/3- 4 2 35 kW Suitable for servicing a single bathroom

with larger fittings (e.g. higher flow rate
bed
shower, larger bath), with potential to
serve second simultaneous draw-off
from a washbasin type fitting but not a
second shower. An example would be
one main bathroom with a second en-
suite or cloakroom facility. Consider
cold feed supply limitations

2-bed/4-bed 6 2 35-45 kW Suitable for servicing potentially two

carefully specified and flow balanced
bathrooms, e.g. to service 2
simultaneous showers, or a shower and
a kitchen tap or other draw-offs,
dependant on cold water feed flow
availability

Greater than 3- N/A >2 ≥45 kW No longer equivalent to a typical

combination boiler. Likely to be
bed, including (larger HIU units are practically limited to, and therefore
luxury fittings available up to sized upon, the cold water feed supply
(baths, monsoon approximately 60 kW*) rate to the property, thermal network
showers etc) supply rate and Building Regulations.
Careful specification required to ensure
HIU can efficiently service small volume
draw-offs at ≤2 litres/min, which will
form the majority of demand incidents

Note: A minimum operating condition of ≤2 litres/min from HIUs at which a stable, controlled low return
temperature back to the communal or district system would be recommended as an equivalent
performance to current combination boiler offerings. This performance requirement is likely to become
more important as the thermal output of HIUs increases. For example, with the 60kW units highlighted
with a * in the above table, as the more common load is likely to be one shower or smaller draw-offs.
This equipment will need to operate stably at these loads, as well as at any rare twin shower draw-offs.

Any specification undertaken in line with this proposed Quality of Service needs to
take careful account of the required final specified terminal device flow rates, and the
balancing of these, as these are likely to be closely matched with peak performance of
the HIU when two simultaneous draw-off’s occur.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 113 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.9.11b Care shall be taken to avoid oversizing of distribution pipes, recognising that
peak demands in final branches will only occur for a short period, as the oversizing will
lead to higher heat losses. Figure XXX shows a typical breakdown of network losses.
The maximum diameter for the final branch to a dwelling shall be no more than: 20mm
for steel pipework, 22mm for copper pipework and 25mm for PEX/PB. These sizes are
suitable for typical applications with space heating loads less than 7kW and DHWS
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

heat exchangers less than 45kW. Designers exceeding these values need to justify
their selection. For other materials, pipe sizes resulting in similar peak velocities shall
be used.
Note: The pipe sizing in 3.9.11b is only for space heating loads less than 7kW and domestic hot water
sizes of less than 45kW.

Figure XXX shows a typical breakdown of a poor network with high heat losses

3.9.12 The heat loss calculations shall be based on the predicted average flow and
return temperatures for each mode of operation over the year. This shall take account
of the return temperatures that will occur in low demand periods which may be
determined, for example, by how the HIUs are controlled when operating in
standby/keep-warm mode.
3.9.13 The risk of overheating in summer shall be assessed and additional insulation
to that given above shall be specified if necessary, or alternative pipe routes, and/or
hot water system designs evaluated.
3.9.14 Where the heat network runs in corridors, a calculation of all internal gains
including pipe heat losses shall be carried out and suitable provision made for
ventilation of these corridors to avoid unacceptable internal temperatures in summer.
3.9.15 Variable speed pumps shall be selected taking account of the low demand
(minimum flow) condition to minimise the volume of bypass flow required to protect the
pump. Multiple pumps of different capacities may be required e.g. a small ‘jockey’
pump.
3.9.16 The design team shall consider how the system shall be commissioned and
shall develop an outline commissioning plan/programme including the overall
approach to commissioning and the parameters to be achieved. The plan must cover
all aspects of the heat network scheme, but in particular the:

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 114 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- building internal heat distribution (the heat network within the buildings)
- heat supply (the HIUs, space heating and hot water systems in dwellings).
Best practice
BP3.9a Best practice would be to achieve a total annual heat loss from the secondary
pipework distribution and other equipment within the building of less than
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

550kWh/dwelling/year.
BP3.9b Best practice design would be to avoid the use of any distribution pipework in
corridors, by using multiple risers and hence minimal branch lengths into dwellings,
provided that suitable access is still maintained.
Objective 3.9 – Key outputs
Output 3.9a – Optimised internal network design
Output 3.9b – Internal pipework insulation specification
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.10 – To design cost-effective and efficient

central plant
Why is this objective important?
The principal rationale for any heat network is that heat can be produced at lower cost
and with a lower carbon content at a central plant than at a building level. In particular
certain heat sources are only feasible at scale (e.g. deep geothermal, energy from
waste). The economic case for the heat network will depend on achieving the cost and
environmental benefits at the central plant.
Designers will need to refer to detailed guidance on various aspects of central plant
design as appropriate, which are listed in the References and Further Reading
sections of this Code. In particular, further guidance can be found in Heat Networks
Design Guide (Parsloe Consulting, 2018. This objective highlights some key
requirements to provide a focus for the design on the overall heat supply and impacts
on the heat network.
Minimum requirements
3.10.1 The techno economic operating model used to meet objective 2.2 shall be
updated using more accurate design data. The capacity of the primary low carbon
heat source(s) and thermal storage shall be determined through economic
optimisation using the updated energy demand estimates and an hour by hour
operating model as described in Objective 2.2. The capacity may be further refined to
take account of future growth in heat demand or specific Client requirements for CO2
reduction. See objectives 3.11 and 3.12.
Note: For example, a CHP or Water Source Heat Pump plant would be typically sized
to provide around 80% of the total heat demand of a scheme with the balance from
gas-fired boilers.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 115 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.10.2 The average CO2 content of the heat supplied over the year shall be calculated
in g/kWh heat delivered to the buildings and made available to designers of buildings
that may wish to connect, and to operators of existing buildings. See the CP1.2
‘metrics’ spreadsheet for an example calculation. The average CO2 content of the heat
supplied to the buildings should be calculated and compared with the counterfactual,
taking into account heat losses and pumping energy. Given the gradual
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

decarbonisation of the electricity grid, it may be appropriate to consider a range of

alternative counterfactuals rather than just gas boilers, particularly in new-build
scenarios.
3.10.3 The low carbon energy plant shall be selected to provide the appropriate
balance between economic and environmental performance.
3.10.4 (Incorporated into 3.10.1) Low carbon energy plant shall be sized to take
account of the need to operate effectively at the full range of heat demands across the
year. An hour by hour operating model shall be set up to evaluate a range of plant
sizes and number of units.
3.10.5 The hydraulic design of the central plant and its control philosophy, along with a
Description of Operation (DesOps) shall be developed. This will define how the central
plant shall be controlled to maximise the use and efficiency of the low carbon heat
source(s) (in preference to peak boilers). The DesOps for heat pump and CHP plant
shall reflect the anticipated electricity STOD tariff structure in order to minimise heat
production costs. This will lead to the production of a functional specification for the
control system. Where possible, the future operators of the plant shall be consulted on
the proposed control strategy.
3.10.6 The fuel supply requirements shall be identified at an early stage and
discussed with fuel suppliers especially with respect to pressures and volumes in the
case of gas supply, capacity and voltage with respect to electrical supply for heat
pumps and storage volumes, delivery method and fuel handling for biomass systems.
The electrical supply to new large heat pumps may need to be strengthened with
additional transformer capacity. The use of gas pressure boosters shall be avoided
where possible e.g. by selecting plant that operates on low pressure gas or by direct
use of medium pressure gas. Any gas boosters shall be controlled such that they and
only operated when gas is required by the boilers or CHP.
3.10.7 Where CHP is used, consideration shall be given at an early stage to the
connection to the local distribution network operator’s system to establish whether
there are fault level constraints or other operating conditions, and to establish the cost
and timescales for the connection.
3.10.8 Where CHP is used, options for the sale of electricity shall be determined at an
early stage (see 2.12.4) and reconfirmed at this stage, as this may have implications
for the wider electricity network design. For example, there may be an opportunity for
direct supply of electricity to meet electricity demands in local buildings or the use of
the ‘Licence Lite’ regulations may be feasible.
3.10.9 The operating temperatures proposed for the heat network shall be considered
in the development of the central plant solution. CHP, heat pumps, condensing boilers
and thermal store efficiencies/effectiveness are all sensitive to return temperature and
the circuit design should aim to ensure that the flow water cannot mix with the return
water. Return temperatures are often higher in practice than the design condition,
especially at part-load, and so a suitable tolerance needs to be allowed for in the
design. In some cases, the central plant selection will have a strong influence on the

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 116 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

operating temperatures to be used, both for the design condition and at part-load, e.g.
when using centralised heat pumps or steam extraction from steam turbines.
3.10.10 In developing the design, the requirements of the local planning authority shall
be considered at an early stage, including the local environmental impacts of visual
intrusion, noise and emissions to air.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.10.11a The conclusions of the feasibility stage regarding the disposition of top-up
and standby boilers shall be reviewed and updated including whether these boilers
are to be located within existing buildings or centrally or a combination of the two.
3.10.11b Where boilers are installed, the maximum operating temperature differential
and minimum flow rate of the boilers shall be considered, and a control circuit
developed to meet both the requirements of the primary heat network and the boilers.
3.10.12 Where condensing boilers are specified the circuit shall be designed to
maximise the opportunity for condensing conditions to occur including, for example,
the avoidance of low loss headers which potentially create a route from flow into the
return, commonly raising the return temperatures to boilers. Headers can be
designed-out by the selection of higher volume boilers that have no minimum flow rate
restrictions.
3.10.13 The circuits shall be designed to enable the CHP to operate without
premature shutdown as a result of high return temperatures. Care shall be taken to
avoid adverse transient conditions by avoiding the use of a common flow and return
header and ensuring there is recirculation around the boilers to control boiler off
temperatures at start-up and shutdown (see also CIBSE AM12, 2013).
3.10.14 The pipework, vessels, and flanges shall be insulated; pump bodies, valves
and strainers shall be insulated with flexible jackets that can be easily removed and
replaced.
3.10.15 The layout design of the energy centre shall take into account the needs of
the operator and provide suitable maintenance facilities, storage for spares and
access space to carry out maintenance work to a high quality and in a safe manner.
Where possible, the future operator shall be involved in the design so that appropriate
facilities can be provided in order to minimise operational costs.
3.10.16 The energy centre shall be future-proofed as much as possible. In particular,
the layout of the energy centre shall take into account the requirement to replace plant
in the future, without undue disruption and in a safe manner. Consideration shall be
given to the likelihood that the next plant replacement may be of a different
technology.
3.10.17 (MOVED INTO 3.10.16)
3.10.18 The ventilation of the plantroom shall be by natural means wherever possible
to reduce the use of electricity for ventilation fans. However, the ventilation strategy
will also need to consider the fire strategy, the DSEAR regulations, the Medium
Combustion Plant Directive (MCPD) and the need for acoustic measures. Combustion
air for CHP units shall not be drawn directly from the boiler room where feasible.
3.10.19 The design shall consider the impact of leakage of water from plant failure
and seek to minimise the damage this might cause by providing adequate drainage
and mounting electrical and control equipment at a higher level.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 117 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.10.20 Oil tanks and oil-filled transformers shall be bunded to contain leakage in the
event of a fault.
3.10.21 The design team shall consider how the system shall be commissioned and
develop an outline commissioning plan/programme and the overall approach to
commissioning including the parameters to be achieved. The plan must cover all
aspects of the heat network scheme, but in particular the:
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- heat generation (energy centre)

- heat distribution (the heat network and interfaces to the buildings)
- secondary heat network and tertiary systems
Best practice
BP3.10a Best practice could be for the primary low carbon heat source(s) to be sized
to deliver a higher proportion of the annual heat demand, e.g. 75 to 80%, to maximise
the carbon benefit and for the average CO2 content of the heat supplied at the
buildings to be less than 100 g/kWh, after taking into account heat losses and
pumping energy.
BP3.10a Best Practice would be to carry out a specific study to analyse the energy
centre efficiency under low-load conditions and make design changes as necessary.
BP3.10b Best practice would also be to design using BIM techniques and 3-D
visualisation, as shown in Figure 16.

Figure 14 - Design of an energy centre using BIM

BP3.10c Best practice would be to design the building services so that DH return
temperatures are below 40°C at all times, to enable condensing heat recovery from
boilers, CHP and intercooler heat recovery from the CHP is achievable. This lowers
the cost and carbon content of heat.
District cooling systems can similarly use a range of cooling sources including
absorption chillers, vapour compression chillers or in some places river/borehole
water. The main objective is to obtain a significant difference in cost and efficiency
from using centralised chillers compared to local chillers installed in buildings. This
could be obtained, for example, by being able to use evaporative cooling towers or
heat rejection to a river. Additional advantages can be obtained if the district cooling

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 118 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

system is linked to a heat network where the heat rejected can be utilised as a heat
source for a heat pump supplying the heat network.
Objective 3.10 – Key outputs
Output 3.10a – Low carbon energy centre plant specification
Output 3.10b – Energy Centre design
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Output 3.10c – CO2 heat content calculations

Output 3.10d – Energy Centre commissioning plan
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.11 – To optimise the use of thermal storage

Why is this objective important?
Incorporating thermal storage has a number of potential economic, technical and
environmental benefits:
- Reducing the peak boiler capacity by using heat from the store to meet short-term
peak demands
- Smoothing the daily variation in heat demand and reducing the need to operate
the peak boilers, so that peak boilers are used less and low carbon plant more –
normally of benefit in the spring and autumn months.
- Enabling a CHP plant to operate during times of higher electricity price (e.g.
daytime) and shutting down at times of low electricity price (e.g. night-time).
- Enabling extraction from steam turbine and operation of heat pumps to be
prioritised during times of low electricity price (e.g. night-time).
- Allowing the main heat/power source to use demand side response to optimise
revenue.
- Enabling biomass boilers to operate more continuously, improving efficiency.
- Enabling plant to operate at maximum output and efficiency for fewer hours rather
than load-following and on part-load when it would be less efficient.
- Reducing the number of start/stops of low carbon plant, especially CHP units, to
protect the machine and reduce maintenance costs.
- Providing future flexibility to utilise other less controllable heat sources e.g. waste
heat, solar thermal etc.
- Enabling heat pumps to work at higher CoPs when just heating cooler parts of the
thermal store.
- By using local distributed thermal stores, reduce the peak heat network capacity
and hence use smaller network pipes.
The design and sizing of a thermal store requires an operating model that uses
predicted heat demand profiles on an hour by hour basis for a full year. The operating
model should assess the economic benefits of a range of store sizes, and where site
constraints allow, the most economic thermal store should be selected. Establishing

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 119 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

the economic benefit of the store is key to justifying the space and cost that the store
requires.
There are a number of different types of thermal store design, both pressurised and
unpressurised, which are all acceptable provided the minimum requirements are met.
Minimum requirements
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

3.11.1 The economic benefit and additional CO2 saving of including the thermal store
shall be assessed. The size of a thermal store shall be optimised by using an hour by
hour simulation, as required in Objective 2.2, to achieve minimum lifecycle costs, or to
meet other specified criteria, and shall allow for a mixing zone which effectively
reduces the useful volume available by at least 10%.

Figure 15 - Illustration of CHP modelling with thermal store over a 24 hour period
Change legend in Figure 19 to “CHP heat to thermal store”
3.11.2 The store shall be designed to operate with the maximum temperature
difference available which may mean that it uses a flow temperature higher than the
network flow temperature.
3.11.3 Where possible a single store shall be used to minimise cost and heat losses.
3.11.4 Each store shall have a height to diameter ratio above 1:1.5 and preferably 1:2,
in order to minimize the volume of the inactive separation layer. Designers departing
from these values need to justify their selection. However, if the entry diffusers are
well designed, experience shows that ratios down to 1:1 are feasible, as discussed in
3.11.6. Multiple small stores should be avoided where possible as the effects of heat
conduction down the store walls, and mixing at flow entry points, have a greater
impact on the stratification.
3.11.5 The dimensions of the store shall take account of practical considerations
including: space constraints, transport constraints, planning requirements, structural
implications and manufacturing/fabrication processes.
3.11.6 The store shall be designed to minimise turbulence and to promote stratification
by using diffusers large diameter connections at entry and exit points that ensure flow
velocities at the point of entry less than 0.23m/s. Multiple entry/exit points into the tank
could also be used to minimise turbulence. If turbulence is limited, then the mixing
layer between the hot and cold fluids is minimised and the volume available for energy
storage is maximised. Figure KKK shows an example of good diffuser design, the flow

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 120 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

into the store passes between the two horizontal circular plates at the outer diameter
of which the flow rates can be well below the maximum of 0.2m/s.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure KKK – Example of good diffuser design (Left bottom entry, right top exit)

3.11.7 Where multiple stores are used, these shall be connected in series to maximise
useful storage volume, see Figure 18. In this case, the height of the store (in relation
to objective 3.11.4) shall be considered to be the sum of the heights of the individual
stores.
3.11.8 A minimum of 5 temperature sensors shall be installed on the vessel, aligned
vertically to enable the operation of the store to be monitored, or an equivalent
alternative system shall be used to provide the same or better facility.
3.11.9 To limit turbulence, connections to the store shall be such that the flows in and
out of the store are only the difference between the scheme heat demand and the
central plant production and not the total heat demand. A common header
arrangement shall not be used as the thermal store itself normally provides this
function.

Figure 16 - A thermal store in operation in Coventry

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 121 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 17 - Schematic of a possible arrangement of thermal stores

3.11.10 The store shall be insulated to minimise lifecycle costs and meet the
performance requirements with respect to temperature loss.
3.11.11 The central plant shall normally be controlled so that the low carbon heat
source (e.g. CHP or heat pump) is operated to fill the store at times that maximise the
commercial benefit, e.g. to maximise income from electricity generation at certain
times of the day. The Description of Operation (DesOps) must be based on the
techno-economic optimisation model. Simpler controls shall be avoided, that just turn
plant on when the temperature at the top of the store drops below a set-point (i.e.
when the store is empty) and turn off when the temperature at the bottom of the store
rises above a set-point (when the store is full) may fail to achieve the maximum
economic benefit from the LZC plant and thermal store.
is turned on when the temperature of the top of the store drops below a set-point
(when the store is ‘empty’) and turns off when the temperature at the bottom of the
store rises above a set-point (when the store is ‘full’). More complex controls may also
be used to maximise the commercial benefit of the store, e.g. to maximise income
from electricity generation at certain times of the day.
3.11.12 The control system shall be such that low carbon heat is delivered to meet the
heat demand as the first priority with any surplus heat available being stored for later
use.
3.11.13 The control systems shall take account of transient conditions when plant is
started and stopped to ensure that only hot water is delivered to the top of the store so
as to avoid spurious temperature signals being given to the heat generating plant.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 122 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.11.14 Although it is unlikely that significant maintenance work will be required on the
thermal store, or that wholesale replacement will be required within the life of the
scheme, the requirements of maintenance and replacement shall be considered as
part of the design.
3.11.15 Consideration shall be given to the location of the thermal store recognising
that a thermal store located closer to customers within the network has the potential
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

benefit of reducing the capacity of the primary heat network as well as providing
economic and efficiency benefits at the energy centre plant. Consideration should also
be given to the resilience of the store with regard to vehicular damage, vandalism or
other interference.
Best practice
BP3.11a Best practice would be to future-proof any thermal storage. It is likely that the
benefits of thermal storage will become more significant in the future so planning for
additional storage to be added would be a best practice approach.
BP3.11b The use of inter-seasonal storage would be considered best practice for
some heat sources (e.g. solar thermal or ground source heat pumps).
Objective 3.11 – Key outputs
Output 3.11a – Thermal storage optimisation report
Output 3.11b – Thermal storage control strategy
Output 3.11c – Storage vessel & insulation specification
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.12 – To finalise the financial analysis, risk

analysis and sensitivities
Why is this objective important?
During and at the end of the design stage the financial analysis shall be updated to
reflect the latest design, the plant performance and the cost estimates. This may lead
to a need for value engineering to maintain a sound business case, although care
should be taken to ensure this does not compromise the efficiency of the plant and
heat network.
The financial model can also be used in conjunction with a risk analysis to assess the
impact of risks and the benefits of mitigation.
A wider range of sensitivities may be investigated at this stage using the financial
model. See Heat Networks: guidance for developers and the supply chain (BEIS
2016) https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/heat-networks-guidance-for-
developers-and-the-supply-chain.
Minimum requirements
3.12.1a The financial analysis developed in Stage 2 shall be updated using: the
predicted performance of central plant as designed, the latest cost estimates and the
more accurate estimates of network heat losses, boiler standing losses, pumping
energy and other parasitic electricity uses. The analysis shall be based on hourly

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 123 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

demand profiles and shall use STOD tariffs, sought from prospective electricity
supplier, including any DUoS charges/credits.
3.12.1b The capital cost model (see section 2.9) shall be updated and finalised, within
a target tolerance not exceeding ±10%. This shall provide a detailed breakdown of the
cost components including: fuel supplies, energy centre building, each individual low
carbon technology, heat network pipework (including trenching and road
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

crossings/closures), pumps, transformers, thermal substations, HIUs and overall

installation costs. Costs shall also include estimates for commissioning, design fees,
project management and a contingency depending upon overall project risk. At this
stage, capital costs shall where possible be based on firm quotations from
suppliers/contractors.
3.12.2 The risk register shall be reviewed and updated, and progress monitored on
actions assigned for mitigation.
3.12.3 A sensitivity analysis shall be conducted using the risk register as a starting
point so that each risk can be quantified in terms of impact on IRR, NPV and heat
selling price. This shall also include assessing the potential benefit from defined risk
mitigation measures.
3.12.4a As a minimum the following sensitivities shall be included:
- heat, cooling and power sales volume (where applicable)
- delays in the connection of buildings to the network
- downtime of primary heat source, e.g. CHP or heat pumps
- variations in future fuel and electricity prices
- out-turn construction cost
- construction programme over-run
- non-fuel operating and maintenance costs and management costs
3.12.4b Analysis shall be carried out to ensure that the proposed customer heat
charges covering the full operating cost of the heat network (including billing cost and
capital replacement costs) are lower than the counterfactual heat costs.
3.12.5 A separate analysis which assigns monetary value to the CO2 saved (e.g. using
the BEIS social cost of carbon) shall also be undertaken although this would not
normally be used to evaluate the viability of the investment.
3.12.6 Data about each of the final building connections to be included in the design,
and confirmed by the financial modelling, shall be recorded and included in the
evidence pack. The CP1.2 Excel workbook provides a sheet titled CONNECTION
CHECKLIST to aid this process.
Best practice
BP3.12a Best practice would be to prepare a profit and loss/balance sheet in
accordance with the Detailed Project Development Guidance Documents (BEIS
2016). This work would be led by a finance specialist.
BP3.12b The risk analysis could follow the principles of ISO 31000 as best practice.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 124 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 3.12 – Key outputs

Output 3.12a – Updated CAPEX model
Output 3.12b – Updated financial analysis
Output 3.12c – Updated risk register & risk analysis
Output 3.12d – Updated sensitivity analysis
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.13 – To assess environmental impacts and

benefits
Why is this objective important?
At the design stage a more detailed evaluation of environmental impacts and benefits
will be required to support a planning application, to comply with legislation and to
make the case for the project in terms of CO2 reductions.
Minimum requirements
3.13.1 The expected emissions from the central plant shall be assessed to determine
stack height, updating/detailing the calculations made in 2.11. Depending on the scale
of the scheme, the stage of design and the requirements of the planning authority, a
dispersion model may be required to calculate the impact on ground level
concentrations or other sensitive receptors, especially of NOX and where appropriate
PM10.
3.13.2a Where gas-fired CHP (>300 kWe) is to be used without further treatment in an
air quality management area, the TA-Luft standard for NOx of 250 mg/Nm3 at 5% O2
shall be specified, or the requirements of the local planning authority where these are
more onerous. The design shall also comply with the Medium Plant Combustion
Directive and associated regulations.
3.13.2b Where refrigerants are to be used in low carbon plant e.g. heat pumps, then
these shall be selected to minimise total Global Warming Potential using predicted
refrigerant leakage rates. An assessment of the likely greenhouse gas emissions
associated with refrigerant leakage shall be made and expressed as CO2 equivalent
emissions. Careful consideration should be given to the longevity of refrigerant supply,
as many are being gradually phased-out.
3.13.3 Where biomass boilers are used, the particulate emissions shall be assessed,
and suitable control technologies selected.
3.13.4 Biomass shall be sourced from sustainable sources and consideration given to
the transport energy required.
3.13.5 Where necessary, an acoustic survey shall be undertaken to establish
background noise levels in the area of the energy plant and the requirements for the
design of the energy centre acoustic control set accordingly.
3.13.6 The CO2 savings and carbon intensity of the heat supplied shall be updated
from Stage 2 including projections on a year by year basis as to how these might
change in the future as the electricity grid is decarbonised. CO2 emission calculations

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 125 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

shall be based on published emission factors and realistic efficiencies for central plant
both for the full build-out and the early years of growth. For the purposes of planning
and building control compliance calculations in new-build schemes, emission factors
used in Part L of the Building Regulations should be used. However, for both new and
existing buildings, the DH design shall use emission factors taken from ‘Valuation of
Energy Use and Greenhouse Gas – Supplementary Guidance to the HM Treasury
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Green Book (2018)’ to ensure a consistent approach to electricity grid emissions

factors that reflect grid decarbonisation. Where CHP is used care must be taken to
use efficiencies quoted against Gross Calorific Value (GCV) as this is the basis on
which fuel emission factors are quoted.
Best practice
BP3.13a A best practice approach in an air quality management area would be to use
a higher stack to disperse pollutants more widely or to use exhaust gas treatment.
BP3.13b The use of renewable forms of heat e.g. solar water heating, waste heat, or a
fuel cell CHP fuelled by natural gas, or other hydrogen rich fuels would also be
considered to reduce environmental impacts.
BP3.13c An evaluation of the embodied energy/carbon within the overall heat network
would be best practice pipe materials used could be undertaken. See Hitchin R,
Embodied Carbon and Building Services (CIBSE Research Report 9, 2013).
Objective 3.13 – Key outputs
Output 3.13a – Updated Life cycle CO2 emissions calculations
Output 3.13b – Updated Network heat loss calculations
Output 3.13c – Updated NOx emissions calculations
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 3.14 – To collaborate in establishing scheme

investability
Why is this objective important?
Establishing scheme investability is likely to be led by legal or financial advisors and
will take place when the heat network approaches financial close and an investment
decision is required i.e. at the end of procurement /commercialisation, see Figure
GGG and section 3.12. The design progress made at this point will vary depending on
the procurement route chosen; the design will not necessarily be complete e.g. if a
contractor is being appointed to design and build the network. Potential investors at
this stage will require evidence that the project is deliverable.
This objective supports technical advisors in contributing to a review and report setting
out the investability of the heat network project. The level of detail required in the
review will vary on a project-by-project basis, and it should be commensurate with the
scale and complexity of the project and the needs of investors. This due diligence
review will consider the full suite of project documents including, for example:
- the original business case (see section 2.12)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 126 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- various contracts prior to signature (e.g. customer supply and connection

agreements, construction and operation and maintenance, etc.)
- planning approvals and supporting documents
- land ownership and access rights (and associated contracts e.g. easements,
leases, etc.)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- design documents and specifications

- funding agreements
- revisiting the assumptions, sensitivities and risks in the financial model in order to
provide an updated assessment of financial viability.
Public sector Clients refer to this stage as the Full Business Case and will often
choose to follow HMT guidance on business cases (the Green Book). Third party
investors are likely to require a detailed due diligence exercise by independent
advisors. Investors in smaller projects may choose to conduct a more limited due
diligence, as appropriate.
A due diligence report should be produced highlighting the anticipated return on
investment, areas of risk and the extent to which these have been mitigated. This
should also set out how business structures, contract strategy and procurement
outcomes differ from those envisaged in the business case (see section 2.12). This
will allow the owners/investors to decide whether the project is in line with their
risk/reward appetite. The degree of input from the technical advisor to this exercise will
vary, but is expected to be limited, and in support of financial and legal experts.
The work should be commissioned by the Client separately to technical design work,
see the roles set out in section (v). This will need to be carried out jointly between
technical experts and legal and financial advisors. The Client should therefore ensure
suitable financial and legal resource is made available to undertake this activity. The
technical advisor should collaborate with these other advisors to explain how technical
issues impact on viability.
Although this objective appears last in the design stage, this work should be an
integral (parallel and interlinked) part of the whole design process, beginning as early
as possible. The work should be carried out jointly between the legal, financial and
technical consultants (led by the legal and financial advisors). Further guidance can
be found in a suite of Detailed Project Development Guidance Documents (BEIS
2016). See Heat Networks: guidance for developers and the supply chain
https://www.gov.uk/government/collections/heat-networks-guidance-for-developers-
and-the-supply-chain.
Minimum requirements
3.14.1 The Client shall commission a suitable team of legal, financial and technical
advisors to carry out the work in carrying out due diligence and confirming
investability. The Client shall ensure that suitable financial, legal and technical
resource is made available to undertake this activity.
3.14.2 The Client’s technical advisor shall collaborate with the other advisors to
assess the viability of the project ahead of a final investment decision.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 127 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

3.14.3 The legal, financial and technical advisors shall develop a due diligence report
to ensure the Client understands the financial viability and legal risk of the investment
that is being proposed.
3.14.4 A final agreed delivery programme shall be developed.
Best practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

BP3.14a Best practice would include consideration of the potential for scheme
extensions and new connections and could include a list of the main stakeholders to
be contacted in the future. In particular, this may include owners of individual
properties as well as key building owners such as hospital trusts, social landlords etc.
Objective 3.14 – Key outputs
Output 3.14a – Due diligence report (redacted if necessary, to protect commercially
sensitive information)
Output 3.14b – Final agreed delivery programme
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 128 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

4. Construction and installation

Objectives:
4.1 To reduce health and safety risks to staff, customers and the general
public
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

4.2 To achieve a high quality heat network construction to deliver a long

asset life
4.3 To provide a high quality heat interface unit (HIU) and building connection
construction to provide good customer service levels
4.4 To reduce adverse environmental impacts of construction

Objective 4.1 – To reduce health and safety risks to staff,

customers and the general public
Why is this objective important?
Reducing health and safety risk is of primary importance in any project and
established contractors will recognise their responsibilities. This section is not
intended to be comprehensive but will emphasise particular risks associated with heat
networks. The health and safety of the general public must be carefully considered as
heat networks are generally installed through areas that are normally accessible by
the public. The Building Services Job Book (BG 1/2009) provides a project framework
and further guidance for a construction project team.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 129 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 18 - Trench wall supports

(Seek better picture Figure 20 - ladders not secured)

Minimum requirements
4.1.1 The principal designer under the CDM Regulations 2015 shall be appointed
and a Health and Safety Risk Register established taking forward the residual risks
identified at the design stage.
4.1.2 The guidance issued by HSE in HSG47 (HSE, 2014), shall be followed to
minimise health and safety risks associated with excavation around buried services.
4.1.3 The safety risks of trenches and site compounds, both to staff and the general
public, shall be carefully analysed. This may for example include fencing and warning
signs.
4.1.4 Trench walls shall be properly supported at all times and kept clear of ground
water and debris (see Figure 20).
4.1.5 Tools and equipment shall not be left unattended at any time and shall be
stored in secure facilities outside working hours.
4.1.6 When welding, suitable screens shall be placed to protect the public.
4.1.7 Traffic management systems and pedestrian signs shall be carefully
considered. All street works should follow the NRSWA 2012 Code of Practice
recommendations and Advice Note SA 10/05 (2005) (Highways Agency), after liaison
with the appropriate authorities.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 130 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

4.1.8 Spoil heaps shall be minimised by removing surplus from site at frequent
intervals.
4.1.9 When working with heating pipes the risk of scalding shall be identified,
especially to residential customers who are vulnerable, and pipe protection shall be
provided especially on primary side pipework.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

4.1.10 Detailed design carried out by the contractor shall take account of the future
needs for safe maintenance of plant and equipment.
Objective 4.1 – Key outputs
Output 4.1a – Construction risk register
Output 4.1b – Traffic management plan
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 4.2 – To achieve a high quality heat network

construction to deliver a long asset life
Why is this objective important?
Heat networks are designed to have a long life and be very reliable. However, this is
only realised where a high standard of construction is also achieved. Much of the
detailed requirements for pre-insulated steel pipes systems are set out in EN 13941
and the Code requirements given below only emphasise the most important of these.
There are fewer potential risks arising from poor installation of pre-insulated polymer
pipes using compression sleeve joints, although a high standard of installation is still
important.
Minimum requirements
4.2.1 Where a steel pre-insulated system is selected this shall comply with EN 253
and associated standards and shall be installed in accordance with EN 13941 and
manufacturer’s instructions and guidance. Where a pre-insulated polymer pipe system
is selected this shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
and guidance.
4.2.2 For pre-insulated steel systems, the project class of the system under EN
13941 shall be defined which determines the appropriate stress calculation
methodology, inspections and NDT requirements (see 4.4.2 of EN 13941).
4.2.3 For pre-insulated steel systems, prior to installation commencing, the designer
shall confirm that the necessary stress analysis check has been carried out in
accordance with EN 13941. This design check shall also be carried out on any
deviations in the route that may arise during construction. The stress analysis shall be
documented based on the final pipework route that is installed.
4.2.4a All fitters employed to install the steel pipe system shall have received training
in the joint system in accordance with Annex C of EN 489 and hold current
certificates. For polymer pipe systems all fitters and welders shall receive specific
training in the pipe system and the jointing system and hold appropriate certificates
demonstrating competence for the type of pipe system being used.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 131 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

4.2.4b All steel welders shall be qualified to weld the size and thickness of pipe
concerned, and under site conditions, and shall present up to date certificates as
evidence prior to commencing any work on site.
4.2.5 The contractor shall provide documentary evidence that quality inspections
have been made at each stage of the installation process covering as a minimum:
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- trench inspection prior to installing pipes

- steel welding NDT using ultrasonics
- closure welding or shrinking
- closure air test prior to foaming
- continuity checks on surveillance system
- trench inspection prior to backfilling
- compaction around pipes and marker tape
- system pressure test (strength test)
- final surfacing and reinstatement.
4.2.6 There shall be a system of independent inspection to verify that the above
quality checks are being undertaken including written records of sample checks
carried out.
4.2.7 Each steel weld or polymer pipe joint shall be numbered and the individual
welder or jointer responsible shall be identified on a register. The same process shall
be followed for joint closures.
4.2.8 Pre-insulated materials shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions, site foaming materials shall be kept in insulated containers.
4.2.9 NDT of steel welds shall be carried out in accordance with EN 13941 for the
appropriate Class. Ultrasonic testing is normally used. In addition, the first 10 welds of
each welder shall be subject to NDT. NDT testing of all welds shall be required where
the pipe is relatively inaccessible or where major disruption would occur if a repair is
needed e.g. major road/rail crossings.
4.2.10 Welding shall only be carried out under suitable conditions with the welding
area covered during inclement weather.
4.2.11 Welding equipment for PE casings or polymer pipe shall be checked regularly
and calibration certificates made available.
4.2.12 The insulation on above ground pipework shall be specifically checked and an
inspection report issued prior to cladding or covering up by building finishes to confirm
compliance with the specification for thickness and type of insulation, continuation of
insulation at joints, supports, flanges, valves and all other fittings.
4.2.13 Trenches shall be kept dry and free of debris as much as possible at all times.
4.2.14 After installation, each section of the network shall be flushed to remove debris
using specialist flushing equipment in accordance with BG29: Pre-commission
cleaning of pipework systems (BSRIA, 2012). Alternatively, and especially for larger
diameters (e.g.>150mm), pigging using conventional or ice methods may be used. In
addition, the system water may be circulated at high velocity and passed through a
filter to remove suspended solids.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 132 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

4.2.15 The installation contractor shall provide an ‘as installed’ layout drawing of the
network indicating all joint positions with GPS co-ordinates, and any route deviations
from the original approved design. This drawing shall be included in the maintenance
manual for the scheme.
4.2.16 For steel pipes there shall be a detailed wiring diagram for the surveillance
system, and this shall be certified as correct upon commissioning and included in the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

maintenance manual for the scheme. The system shall be ‘mapped’ both following
installation and prior to charging the network. This shall be held as part of the ‘as
installed drawings’ to provide datum references and facilitate the location of leaks.
Future and periodic mapping shall be carried out as part of the maintenance regime
and compared to the datum mapping. The systems shall be tested and calibrated to
achieve an accuracy in location detection of ±1m.
4.2.17 As soon as possible after cleaning, flushing or pigging, the system shall be
filled with softened and de-aerated water, where feasible, and suitable chemical
treatment added. The system water shall then be circulated regularly until conditions
stabilise within the agreed water treatment parameters (see Appendix X).
4.2.18 Water treatment chemicals shall be selected to minimise risk to the
environment in the event of a leak.
4.2.19 Where the heat network is not required to be in operation for some time, then it
shall be dried if necessary, and filled with nitrogen rather than water in order to
preserve the integrity of the pipework.
4.2.20 Where a new network is to be connected to an existing network the water
treatment regime for the existing system shall be reviewed to ensure compatibility with
the proposals for the new system.
Best practice
BP4.2a Chemical cleaning of the pipe system could be used, however care needs to
be taken to ensure all chemicals are flushed out before refilling and safely discharged.
This process can be difficult to control in an installation where customer connections
are being progressively completed. In any case, the pipe manufacturer should be
consulted.
BP4.2b Best practice would include maintaining a photographic record of each section
of the network taken just prior to backfilling the trench.
Objective 4.2 – Key outputs
Output 4.2a – Construction quality log
Output 4.2b – Installation inspection verification log
Output 4.2c – Flushing, leakage testing & water quality report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 133 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 4.3 – To provide a high quality heat interface

unit (HIU) and building connection construction to provide
good customer service levels
Why is this objective important?
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

The Heat Interface Unit (HIU) is a key component of a heat network system as it
provides user control, ensures hydraulic balance within the heat network and may also
include a domestic hot water heat exchanger. It should also be designed to have low
maintenance requirements and perform reliably over a long period of time. The
required customer service levels of the heat supply will only be achieved from a high
quality HIU and building connections to non-domestic buildings.
Minimum requirements
4.3.1 MOVED TO 3.4
4.3.2 The heat meter installation shall be installed in accordance with EN 1434 and
strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, taking care that the flow meter
is installed in the correct orientation, with sufficient straight length upstream and
downstream, in the correct pipe (flow or return) and that the temperature sensors are
installed in the correct way. Communication systems for meters shall be installed in
accordance with BS EN 13757.
4.3.3a Fittings connecting the HIU to the network shall be selected and installed to
operate under current and future network pressures and temperatures with an
appropriate level of quality assurance.
4.3.3b Unless provided as part of the HIU, flushing bypasses shall be installed at the
heat network connections to each HIU to protect sensitive equipment from the flushing
process. It is preferable to use temporary flushing bypasses to allow them to be
disconnected after use, avoiding the possibility of the bypass being left open.
Alternatively, any flushing bypasses should be tamper-proof and lockable. It is
essential that all flushing bypasses shall be left closed and locked-off, or removed,
after flushing is complete.
4.3.4 The controls systems for building connections shall be fully checked prior to
commissioning including a point to point check that sensors are correctly addressed
and that all sensors are working correctly.
4.3.5 Where dwelling HIUs are required, and are of a type and duty that can be tested
to the BESA UK Test Regime Technical Specification (current version), the HIU
installed shall be one tested and registered with BESA, or tested using an equivalent
accredited independent HIU testing and registration scheme.
4.3.6 The contractor shall review and update the commissioning plan/programme and
acceptance testing plan to ensure it is in line with the as-installed scheme. See also
requirement 3.4.15a.
Best practice
Best practice could be the testing of the HIU performance against established
standards such as the Swedish Standard F:103-7e: Certification of District Heating
Substations (Svensk Fjärrwärme, 2009).

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 134 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 4.3 – Key outputs

Output 4.3a – HIU & controls installation report
Output 4.3b – Metering installation report
Output 4.3c – Updated commissioning plan/programme
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

project evidence pack.

Objective 4.4 – To reduce adverse environmental

impacts of construction
Why is this objective important?
Although the ultimate aim of a heat network project is to provide an environmental
benefit there will be negative environmental impacts during construction which need to
be identified and minimised as far as possible.
Minimum requirements
4.4.1 The contractor shall commit to following the requirements of the Considerate
Constructor scheme.
4.4.2 The contractor shall manage the site to recycle waste and minimise the risk of
waste being blown off site into surrounding areas by collecting and storing waste as
soon as it is created.
4.4.2a The Contractor shall minimise the amount of waste generated from
excavations, backfilling, surface reinstatement and pipe installation. This may include
the reuse of excavated material for backfill where possible.
4.4.2b The contractor shall manage the site to recycle waste where possible and
provide appropriate facilities to enable recycling of materials.
4.4.2c The Contractor shall minimise the risk of waste being blown off site into
surrounding areas by collecting and storing waste as soon as it is created.
4.4.3 Dust shall be controlled by using sprays on road surfaces which shall be
cleaned regularly.
4.4.4 Fuel use for site vehicles and machinery shall be monitored and minimised –
engines shall be turned off when not in use for long periods.
4.4.5 Water use shall be minimised, and waste water shall be sent to road drains
only where unavoidable, run-off into local waterways shall be prevented.
4.4.6 Spoil heaps shall be covered to avoid rain run-off carrying sediment which may
block drains.
4.4.7 Noise and other disturbance to residents shall be minimised and agreed site
operating hours adhered to at all times.
4.4.8 Trees and other landscaping shall be protected from damage with qualified
arborists or landscape architects consulted as necessary.
Best practice

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 135 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BP4.4a Best practice would include the provision of large and easily readable posters
fixed to the site hoardings explaining the nature of the works and the wider district
energy scheme and carbon benefits.
BP4.4b Best practice could also include the use of the Civil Engineering
Environmental Quality System (CEEQUAL) with a target to achieve Very Good or
Excellent.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

BP4.4c Best practice would be to engage an environmental consultant to carry out a

site audit during construction.
What is CEEQUAL?
CEEQUAL is the international evidence-based sustainability assessment, rating and
awards scheme for civil engineering, infrastructure, landscaping and works in public
spaces, and celebrates the achievement of high environmental and social
performance.
CEEQUAL aims to assist Clients, designers and contractors to deliver improved
project specification, design and construction of civil engineering works. The scheme
rewards project and contract teams who go beyond the legal, environmental and
social minima to achieve distinctive environmental and social performance in their
work. In addition to its use as a rating system to assess performance, it also provides
significant influence on project or contract teams as they develop, design and
construct their work, because it encourages them to consider the issues in the
question set at the most appropriate time, and to strive to secure the CEEQUAL score
their work deserves.
See www.ceequal.co.uk
Objective 4.4 – Key outputs
Output 4.4a – Waste management & recycling log
Output 4.4b – Local environmental impact log
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 136 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

5. Commissioning
Objectives:
5.1a To appoint a suitably qualified commissioning team with a clear
commissioning plan
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

5.1b To achieve consistently low return temperatures through commissioning

building heating systems/controls
5.2 To provide HIU commissioning and heat network balancing to ensure
demands are met at all times
5.3 To commission the heat metering and meter reading system to deliver
accuracy and customer service
5.4 To commission the central plant to deliver an efficient and reliable service
5.5 To provide a smooth handover and sufficient information for the
operations team
5.6 To carry out on-site acceptance tests to deliver an efficient and reliable
service

Objective 5.1a - To appoint a suitably qualified

commissioning team with a clear commissioning plan
Why is this objective important?
Commissioning plays a key part in building heat networks that operate correctly and
perform to the Client’s original requirements. This stage in the process also plays a
very big part in achieving high levels of customer satisfaction. It is essential that a
suitably qualified commissioning team carries out the work and this should be to a
clear plan that covers the whole integrated heat network, not just individual
components. Unfortunately, commissioning is sometimes rushed due to pressures of
handover and carried out in an ad-hoc manner by untrained staff. In particular,
commissioning teams should take an overall system approach in order to achieve
good overall operational performance and customer satisfaction.
Minimum requirements
5.1a.1 The Client and/or Contractor shall appoint a suitably qualified commissioning
team with resources appropriate to the size of the heat network scheme. The team
shall be led by a responsible person (The Commissioning Team Leader) to co-
ordinate the overall commissioning process. This team could be external to the main
contractor and reporting directly to the Client, or a team internal to the contractor with
Client agreement.
5.1a.2 The commissioning team shall agree the overall commissioning
plan/programme drafted by the heat network designer and contractor. The plan must
cover all aspects of the heat network scheme:
- heat [and power, if applicable] generation (energy centre)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 137 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- heat distribution (the heat network and interfaces to the buildings)

- building internal heat distribution (the heat network within the buildings)
- heat supply (the HIUs, space heating and hot water systems in dwellings)
- system controls, metering and monitoring (including AMR).
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

5.1a.3 The commissioning team shall undergo bespoke training on the particular heat
network involved to ensure a full understanding of the whole system before
commissioning begins. The Commissioning Team Leader should lead this training
with expert input as necessary and this should include input/briefing from the scheme
designer.
5.1a.4 The Client and Heat Network Operator shall identify a responsible person to
witness the commissioning being carried out.
5.1a.5 The commissioning stage shall include acceptance testing, as set out in
objective 5.6, to ensure that customers receive the service levels promised in
contracts.
Objective 5.1a – Key outputs
Output 5.1a.a – Suitably qualified commissioning team specification/brief &
appointment
Output 5.1a.b – A clear commissioning and acceptance testing plan
Output 5.1a.c – Client commissioning witness specification/brief & appointment

Objective 5.1b – To achieve consistently low return

temperatures through commissioning building heating
systems/controls
Why is this objective important?
One of the most critical aspects of the design and operation of a heat network is the
return temperature. The flow temperature is often set by limits on the central plant and
other equipment. For a given flow temperature, it is the return temperature that
governs the capacity of the network, the capacity of a thermal store, the efficiency of
heat production at the central plant, the pumping energy and the network heat losses.
However, the heat network operator has little control over the return temperature as
this is mainly a function of the building’s heating system and its controls. Maintaining a
low return temperature through the life of the network will be important but the initial
commissioning is particularly important in establishing this as it will be harder to
change settings once the system is in operation.
This is in part a cultural change. Operatives involved in commissioning heating
systems using gas-fired boilers within the building are often more concerned in
achieving high flow rates and ensuring radiators deliver their output. As a result, there
is a tendency to set flows, and hence return temperatures, higher than the design
value. With heat networks, an alternative approach needs to become the norm, where
flow rates are balanced to no more than the design value and achieving the correct
return temperatures are the main commissioning objectives. In other words, the

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 138 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

heating system is used to extract as much heat as possible from the water supplied by
the heat network, before returning it.
Traditionally, commissioning focuses on delivering peak design capacity. For heat
networks, commissioning needs to ensure the system is efficient at typically low
operating loads.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Minimum requirements
5.1b.1 Written commissioning procedures shall be produced for each type of heating
circuit, building on the commissioning plan/programme established during the design
stage and based on CIBSE Commissioning Code M (CIBSE, 2003). This shall include
co-ordination of commissioning of primary, secondary and tertiary systems as these
may be the responsibility of different parties. Other relevant CIBSE and BSRIA
Commissioning Codes should also be followed.
5.1b.2 All operatives involved in commissioning shall receive training in the importance
of achieving the design return temperatures and the impact on the overall heat
network if return temperatures are too high.
5.1b.3 A commissioning record sheet, as a minimum following the example procedure
in Appendix B, shall be used to enter the return temperatures from the space heating
circuits after the system has been running in constant operation at full load for over 30
minutes, together with achieving the room temperature.
5.1b.4a 100% of the secondary and tertiary heating circuits within the building/block
shall be commissioned to ensure the design return temperatures have been achieved
and further tests and rectification work shall be undertaken as necessary. An overall
summary of secondary and tertiary (dwelling) commissioning results shall be produced
and included in the evidence pack, including any measures taken to mitigate problems
and faults.
5.1b.4b Where AMR is available then this shall be used to verify correct
commissioning.
5.1b.5 For a dwelling heating system, the radiators shall be fitted with pre-settable
thermostatic radiator valves designed for use with low flow rates and adjusted to give
the required return temperature and the design flow rate for the radiator concerned.
Measured return temperatures shall be recorded as per the checklist in Appendix B.
Note: for new-build schemes this is typically the responsibility of the developer.
5.1b.6 The total flow to the radiator circuit shall be adjusted to the design conditions
using the controls at the HIU. This may be a variable speed pump for indirect
connection systems, or a balancing valve or an adjustable differential pressure control
valve for direct connection systems. Note: for new-build schemes this is typically the
responsibility of the developer.
5.1b.7 Commissioning procedures shall ensure the system is set up to operate as per
the design at low/zero heat demands.
5.1b.8 As new phases of a wider heat network are brought on stream, the control,
temporary commissioning, and dP sensor location for the main system pumps shall be
regularly assessed and adjusted accordingly.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 139 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Best practice
BP5.1b.a Best practice would be to commission systems using monitored data from
the average flow and return temperatures, delta T across any circuit, flow volume and
energy through the use of the heat meters and AMR.
Objective 5.1b – Key outputs
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Output 5.1b.a – Commissioning procedures

Output 5.1b.b – Dwelling commissioning record sheets
Output 5.1b.c – Summary of dwelling commissioning results
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 5.2 – To provide HIU/substation commissioning

and heat network balancing to ensure demands are met
at all times
Why is this objective important?
A fundamental requirement for the heat network is to deliver the required amount of
heat to each customer, critically at the times of peak demand.
This is achieved by ensuring that each customer cannot take more than the design
flow rate that has been set in the supply contract (typically defined as a kW supply
rate at defined flow and return temperatures).
In addition, for residential properties, a Heat Interface Unit (HIU) is often used to
provide a central control and metering point at each dwelling. This unit requires
checking and commissioning.

Figure 19 - Method for establishing the average temperature difference from two heat meter readings

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 140 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Minimum requirements
5.2.1 100% of the HIUs and substations shall be commissioned in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations and the results documented. Appendix B
provides a checklist for Commissioning (or acceptance testing) HIUs. This work shall
also follow CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

5.2.2 Commissioning operatives shall receive training in the importance of

commissioning the system to achieve the correct return temperatures before
commencing work.
5.2.3 At each point of primary heat supply to the building/block the maximum flow
rate that the building/block can receive shall be adjusted to the design value, e.g. by
using an adjustable differential pressure control valve and, if necessary, regulating
valves or a pressure independent control valve. See BSRIA Guide AG16/2002.
5.2.4 The flow rate shall be measured using the flow rate function of the heat meter.
5.2.5 All measured data and set points on valves etc. shall be recorded on the
commissioning record sheet and included in the O&M manuals and a copy provided to
the customer.
5.2.6 Any flushing bypasses/loops shall be closed off before commissioning starts.
5.2.7 Where bypass valves are installed the flow rate shall be set up under minimum
system flow conditions.
Best practice
BP5.2a To provide an additional check on the maximum flow rate setting for non-
domestic customers, an independent flow measuring device such as a calibrated
orifice plate should also be included.
Objective 5.2 – Key outputs
Output 5.2a – HIU and substation commissioning record sheets
Output 5.2b – HIU and substation flowrate measurement/balancing records
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 5.3 – To commission the energy metering and

meter reading system to deliver accuracy and customer
service
Why is this objective important?
The heat metering system is fundamental to the operation of the scheme, enabling
revenues to be collected and to provide feedback to customers on their energy use.
Minimum requirements
5.3.1a There shall be an initial check prior to commissioning that the heat meter
installation has been carried out in accordance with EN 1434, manufacturer’s
instructions and the MID, particularly in relation to meter location, orientation and

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 141 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

sensor installation as appropriate for the specific meter. This should not be necessary
on heat meters pre-assembled within HIUs.
5.3.1b Any central/common elements of the AMR system, such as central datalogger
and broadband connections, shall be fully working prior to the commissioning of
individual customer meters, such that the AMR system operation can be confirmed at
the time of customer commissioning and AMR data is available for commissioning
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

purposes. This work shall be carried out in accordance with BS EN 13757.

5.3.2 Where a pre-payment system is installed there shall be a number of ways that
credit can be purchased by residents including by telephone, via website or mobile
phone and, if in person, from sufficient local outlets. These systems need to be tested
and commissioned by the contractor and/or operator prior to the heat network going
live.
5.3.3 The correct reporting of kWh from each meter through the Automatic Meter
Reading (AMR) system shall be demonstrated, confirmed by manual meter readings,
and these readings must be repeatable.
5.3.4 The meter shall be monitored for a short period on-load to establish that flow
rate and temperatures are being recorded and that the data received by the AMR is
credible.
5.3.5 A hand calculation check, based on manual meter readings, shall be carried
out to prove that the conversion to kWh from the flow rate and temperature
measurements is correct.
5.3.6 A reconciliation calculation shall be carried out between the central plant
meters, main building meters and dwelling meters from which system losses can be
estimated.
5.3.7 A meter schedule/register shall be prepared and maintained detailing:
- the meter serial number
- the postal address or plot number of the property
- the exact location of the meter within a building/dwelling
- the communications address for the AMR
- the date commissioned
- the initial reading
- the date of last calibration.
5.3.8a The installed meters shall be confirmed as per the overall metering strategy
diagram developed at design stage, in accordance with CIBSE TM39: Building energy
metering (CIBSE, 2009). Initial checks shall be carried out to ensure correct
installation and operation of the meters shown in this strategy. The metering strategy
and meter schedule/register shall be updated with the serial numbers and location of
the installed meters. Meter point labels shall be installed at each meter point (not on
the meter which may be exchanged in the future).
5.3.8b Commissioning checks shall be carried out on 100% of meters to ensure that
each meter is operational (recording heat meter movement) and that readings are
reasonable in relation to expected consumption. Readings should also be visible on
any central AMR system, where installed.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 142 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

5.3.9 An information pack shall be provided to the customer showing the function and
operation of the heating system, its controls, heat meter and the pre-payment system
if used. It shall also comply with the requirements of the Heat Trust scheme, where
applicable. The information pack shall be written to be visually attractive and easy to
understand and not just a collection of manufacturer’s leaflets. It shall contain a list of
FAQs and suitable answers.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Best practice
BP5.3a Best practice would be a follow up visit to the property to ensure that the
customer understands how to operate the heating system and the metering and billing
or pre-payment process. Information packs could be translated into other languages.
BP5.3b Best practice would involve recording and storage of data for an extended
period. Outputs from the AMR could be displayed online, including the average
percentage heat loss from the network. This could also include information on the
central plant inputs, outputs and efficiency.
Objective 5.3 – Key outputs
Output 5.3a – Heat metering commissioning record sheets
Output 5.3b – TM39 metering register/schedule and metering strategy
Output 5.3c – Copy of customer information pack
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 5.4 – To commission the central plant to deliver

an efficient and reliable service
Why is this objective important?
Well designed and installed central plant can still fail to deliver an efficient and reliable
service if it has not been properly commissioned and tested. Without adequate testing,
faults will only emerge during the early years of operation – which are typically then
more expensive and disruptive to resolve.
Minimum requirements
5.4.1a The design specification will typically include a Description of Operation
(DesOps) with a functional controls specification and this should be a key component
in commissioning the energy centre. These documents shall be reviewed, and as a
result commissioning and testing procedure established to demonstrate compliance
with these documents. This shall involve some proving and testing at various times
during the first year of operation when suitable system loads are available.
Alternatively, the load may be artificially induced by changing set points or using load
banks.
5.4.1b Each item of plant shall be commissioned in the energy centre, but also the
integrated operation of the entire plant to deliver the required levels of service at the
expected levels of operation and efficiency.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 143 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

5.4.2 There shall be a specific demonstration to show that the low carbon heat
source is controlled to operate as the lead unit and to maintain its output as secondary
heat sources are brought online.
5.4.3 Each sensor point connected to the Building Energy Management System
(BEMS) or Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system shall be
checked to prove that it is correctly addressed and providing a consistent and correct
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

signal.
5.4.4 The stable and efficient operation of the plant shall be demonstrated at all
expected load conditions and especially at minimum load conditions.
5.4.5 The energy centre shall be commissioned following the recommendations in
CIBSE Commissioning Code M (CIBSE, 2003) and an energy balance carried out to
ensure metering is working correctly. This work shall also follow other CIBSE
Commissioning Codes including; B: Boilers, C: Automatic Controls, R: Refrigeration
and W: Water Distribution Systems.
5.4.6 A specific check shall be carried out at times of minimum demand (summer
nights) to confirm that bypass flows have been correctly set up and controlled.
5.4.7 The operation of the variable speed pump system shall be checked to verify
that the required pressure differences are achieved at all points of the network and
that excessive pressure differences are not found at periods of low flow.
5.4.8 On completion of the commissioning a written handover process shall be
followed to enable the operating organisation to take full control.
5.4.9 The construction team and the designer shall be contractually appointed in a
supporting role for a minimum of 12 months following handover to carry out seasonal
checks and to fine tune the control system.
Best practice
BP5.4a Best practice would be to appoint the project team to deliver the Soft Landings
approach as defined in BSRIA Soft Landings specification, which covers a three year
period after initial commissioning.
BP5.4b Best Practice would require the BEMS software to be fully dynamically tested
offsite prior to uploading on site, in order to highlight any shortfall in the controls
package.
Objective 5.4 – Key outputs
Output 5.4a – Commissioning and testing procedures
Output 5.4b – Energy Centre Commissioning records
Output 5.4c – Full Energy Centre energy balance
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 144 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 5.5 – To provide a smooth handover and

sufficient information for the operations team
Why is this objective important?
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

In order to encourage good energy efficient operation, it is essential to ensure correct

handover procedures are followed. A key part of this is to provide the operations team
with all the necessary information about the heat network including operation and
maintenance (O&M) manuals, log books and metering strategies.
Minimum requirements
5.5.1 The handover procedures shall follow the recommendations in CIBSE
Commissioning Code M (CIBSE, 2003) and BSRIA BG1: Handover, O&M Manuals,
and Project Feedback (BSRIA, 2007).
5.5.2 A full O&M manual shall be provided for the heat network including control
strategies and commissioning records. This shall also include: records of material
specifications for the network, as installed drawings, stress analysis report, TDR
mapping of surveillance system, copies of pressure tests and non-destructive tests.
5.5.3 Appropriate customer instructions shall be developed and distributed to
customers at handover, supplemented by customer training if necessary.
5.5.4 Where appropriate, CIBSE TM31 log books shall be put in place for each main
building and central heat interface unit.
5.5.5 Metering strategies shall be provided for the whole heat network, main
buildings and the energy centre plantrooms. Evidence that the metering strategy has
been implemented shall be provided in the form of meter point schedules with
populated meter serial numbers, and in the case of AMR, remotely obtained readings
to prove successful data capture. AMR shall be set up and commissioned in such a
way as to make transparent the performance of the heat network. On-site meter points
shall be clearly labelled with references that match the AMR.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 145 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 20 - Inside the King’s Cross energy centre

Objective 5.5 – Key outputs

Output 5.5a – Handover documentation, O&M manuals & control strategies
Output 5.5b – Energy Centre & building TM31 log books & metering strategies
Output 5.5c – Copy of customer instructions
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 5.6 – To carry out on-site acceptance tests to

deliver an efficient and reliable service
Why is this objective important?
Even plant that has been formally commissioned can still fail to deliver an efficient and
reliable service to the heat customer. Unfortunately, formal commissioning is
commonly focussed on just testing that equipment “actually works” when turned on,
and this is often a single item of equipment in isolation, without reflecting overall
network performance.
Traditionally, heat network commissioning has typically focused on main plant (e.g.
boilers, pumps, etc) and the end user often becomes an afterthought in the process.
The standard approach to commissioning also tends to focus on peak operation and
not on the efficient operation at more the common part-load operating conditions. It is
also common that commissioning only requires witnessing of a limited number of end
customer points, which can lead to issues being missed. In heat networks, the

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 146 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

commissioning of the end user's equipment (e.g. HIUs, space heating circuits, etc)
has significant implications on the overall ongoing performance of the heat network.
A series of on-site ‘acceptance’ tests should be carried out to ensure that the system
meets the required performance standards and that the customer receives the
promised service. If commissioning was done properly then this might not be
necessary, but that’s not what happens in practice. Without adequate acceptance
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

testing, faults will only emerge during the early years of operation – which are then
typically more expensive and disruptive to resolve.
Minimum requirements
5.6.1 An appropriately qualified heat network specialist shall be appointed to carry
out the following on-site acceptance tests:
- Energy centre heat efficiency (%)
- Average CO2 content of heat produced at the energy centre over an agreed
period (kgCO2/kWh)
- Heat network loss per dwelling or thermal substation (kWh/dwelling or substation)
- Average return temperature at energy centre boundary (°C)
- Average flow temperature at energy centre boundary (°C)
- District heat network loss per linear metre
- Average return temperature from each building/block and a selection of the HIUs
while Domestic Hot Water is being drawn-off (°C)
- 7 day ‘reliability run’ to show that the plant runs with acceptable reliability
A full acceptance test procedure shall be agreed between the Client and the
Contractor well in advance of the test dates. Dates for submission of the test
procedure shall be agreed in the contract. This procedure shall fully detail all the tests
to be carried out, the conditions for the tests, agreed tolerances to be applied to
results, any agreed liquidated damages or other terms/conditions to be followed in the
event of non-performance.
All of the above tests (except standby) should be measured over a reasonably typical
period of at least seven days. These shall be compared to targets provided by the
designer indicating expected values for any given outside air temperature. Standby
return temperature shall be measured over a night time period. It is also important not
just to commission each item of plant in the energy centre but also the integrated
operation of the entire heat network to deliver the required levels of service at the
expected levels of operation and efficiency.
5.6.2 Where practical, acceptance testing should begin at the energy centre and then
move progressively closer to the heat consumer. If the network return temperatures at
the energy centre are at or below the design levels, then the Client and heat network
specialist may decide to reduce the amount of testing at a block and/or dwelling level.
Conversely, where the energy centre shows poor performance then increased testing
should be undertaken at a block and dwelling level.
5.6.3 On completion of the acceptance tests a written ‘acceptance test summary
report’ shall be produced by the heat network specialist and included in the evidence

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 147 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

pack in order to summarise the acceptance testing and any problem/fault mitigation
measures taken.
5.6.4 Where tests have failed, a failure log shall be produced showing mitigation
carried out and re-test results until full acceptance has been achieved, or liquidated
damages or other agreed terms and conditions applied, if performance guarantees
cannot be met.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

5.6.5 In residential dwellings, an initial set of tests shall be carried out on a small
number of dwellings to establish common problems that can be fixed before testing
the remainder of the estate. This can prevent extensive re-testing on large numbers of
dwellings.
5.6.6 Following commissioning on 100% of the HIUs and secondary/tertiary heating
circuits within the building, independently inspected acceptance tests shall also be
carried out on a sample (or all) of the circuits to establish whether the service levels
and design return temperatures have been achieved. Where systems fail to deliver the
specified service then remedial work, recertification and further tests shall be
undertaken as necessary. Independent acceptance testing shall be carried out on the
first 10% installed, then, if they pass, a randomised 10% sample of the remainder. If
any of the first 10% tests fail to meet the requirements then acceptance testing should
continue on the next 10%, and so on. This graduated risk-based approach will help to
avoid installation and commissioning problems being rolled out on 100% of the
dwellings. It should be noted that Best Practice is to carry out independent acceptance
testing on 100% of dwellings, see BP5.6a.
5.6.7 The operation/control of the main system pumps shall be assessed and adjusted
to ensure this meets the design stage DesOps, in particular the location of the dP any
control sensor(s). This is especially important when new build-out phases of a heat
network are brought on-stream.
Best practice
BP5.6a Best Practice would be independent acceptance testing of 100% dwellings to
ensure that service levels and design return temperatures have been achieved in all
properties.
BP5.6b Best practice would be to appoint the project team to deliver the Soft Landings
approach as defined in BSRIA Soft Landings specification, which covers a three year
period after initial commissioning.
BP5.6c A further period of time (around 2 weeks) should be allocated to an in-use
“proving period” during which meter readings should be taken more frequently i.e.
hourly, to ensure the heat network is operating correctly and meets performance
targets. Further proving periods should be regularly performed, and comparisons
made to identify any performance gaps.
Objective 5.6 – Key outputs
Output 5.6a – Acceptance testing record sheets
Output 5.6b – Non-acceptance log showing mitigation carried out and re-test results
Output 5.6c - Acceptance test summary report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 148 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

6. Operation and maintenance

Objectives:
6.1 To reduce health and safety risks to staff, customers and the general
public
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

6.2 To achieve cost-effective, accurate and reliable heat metering, pre-

payment and billing systems
6.3 To maintain a high level of reliability and a long life for the heat network
6.4 To provide cost-effective maintenance of heat network assets resulting in
efficient operation and long life
6.5 To provide appropriate monitoring and reporting of the whole heat
network
6.6 To maintain the building connections to provide good customer service
6.7 To minimise environmental impacts of operation and maintenance

Objective 6.1 – To reduce health and safety risks to staff,

customers and the general public
Why is this objective important?
In operation, the health and safety of staff, customers and the general public are of
paramount importance. Whilst legislation exists to enforce many risk mitigation
measures, heat networks have some specific operating risks which are emphasised
below.
Minimum requirements
6.1.1 There shall be a Disaster Recovery Plan (DRP) detailing the chain of command
and communications required in the event of a major incident and all staff shall be
trained in these procedures.
6.1.2 The COSSH and DSEAR Regulations may apply and shall be followed.
6.1.3 The heat network operator shall be certified under ISO 18001, the Occupational
Health and Safety standard.
6.1.4 The energy centre and plantrooms containing heat exchangers, pumps and
other equipment shall be kept locked and access controlled appropriately even where
they are on customer’s premises.
6.1.5 Isolating valves within dwellings for use by residential customers shall be
installed and labelled as ‘emergency shut-off’ with advice given to customers on
emergency procedures in the event of a leak within the dwelling.
6.1.6 A fire risk assessment shall be carried out and fire alarm and detection systems
and any fire suppression systems shall be checked regularly in accordance with
regulations.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 149 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

6.1.7 Where centralised domestic hot water systems are used these shall be
checked regularly and records kept of any water treatment carried out. The control of
Legionella risk is an important consideration and the HSE ACOP L8 (HSE, 2013) and
HSG 274 (Part 2, 2014) need to be followed. Further guidance can be found in CIBSE
TM13 (2013). The requirements of BS EN 8558 (2015) and BS EN 806 (2012) shall
be followed.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

6.1.8 Space temperatures within compact plantrooms may be higher than normal
which may impact on the safety of operatives and working regimes shall be planned
accordingly.
6.1.9 Surface temperatures on equipment and pipework may be higher than normally
found in heating systems especially in plantrooms in buildings connected to a heat
network and suitable warning notices, guards and training shall be provided and
maintained.
6.1.10 When insulation needs to be removed for maintenance or repair purposes it
shall be refitted as soon as practically possible and when it must be left off for an
extended period then suitable barriers and notices shall be put in place.
Objective 6.1 – Key outputs
Output 6.1a – Disaster recovery plan
Output 6.1b – Operating risk register
Output 6.1c – Health & Safety procedures
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 6.2 – To achieve cost-effective, accurate and

reliable heat metering, pre-payment and billing systems
Why is this objective important?
The revenue for a scheme is dependent on the heat metering system employed and
significant management costs and cashflow costs can be expended if customers lack
confidence in the system, query bills or have difficulty understanding the charges.
Minimum requirements
6.2.1a Metering & billing contractual terms shall be developed to set out operator
responsibilities and the customer relationship.
6.2.1b For residential customers, the heat meter shall be inspected at regular intervals
including a check to detect tampering, in accordance with the Heat Trust scheme.
6.2.2 The heat meter shall be exchanged and recalibrated at suitable intervals, which
are determined from evidence gained from removing a small sample of meters and
testing these for accuracy. A meter maintenance and calibration plan shall be
developed.
6.2.3 If battery operated, the batteries shall be replaced at the appropriate time and to
provide a suitable margin before failure.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 150 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

6.2.4 On a change of residency the new occupant shall be provided with a new set of
operating instructions for the system and the meters checked and read either on site
or using the AMR within a defined period and in accordance with the Heat Trust
scheme.
6.2.5 Bills shall be prepared in accordance with the Heat Metering and Billing
Regulations (2014) and the Heat Trust scheme.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

6.2.6 The customer’s heat consumption shall be monitored, and where significant
divergence from typical trends are seen, investigations shall be undertaken to ensure
the heat meter, AMR system, HIU and heat network are operating correctly.
6.2.7 Where a prepayment system is used, the adjustment of the meters to reflect any
price changes shall be carried out within one week month.
6.2.8 A report summarising the annual analysis and review of meter data shall be
prepared.
Best practice
BP6.2a Best practice would be for residential schemes a distribution curve for all heat
meters on a monthly basis should be prepared for each dwelling size (e.g. number of
bedrooms) and the meters with abnormal readings can then be identified and passed
to the meter maintenance engineer, for further investigation.
BP6.2b Best practice for larger non-residential customers would be to inspect the heat
meter at least annually and to continuously monitor the readings to identify abnormal
readings that could indicate a fault.
Objective 6.2 – Key outputs
Output 6.2a – Metering & billing contractual terms
Output 6.2b – Meter maintenance & calibration plan
Output 6.2c – Annual analysis and review of meter data report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 6.3 – To maintain a high level of reliability and

a long life for the heat network
Why is this objective important?
A heat network is a high cost capital asset and the investment has to be justified over
a long operating period. It is essential that investors have confidence that the asset
can be maintained in operation without undue maintenance costs. If there is a leak in
the system repairs are costly because of the need to excavate and reinstate the
ground which may be a major road. If the leak is difficult to find then the repair costs
can be even higher. In addition, a high standard of reliability is required to deliver a
satisfactory heating service to customers. The quality of materials, design and
construction of the heat network are important in determining the reliability of the
system but there are important aspects of operation that can enhance the life of the
system and maintain reliability.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 151 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Minimum requirements
6.3.1a Side-stream and in-line filters shall be monitored and inspected regularly to
ensure suspended solids are being removed as required.
6.3.1b A comprehensive water treatment regime shall be implemented for each
separate water system, including: sampling and monitoring, chemical dosing,
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

recording of results. Make-up water volumes shall be monitored on a weekly basis

using a dedicated water meter or continuously by the BEMS connection. The water
quality parameters to be monitored, the frequency of monitoring and the target and
acceptable tolerances to be achieved shall be defined for each parameter. An
example of water quality parameters that have been found to be satisfactory for heat
networks is given in Appendix X, although variations from these parameters is
permitted where justified.
6.3.2a Where stagnant conditions occur in parts of the network, temporary circulation
of the system water shall be established periodically in a controlled manner to limit
corrosion.
6.3.2b Chemical dosing shall be carried out in accordance with the recommendations
of the appointed specialist water treatment company who must have knowledge of
heat networks. The recommendations will vary with the metals and other materials
used in the system.
6.3.2c To avoid creating stagnant water conditions any equipment that is no longer in
use shall be disconnected from the system and fully drained including all associated
pipework.
6.3.3 The system shall also be monitored to detect leaks by weekly recording of
make-up water and for larger systems daily. Any anomalies shall be investigated in a
timely manner.
6.3.4 The surveillance system shall be maintained in operation with alarm signals
reported through the main control system. All alarms shall be investigated and the
location of the fault identified and repairs carried out as required.
6.3.5 To minimise the risk of third-party damage, record drawings of the network,
location of valve chambers and building entry points shall be maintained and provided
to the local highways authority and other utility service providers on request, in both
hard copy and digital format, and for new buildings, the architect, building services
engineer and Client as required.
6.3.6 Regular inspections of isolating valves and valve chambers shall be carried out
at appropriate intervals to ensure valves remain operable and corrosion is not
occurring.
6.3.7 In the event of a leak causing a shutdown of the system, the system disaster
recovery plan (DRP) shall be followed to provide temporary heating to customers or in
the case of a short term interruption to advise customers in advance of the timing and
reason for the interruption in accordance with the supply agreements and the Heat
Trust scheme.
6.3.8 Comprehensive records of water treatment, water test results and repairs on the
system shall be kept as these will be very valuable in assessing the life of the system
should the network be the subject of a future sale or transfer.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 152 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

6.3.9 Pressures and temperatures shall also be recorded to check the network has not
been regularly subjected to excess pressure or temperature. This is particularly
important for plastic pipe systems and to identify any cycling of the network.
6.3.10 Where there is a thermal substation in a building/block, then temperature and
pressure shall be continually measured to allow sufficient flow temperature stability
(e.g. percentage time 5°C lower than weather related contract set point) and sufficient
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

pump differential pressure (kPa) is ensured during operation on the secondary

network within the block.
Best practice
BP6.3a The use of a reverse osmosis plant to provide a very high standard of water
quality from the outset may be considered as best practice.
BP6.3b Test coupons could be used as best practice to monitor the corrosion in the
system.
Objective 6.3 – Key outputs
Output 6.3a – Water treatment plan & log
Output 6.3b – Leakage surveillance plan & log
Output 6.3c – Pressure & temperature log
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 6.4 – To provide cost-effective maintenance of

heat network assets resulting in efficient operation and
long life
Why is this objective important?
A high quality maintenance regime for the central plant will improve energy efficiency,
provide a more reliable service, maximise environmental benefits and prolong the life
of the plant. There are a number of established standards and industry guidance
available including specific guidance for each type of heat source that might be used.
The following generic requirements shall be followed.
Minimum requirements
6.4.1 The basis for the Planned Preventative Maintenance (PPM) regime shall be in
accordance with the PAS 55 standard following the ‘plan-do-check-act’ cycle of
continual improvement.
6.4.2 Maintenance on central plant and all heat network assets shall be according to
manufacturer’s instructions and BSRIA Guide BG3: Maintenance for Building Services
(BSRIA, 2008) and CIBSE Guide M: Maintenance engineering and management
(CIBSE, 2008a).
6.4.3 All staff shall have received appropriate training before operating or maintaining
any equipment.
6.4.4 The operations team shall undertake a process of continual improvement to
achieve optimum efficiency for the scheme at all times, based on effective monitoring

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 153 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

of all energy flows and optimisation of controls. This will include technology reviews to
consider investment which could be made on a financially viable basis to improve the
system efficiency. In particular, monitoring against performance targets set by the
Client/operator in order to maintain and improve efficiency.
6.4.5 A periodic inspection (at least annually) by senior management of the
organisation responsible for the operation of the scheme shall be undertaken to
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

demonstrate to the operators the importance that is attached to this phase of the
project.
6.4.6 Major plant maintenance shall always be scheduled to minimise any
interruptions in heat supply and wherever possible there shall be sufficient resilience
in the system to prevent supply interruptions.
6.4.7 Whilst in part a function of the return temperatures to the scheme, the
organisation responsible for operating and maintaining the energy centre and network
shall do this in a manner which wherever practically possible delivers not only a high
quality cost-effective service but one which involves supplying heat at the design
carbon intensity and they shall take ownership of these issues and work with the
building owner and operator to achieve the design return temperature.
6.4.8 The operators of the plant shall provide feedback to the designers as to how the
plant has operated in practice, with recommendations as to how future designs can be
improved.
6.4.9 When plant (e.g. boilers/pumps etc) need replacement, the operating data
collected (as per Objective 6.5) shall be used to assess the required replacement
plant size and performance. Replacing like with like will only be acceptable if the
operational data indicates that this is the correct size.
Best practice
BP6.4a Best practice would include the continuous monitoring of the whole system
performance to aid in optimising the operation. Monitoring each heat source
independently will also allow the system to be optimised and to identify any
inefficiencies within particular central plant.
BP6.4b Maintenance contracts should contain KPIs (as per Objective 6.5) that set
minimum plant and system efficiencies, network heat loss and LZC plant heat
contributions. These KPIs should be tracked and the maintenance contractor required
to meet the minimum standards and incentivised to go beyond the minimum
requirements.
BP3.4c The system operator shall identify and evaluate options to improve the system
reliability, lower the heat cost and reduce the environmental impacts. The system
owner shall consider undertaking these improvements when opportunities arise,
especially when plant needs modification and/or replacement.
Objective 6.4 – Key outputs
Output 6.4a – Maintenance plan & log
Output 6.4b – Operational staff training plan
Output 6.4c – Annual review of maintenance report
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 154 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 6.5 – To provide appropriate monitoring and

reporting of the whole heat network
Why is this objective important?
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

It is important to monitor the operation of the whole heat network including central
plant, pipework, substations HIUs etc. This should be provided in regular reports to
the Client so that a high standard of performance can be maintained. These reports
may be standardised and use key performance indicators based on the requirements
listed below. The details of the reporting requirements will typically form part of any
contract for the operation of the plant.
Minimum requirements
6.5.1a An operating report shall be produced, at an agreed interval (e.g. monthly,
quarterly, annually) to be issued to the owner, which typically shall contain some or all
of the following information:
- health and safety incidents
- a full energy balance for the scheme including:
o fuel/electricity input to the low carbon heat source(s)
o fuel for any top-up or standby boilers
o heat sent out from energy centre
o heat delivered to customers
o network heat losses (estimated from meter readings)
o heat produced by each heat source, compared to a planned level
o electricity generated from CHP and heat recovery rate
o electricity consumed for parasitic loads
o electricity supplied to private wire customers and/or exported to the grid
- calculated efficiency of each heat source, and the overall heat network, including
any top-up/standby boilers
- CO2 emissions from direct combustion of fuel to generate heat
- indirect CO2 emissions from electricity use and displaced CO2 emissions from
electricity generation
- net CO2 emissions
- a comparison with the efficiency and CO2 emissions of any relevant
counterfactual heat generation plant
- average summer/winter flow and return water temperatures at the energy centre
- water make-up volumes (on a weekly basis)
- water quality test results
- log of alarms from leakage detection systems and the BEMS
- availability of heat supply

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 155 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- unplanned downtime (customer minutes lost), plant failures and faults that
occurred
- planned downtime (customer minutes lost) and maintenance activities carried out
- forward look on maintenance work over the next quarter.
6.5.1b The actual measured in-use energy performance and resulting operating costs
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

shall be compared with forecasts on an annual basis. Initially this will be compared to
the performance metrics and cost forecasts developed in sections 3.12, then gradually
moving to a regular annual round of forecasting and measuring in order to validate an
ongoing financial model.
6.5.1c Where total measured primary network heat losses are greater than 20%, or
25% greater than predicted at design stage, then a detailed investigation shall be
carried out to determine why this is the case, and to identify remedial measures
necessary to reduce losses below that figure. The outcome shall be included in the
annual operational report.
6.5.1d Where average summer or winter return water temperatures at the energy
centre are greater than 60°C, or 5°C greater than predicted at design stage, then a
detailed investigation shall be carried out to determine why this is the case, and to
identify remedial measures necessary to reduce this below that figure. The outcome
shall be included in the annual operational report.
6.5.1e The minimum frequency of data collection and billing shall be quarterly for
residential and micro-businesses, and monthly for non-residential customers. Where
AMR systems are deployed, the minimum frequency for billing shall be monthly and
half-hourly readings should be gathered to allow the heat network to be analysed,
improved and performance targets met.
6.5.1f The operator shall provide feedback to customers on the heat used compared
to norms and advice on how to manage their consumption. For non-residential
customers, monitoring of heat demand profiles shall be carried out on a half-hour
basis to enable both parties to identify control modifications that would reduce peak
demands or change the timing of peak demands for the benefit of the heat network
and hence result in lower customer costs.
6.5.2 An annual report shall include the information in 6.5.1 and also information on:
- the strategic development of the scheme,
- e.g. customers added, new extensions planned
- an overview of the heat supply and the way the heat was generated over the year
- calculation of average CO2 emission factor for heat over the year
- information on other environmental impacts such as NOX emissions.
6.5.3 The annual report shall be made available electronically and issued to
customers as hard copy by request, subject to any confidentiality requirements.
6.5.4 The operation of main low carbon plant shall be continuously monitored to
identify issues that may be causing unnecessary down-time or loss, or a reduction in
the level of heat recovery. This may in turn lead to corrective action to reduce return
temperatures or adjustment to control set points.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 156 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

6.5.5 Where there is a thermal substation in a building/block, then temperature and

pressure shall be monitored to ensure flow temperature stability and pump differential
pressure stability to be achieved on the secondary network within the building/block.
6.5.6 Data about each of the buildings connected to the heat network, and any new or
additional connections, shall be kept up to date and shall be recorded in the evidence
pack. The CP1.2 Excel workbook provides a sheet titled CONNECTION CHECKLIST
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

to aid this process.

Best practice
BP6.5a (NOW IN 6.5.1b) More frequent reports, e.g. issued on a monthly basis, would
constitute best practice.
BP6.5b (MOVED TO 6.6.4) Best practice would include the continuous monitoring etc.
Objective 6.5 – Key outputs
Output 6.5a – Daily, Weekly, Monthly & annual operational reports
Output 6.5b – Annual performance targets including CO2 intensity report
Output 6.5c – Annual strategic development plan & report to customers
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 6.6 – To maintain the building connections to

provide good customer service
Why is this objective important?
The interface between the building heating systems and the heat network is critical in
delivering customer satisfaction. The maintenance of the building heating systems is
also important (not covered in the Code) particularly to ensure that over time the flows
to each heat emitter remain balanced so that the correct design return temperatures
are maintained.
Scheme operators should work with customers to lower return temperatures to reduce
heat losses, improve central plant efficiency and increase the capacity of the DH
network. DH operators should provide guidance to help building owners achieve this
and it may even be in the DH operator commercial interests to pay for improvements
within heat customer buildings.
Minimum requirements
6.6.1 Scheme operators shall offer a maintenance service in accordance with the
requirements of the Heat Trust scheme for domestic customers. This shall include
developing an HIU/ building connection maintenance plan and log.
6.6.2 The need for servicing of the HIUs in domestic properties shall be assessed to
minimise costs to residents whilst providing an acceptable level of service with respect
to reliability and performance.
6.6.3 Building connections for non-residential customers systems shall be inspected
to minimise costs whilst providing an acceptable level of service with respect to
reliability and performance and at a maximum interval of six months.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 157 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

6.6.4 Suitable strainers shall be provided to prevent debris in the heat network
damaging the building interface equipment. The strainers shall be inspected and
cleaned regularly at intervals based on experience. Where pressure gauges/sensors
are installed these shall be monitored to determine the need for strainer cleaning.
6.6.5 Regular checks shall be made on the pressure drop across heat exchangers to
identify level of fouling.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

6.6.6 Plantrooms shall be kept locked to prevent unauthorised access.

6.6.7 A clear signing showing demarcation between different
Clients/owners/developers shall be provided with lock offs to prevent tampering.
6.6.8 A process and instrument diagram and valve schedule shall be affixed to the
wall of the plantroom.
6.6.9 Contact details of who maintains plant and who to call in the event of an
emergency shall be affixed inside the plant area and on the wall externally.
6.6.10 Scheme operators shall work with customers to encourage reductions in return
temperatures to reduce heat losses, improve central plant efficiency and increase the
capacity of the DH network. DH operators shall provide guidance, support and even
funding to help building owners achieve this.
Objective 6.6 – Key outputs
Output 6.6a – HIU/ building connection maintenance plan & log
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 6.7 – To minimise environmental impacts of

operation and maintenance
Why is this objective important?
Although the overall aim of the heat network is to reduce environmental impact this is
often seen only in terms of reducing global CO2 emissions. It is also important to
operate the heat network and its central plant to minimise
impact on the local environment.
Minimum requirements
6.7.1 The operation of the scheme and the heat network operator shall be certified to
ISO 14001.
6.7.2 The CO2 content of heat delivered to customers shall be calculated regularly
and reported to customers and the carbon intensity of heat
supplied shall be delivered in accordance with the scheme design.
6.7.3 Emissions from all combustion plant shall be analysed on an annual basis. This
shall take account of the Medium Combustion Plant Directive (MCPD) introduced in
2018 to improve air quality.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 158 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

6.7.4 Combustion tests shall be carried out annually on boilers and CHP plant to
establish energy efficiency and any remedial works required as a result of these tests
shall be undertaken as soon as practically possible.
6.7.5 Noise measurements shall be taken at intervals of not more than 5 years to
ensure original design conditions are being maintained.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

6.7.6 Due to the nature of heat networks it is likely that from time to time due to
failures or maintenance works that water is lost from the system. It is essential that
any such discharges are dealt with rapidly as these volumes could be large even from
a small leak due to the nature of networks and suitable health, safety and
environmental procedures to deal with such eventualities shall be put in place.
6.7.7 In the event that there are regular failures of or discharges from the plant or
network a review shall be undertaken of these and a plan put in place to rectify these
issues to prevent recurrence.
Best practice
BP6.7a Best practice would be for the owner/operator to develop short and long term
plans as to how to lower the scheme environmental impacts e.g. through changes in
heat sources, lowering of temperatures etc. This work could be combined with BP6.4c
and so if, for example, the long term plan were to switch to heat pumps then nearer
term modifications could focus more on lowering temperatures, improving the heat
pump efficiency when fitted.
Objective 6.7 – Key outputs
Output 6.7a – Environmental operational plan & log
Output 6.7b – CO2 content of heat delivered to customers
Output 6.7c – Operational failures log
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 159 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

7. Customer satisfaction and

obligations
Objectives:
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

7.1a Residential scheme customer protection

7.1b In non-residential schemes, provide reports on energy supply/use and
bills that are clear and informative
7.2 In non-residential schemes, develop communications with customers that
meet customer expectations
7.3 Ensuring customers are aware of their obligations

Objective 7.1a – Residential scheme customer protection

Why is this objective important?
Issues relating to the quality of heat networks, particularly reliability, have the potential
to cause serious harm to customers. Heat networks can be natural monopolies and
are, at the time of writing, unregulated. In a recent Heat Networks Market Study, The
UK Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) have recommended that heat network
customers should be provided with similar protections as customers in the gas and
electricity sectors. The CMA study (2018) states that all heat suppliers and heat
network operators should introduce:
- a priority services register for vulnerable customers and support for vulnerable
customers;
- a minimum standard of complaint handling;
- performance measures for quality of service and responding to supply issues;
- and
- access to an ombudsman with the ability to investigate suppliers and make
binding remedies.
The Heat Trust has developed an approach to accreditation of heat networks,
including customer protection. This is a relevant example for other heat networks
looking to meet consumer protection obligations. Over time, it is anticipated that all
heat networks, including smaller network operators will have access to a suitable
scheme for customer protection.
Minimum requirements
7.1a.1 The heat supplier in heat networks covering all residential and micro business
shall join the Heat Trust, www.heattrust.org.
7.1a.2 The heat network operator of each heat network shall notify Heat Trust at the
start of the project of their intention to register with the scheme and make a separate
submission to register with Heat Trust.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 160 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

7. 1a.3 A bespoke, clearly written information pack shall be provided to all residents
explaining how they can control the heating and hot water system. This shall include:
- the setting of room temperatures
- the programming of on/off times
- the temperature of hot water supply
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- any key safety issues

- a set of frequently asked questions (FAQs)
- procedures if a leak is detected
- telephone numbers to call for assistance or in an emergency.
7.1a.4 The resident shall be advised, where relevant, that the heat meter may record
a heat use even when there is no space heating demand or hot water demand in the
property as a result of the keep-warm facility being activated.
7.1a.5 If for any reason a residential/micro business scheme does not join Heat Trust
then a detailed justification should be provided and included in the evidence pack.
Where this is the case then the scheme shall be treated as non-residential and all the
minimum requirements in 7.1b and 7.2 should be met.

Figure 21 - Heat Trust trademark

Note - The Heat Trust mark is a sign that the heat supplier has agreed to abide by the standards set out
in the Scheme (use of this mark is strictly reserved to those Schemes that have successfully applied to
the Scheme and committed to abide by the Scheme Rules)

Best practice
BP7.1a.a Best practice would include issuing even more frequent newsletters, the
setting up and engagement with a customer representative body and the provision of
more detailed information on the operation of the scheme. This could involve the use
of social media to provide two-way communication with customers.
BP7.1a.b Best practice would include automatic notification to customers (or
nominated contacts) via text message in the event of any interruption of service.
BP7.1a.c Best practice would be to provide information to customers about
maintenance work that affects public areas including the reasons for the work and the
expected duration.
Objective 7.1a – Key outputs
Output 7.1a.a – Heat Trust heat network certificate

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 161 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Output 7.1a.b – Heat Trust biannual heat network monitoring report

On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 7.1b – In non-residential schemes, provide

This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

reports on energy supply/use and bills that are clear and

informative
Why is this objective important?
Customers are entitled to receive information on the way in which their energy is
produced and supplied, on their own energy use and to receive bills which are clearly
set out. In this respect a supply of heat should be no different to the supply of any
other type of utility service. Depending upon the circumstances, much of this objective
will be addressed through a bespoke heat sales agreement with the non-residential
customer. It is also worth noting that in some circumstances the customer may jointly
own part of the heat network and so has an interest in its operation.
Heat networks are unregulated, and in many cases effective monopolies. As such,
protection must be provided to customers to ensure they do not suffer under such
monopolies and so that the industry is not brought into disrepute.
Minimum requirements
7.1b.1 Clear information shall be given to the customer with regards the tariff structure
(including any options available), detailing the standing (fixed) and variable charges
and all other elements of the bill (metering, routine maintenance, response service,
VAT etc.), how the charges have been derived and any assumptions used, in a
transparent manner and in accordance with the Heat Trust scheme and the Heat
Metering and Billing Regulations (2014).
7.1b.2 Heat tariff for subsequent years shall be governed by a heat price review
formula, the details of which will be defined in the contract between the heat provider
and the customer and where applicable between the heat provider and those
undertaking governance of the scheme.
7.1b.3 The non-residential customers shall receive a bill once per month based on
actual meter readings clearly itemising: the energy used, the charge for energy, the
charge for availability, the charges for any maintenance any other standing charges
and VAT, in accordance with the Heat Metering and Billing Regulations (2014). The
heat provider/operator will develop a summary report of the regularity of billing and
any issues arising.
7.1b.4 Customers shall be offered the choice of whether they wish to receive a bill
electronically or in paper format.
7.1b.5 Where pre-payment systems are used the heat customer shall be provided with
an annual statement showing the amount of energy used and the total charges made.
7.1b.6 The heat customer shall receive a statement annually comparing the heating
charges for the heat network supply with the equivalent charges for the most common
form of alternative means of heat supply for this building and its location, taking into

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 162 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

account maintenance and capital replacements costs. The annual statement should
include:
- 7.1.7 the amount of heat energy supplied to the network from each energy
source.
- 7.1.8 the heat losses on the network based on meter readings where available.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

- 7.1.9 the parasitic electricity used to deliver the heat (pumping energy and other
energy centre electricity use).
- 7.1.10 the CO2 content of the heat delivered to the customer (taking account of
heat losses and pumping energy) and a comparison with the emissions from
other standardised counterfactual energy supply systems such as: individual gas-
fired boilers, direct electric heating or individual heat pumps.
The heat supplier shall publish an annual summary report of heat usage, charges and
CO2 intensity.
7.1b.7 The heat supplier shall provide bills at frequent intervals, using actual meter
data not estimates, and install smart heat meters so users can see in real time via an
energy display device their heating use and the heating cost.
Best practice
Moved to MR Best practice would be to provide bills at more frequent intervals, using
actual meter data not estimates, and install smart heat meters so users can see in real
time via energy display devices their heating use and the heating cost.
BP7.1b Best practice would be to include a discount on the bill if the return
temperature achieved is consistently lower than a specified threshold (most likely to
be suitable in contracts with non-domestic customers). Or alternatively a penalty for
consistently high return temperatures.
BP7.1c Best practice would involve reporting on NOx emissions as well as CO2
savings as this may be the main negative impact of the scheme.
BP7.1d Best practice would be to provide an online display of the overall system
performance, environmental benefits and any general fault updates.
Objective 7.1 – Key outputs
Output 7.1b.a – Summary report of billing regularity
Output 7.1b.b – Annual summary report of heat usage, charges & CO2 intensity
Output 7.1b.c – Annual review of tariffs
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 163 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 7.2 – In non-residential schemes, develop

communications with customers that meet customer
expectations
Why is this objective important?
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Customer satisfaction can be improved through good communication. Often

customers are more dissatisfied because of lack of information provided about a
problem than the problem itself.
Minimum requirements
7.2.1 The heat supplier shall provide general information to customers about the
operation of the scheme, preferably quarterly but at least on an annual basis in the
form of a newsletter. This shall include information on availability of the heat supply
over the year and reasons for any outages and the terms under which compensation
payments will be paid.
7.2.2 The heat supplier shall provide notice of any interruptions of supply at least two
days prior to any planned works and as soon as possible for any unplanned works.
7.2.3 The heat supplier shall make specific arrangements to communicate with
vulnerable high risk customers e.g. hospitals, care homes regarding any interruption
to supply.
7.2.4 The heat supplier shall ensure that all customers are aware of a helpline phone
number to call in an emergency or to report a fault.
7.2.5 The heat supplier shall set up a complaints procedure and a dispute resolution
procedure and ensure customers are aware of this.
7.2.6 The heat supplier shall provide information to prospective buyers, renters,
sellers and landlords about the heat network and the expected charges.
7.2.7 A bespoke, clearly written information pack shall be provided to all customer
building managers explaining how they can control the heating and hot water system.
This shall include:
- the setting of building/room temperatures
- the programming of on/off times
- the temperature of hot water supply
- any key safety issues
- a set of frequently asked questions (FAQs)
- procedures if a leak is detected
- telephone numbers to call for assistance or in an emergency.
Best practice
BP7.2a Best practice would include issuing even more frequent newsletters, the
setting up and engagement with a customer representative body and the provision of
more detailed information on the operation of the scheme. This could involve the use
of social media to provide two-way communication with customers.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 164 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BP7.2b Best practice would include automatic notification to customers (or nominated
contacts) via text message in the event of any interruption of service.
BP7.2c Best practice would be to provide information to customers about
maintenance work that affects public areas including the reasons for the work and the
expected duration.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Objective 7.2 – Key outputs

Output 7.2a – Copies of regular customer information and annual report
Output 7.2b – Copy of dispute resolution procedures
Output 7.2c – Copy of customer energy efficient instructions/information pack
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.

Objective 7.3 – Ensuring customers are aware of their

obligations
Why is this objective important?
A successful heat network also depends on the co-operation of the heat customers.
This section sets out obligations that both residential and non-domestic customers
should be encouraged to accept. These obligations should be provided to all
customers on the scheme when joining and at regular intervals thereafter.
Minimum requirements
7.3.1a The heat supplier shall include customer obligations in their contracts with
customers.
7.3.1b All customers, but especially larger users, shall recognise the importance of
return temperatures and ensure that their system operates as designed and take and
act on advice provided by the heat network operator.
7.3.2 Customers shall not tamper with the system and shall not touch the valves or
any parts of the system except designated user controls.
7.3.3 Customers shall check whether their system is at fault before calling the heat
network operator in case it is an issue with their building heating system.
7.3.4 Customers shall treat operatives with respect and understand that if a heat
network failure has taken place then the operator will be doing all that they can to
resolve the issue, but by virtue of it being a heat network there are likely to be multiple
customers affected.
7.3.5 Customers shall pay charges levied in accordance with the contract between
the customer and the supplier in a timely manner recognising that the heat supplier is
operating a local business with specific funding.
7.3.6 Customers shall not draw water from the heat network system as this
represents a theft of energy and the treated water is costly to replace in the system
and water quality can suffer.
7.3.7 Customers shall not use heat network plantrooms for storing of other
equipment and shall also keep these areas locked and prevent unauthorised access.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 165 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Objective 7.3 – Key outputs

Output 7.3a – Copy of customer responsibilities charter
On completion, these key outputs shall be signed-off in the CP1 checklists and placed in the
project evidence pack.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 166 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Appendices
Appendix A – Glossary of terms
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

The definitions given here relate specifically to the context of heat networks. Terms
may have broader or alternative meanings in other contexts.

Automatic meter reading A system where heat meters are monitored and data on
(AMR) energy use recorded and stored at intervals and then
communicated to a heat meter operator so that bills can
be produced without the need for manually reading the
meters.

Building energy A computer-based system for remote control and

management system monitoring of building services used for interactive
(BEMS) energy management.

Building information BIM is described as value creating collaboration through

modelling (BIM) the entire life-cycle of an asset, underpinned by the
creation, collation and exchange of shared 3D models
and intelligent, structured data attached to them.

Building Operator The lead person carrying out operation and

maintenance. An assigned individual responsible for
delivering key requirements as stated for Stage 6 and
signing off accordingly.

Building thermal substation The main interface (which may include a heat
exchanger) between the district heating network and the
building heating/DHWS systems.

Calorific value (CV) The heat energy available from a fuel when it is
completely burnt, expressed as heat energy units per
unit of weight or volume of the fuel. The gross or higher
calorific value (GCV/HCV) is the total heat energy
available when all the products of combustion are
cooled to standard conditions and the heat released
from the condensation of water vapour is included. The
net or lower calorific value (NCV/LCV) is the total heat
energy released from combustion excluding the latent
heat of the water vapour from condensation of the
products of combustion.

Client This will normally refer to the Client (owner/developer) of

a heat network. In later stages, this could be a different
party, e.g. a new body responsible for operating the
network.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 167 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Commissioning Team The lead person carrying out commissioning. An

Leader assigned individual responsible for delivering key
requirements as stated for Stage 4 and signing off
accordingly.

CO, carbon monoxide; Oxides of carbon produced by fuel combustion. CO

This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

CO2, carbon dioxide. represents incomplete combustion and can be burnt to

CO2, which is the product of complete combustion.

Combined heat and power The generation of electricity and heat simultaneously in
(CHP) a single process to improve primary energy efficiency
compared to the separate generation of electricity (e.g.
from power stations) and heat (from local boilers).

Construction (Design and The Construction (Design and Management)

Management) Regulations Regulations 2015 replace the CDM Regulations 2007
2015 (HSE 2015) and the Construction (Health, Safety and Welfare)
Regulations 1996. The key aim of CDM 2015 is to
integrate health and safety into the management of a
project and to encourage everyone involved, to work
together. The principles of CDM apply to all construction
projects. However, notification applies where work: will
last more than 30 days, or will involve more than four
persons working on site at any time, or will involve more
than 500 person days.
CDM Regulations identify task functions of the Client,
designers, the CDM principal designer, principal
contractor and contractors that must be carried out by
nominated bodies.

Control of Substances COSSH are the Regulations that require employers to

Hazardous to Health control the use of substances that can be hazardous to
(COSSH) health.

Decentralised energy An existing or proposed district

networks heating/electricity/cooling network to which a building or
buildings can connect.

Demand; maximum The rate at which energy is required, expressed in kW or

demand; demand profile MW. It is usually related to a time period, typically half
an hour, e.g. 1 kWh used over half an hour is a demand
rate of 2 kW. Maximum demand is the highest half-
hourly rate at which electricity is required during a month
or year. Peak load or peak demand are the terms
usually used for heat energy. A graph of demand rate
over a typical day, for example, is the demand profile.

Designer The lead person carrying out design. An assigned

individual responsible for delivering key requirements as
stated for Stage 3 and signing off accordingly.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 168 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Description of Operation Document setting out the operating procedures and

(DesOps) control philosophy to be used in running an item of plant
or system.

District cooling (DC) The opposite of district heating, this means the
centralised production and distribution of cooling energy.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

District heating (DH) The provision of heat to a group of buildings, district or

whole city usually in the form of piped hot water from
one or more centralised heat sources.

Energy service company A company offering a total energy supply service that
(ESCo) takes responsibility for provision, financing, operation
and maintenance of energy facilities. Energy services
contracts may be worded to define the outcome of the
service provided, temperatures and light levels, rather
than how much energy is to be supplied.

Evidence pack The Code requires evidence to be produced to

demonstrate that processes have been followed. These
should be compiled into an Evidence Pack for each
stage, which can then be assessed to show the Code
has been followed. At the completion of the project the
Evidence Pack should be handed over to the building
operator.

Energy Centre A main plant room housing low carbon technologies

(CHP, heat pumps, biomass boilers etc) and any top-up
or standby boiler plant. It usually includes the main heat
network pumps, pressurisation units, strainers, heat
meter and control valves.

Feasibility Consultant The lead person carrying out feasibility. An assigned

individual responsible for delivering key requirements as
stated for Stage 2 and signing off accordingly.

Heat exchanger A device in which heat is transferred from one fluid

stream to another without mixing. There must obviously
be a temperature difference between the streams for
heat exchange to occur. They are characterised by the
method of construction or operation, e.g. shell-and-tube,
plate, rotary.

Heat meter Device which measures thermal energy provided by a

source or delivered to a sink, by measuring the flow rate
of the heat transfer fluid and the change in its
temperature (ΔT) between the outward and return legs
of the system. It is typically used in industrial plants for
measuring boiler output and heat taken by process, and

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 169 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

for district heating systems to measure the heat

delivered to consumers.

Heat network The flow and return pipes that convey the heat from the
energy centre to the customers. The pipes are
(Also see definitions for
frequently buried but may be above ground or within
Primary, secondary and
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

buildings. Heat Networks include both communal

tertiary below)
heating and district heating.
Communal heating is defined as a single building
served with more than one customer (the building does
not need to contain the plant)
District heating is defined as more than one building
being served where the building owners are not the
asset owners

Primary heat network The distribution pipes connecting the energy centre to
buildings – mostly buried pre-insulated pipe

Secondary heat The pipes within the buildings and up to the dwelling in
network/systems residential blocks, even if there is no hydraulic break
installed

Tertiary heat The dwelling internal circuits, radiators etc, even if there
network/systems is no hydraulic break installed.

Heat Network Assessor Someone who has been trained in using the Code and
could support the Client in the process of using the
Code checklists. However, there is no requirement that
this role be fulfilled by a Registered CIBSE Heat
Network Assessor (or appointed at all).

Heat Trust A not for profit customer protection scheme to protect

the interests of householders and micro businesses
connected to heat networks. See www.heattrust.org for
more information.

Heat Network operator The organisation that has the heat supply agreement
with the end user/customer

High temperature hot Pressurised hot water at 120ºC and above used for
water (HTHW) space and/or process heating.

Hydraulic/Heat Interface An HIU usually has the external appearance of a wall

Unit (HIU) hung boiler and provides the interface between the
primary or secondary heat network and the tertiary
dwelling’s heating system. HIUs typically consist of a
small pre-fabricated assembly of components that
includes: isolating valves, strainer, heat meter and
control valves. It may also include a plate heat
exchanger for the production of domestic hot water. It
may include a heat exchanger to separate the dwelling

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 170 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

space heating circuit from the heat network (indirect

connection option).

Thermal substation A thermal substation, or substation, usually consists of a

larger pre-fabricated assembly of components that form
the interface between the primary heat network and a
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

secondary building/block heating/DHW system. It is

usually located in a plant room at the base of the
building/block. Thermal substations typically include:
isolating valves, strainer, heat meter and control valves.
It may also include a plate heat exchanger for the
production of domestic hot water. It may include a heat
exchanger to separate the dwelling space heating circuit
from the heat network (indirect connection option).

Low temperature hot water Hot water at up to 95ºC used for space heating and low
(LTHW) temperature process.

Low/zero carbon (LZC) Includes renewable technologies like photovoltaics,

technology solar water heating, biomass but also includes low
carbon technologies like CHP and heat pumps.

Maximum demand Maximum power, measured in kW or kVA, supplied to a

customer by a supply/distribution company, equal to
twice the largest number of kWh or kVAh consumed
during any half-hour in a specified period (usually a
month). Charges for maximum demand usually vary
seasonally.

Measurement Instruments The EU Directive which governs the standards for

Directive (MID) metering of energy including heat.

Medium temperature hot Pressurised hot water at 95ºC to 120ºC used for space
water (MTHW) heating and process.

Network The distribution system which links energy production to

energy usage. Mostly applied to electricity.

Particulate Particles of solid matter, usually of very small size,

derived from the fuel either directly or as a result of
incomplete combustion and considered deleterious
emissions.

Principal Contractor The lead person carrying out construction. An assigned

individual responsible for delivering key requirements as
stated for Stage 4 and signing off accordingly.

Shared heat network A heat network created as part of a new development

which includes the connection of neighbouring buildings.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 171 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Seasonal Time of Day A tariff structure, typically for electricity import/export

(STOD) tariff and use of systems charges that varies for different time
of the day, day of the week, month of the year.

Thermal storage Storage of heat, typically, in an insulated tank as hot

water to provide a buffer against peak demand. The
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

water may be pressurised to allow it to be kept at a

higher temperature than 100ºC.

VWART The Volume Weighted Average Return Temperature

(VWART) of an HIU VWART. Further information and a
calculation method is available at
www.thebesa.com/ukhiu

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 172 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Appendix B – Example commissioning procedure to

ensure design return temperatures are achieved in
dwellings
The example commissioning checklist (shown below and in the associated checklist
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

spreadsheet) is appropriate for a residential HIU with instantaneous DHW and indirect
space heating, although similar principles can be used for other connection and HIU
types. The designer needs to complete some parts of the sheet to show the system
settings, target values and tolerances for use by the commissioning engineer. The
targets set in the sheet should be practically achievable, which may be different to the
theoretical optimum. As a minimum, the data shown in this commissioning checklist
shall be inputted by the commissioning engineer. This procedure should work in
parallel with the manufacturer specific procedure to setup the HIU operating
parameters.
Why is this procedure important?
Typically, the focus on commissioning has been purely to ensure the customer is
provided with heating and hot water, with little focus on ensuring that commissioning
results in efficient heat network operation. The commissioning process needs to
ensure that the anticipated design return temperatures are achieved under typical HIU
operating conditions. Also, other functions can be checked such as heat metering,
prepayment etc.
In practice elements of the checklist may be undertaken by different parties e.g.
different contractors install and set up the radiators and HIU. The aim is to provide a
robust process that allows correct ‘first-time’ commissioning to be achieved, and fully
considered at the design and tendering stage. A commissioning process that requires
different parties to return at different times to address issues found during
commissioning will be time consuming and expensive. Retrospective post occupation
identification and remedying of poor performance is often even more time consuming
and expensive.
It is suggested that the BESA HIU Test Regime data can be used to set some of the
commissioning requirements.
The steps detailed below are recommended to ensure the HIU delivers both the
intended customer service and the design return temperatures. It is expected that
different sites and HIUs may require additional steps and alternative setup methods,
and that this procedure would need to be modified accordingly. However, this
procedure represents a reasonable minimum set of checks.
Pre-commissioning
1. All operatives involved in commissioning shall receive training on the correct setup
of the space heating e.g. from designer, and manufacturers commissioning
information for the specific HIU they are commissioning, see Objective 5.1a.
Specifically the commissioning engineer shall understand how to set the flow
limiting radiator valves installed.
2. The designer shall pre-populate the commissioning record sheet with the radiator
valve and HIU pump settings for each property. The designer shall also state the
DHW and space heating flow set point temperatures and the return temperatures
to be achieved during space heating and DHW generation operation, within a

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 173 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

reasonable tolerance. This information should be developed at the design stage

and reviewed during construction prior to finalising the commissioning
requirements.
3. The elements of the checklist that the designer shall complete are shaded in pink
with example values in square brackets.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Commissioning stages
4. Confirm that the flushing valve at the HIU DH supply is closed. Check the strainer
is clean. Run the DHW to check the DH flow temperature.
5. The heat meter shall be checked to ensure there are no error messages and that
when the HIU is delivering heat, the flow is not negative and that the DH flow
temperature is higher than the DH return temperature. Heat meter specific
information must be available to ensure error messages can be understood and
acted upon.
6. The commissioning process shall check the valve settings on each radiator are as
per the commissioning sheet. Each radiator shall be checked to confirm that:
- the pre-settable valve is set as per the commissioning checklist and the lock
shield valve fully open
- the TRV is mounted horizontally to mitigate the impact of warmed air rising
around the flow pipe to radiator affecting TRV control
- the flow enters the top of radiator and return leaves from the bottom.
- each radiator has been bled
- the secondary system is at the required pressure, checking again that any air has
been bled from radiators
7. The HIU pump is set to the prescribed setting on the commissioning checklist
8. Temporary temperature sensors (see Figure TTT) shall be placed on the tertiary
flow and return pipe and the heating turned on with all TRVs fully open and room
thermostat calling for heat. The tertiary flow temperature shall be adjusted to
achieve the prescribed value. After the operating space heating system has
stabilised (demonstrated by the secondary return temperature being stable over
an appropriate period) the secondary and tertiary return temperatures shall be
checked to ensure they meet the requirements prescribed on the commissioning
checklist.

Figure TTT – Example bluetooth clamp thermometer

During the stabilisation of heating return temperature, the tertiary flow temperature
shall be checked and adjusted if necessary (some HIUs limit the space heating

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 174 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

output and so when starting the heating from cold it may take more than 10
minutes to achieve the design flow temperature).
If the secondary return temperature is too high then the tertiary flow rates are too
high through one or more radiators, and must be corrected. To assess where the
high flow rates exist, each radiator return temperature can be checked and the
pre-settable valve adjusted where necessary. As an alternative to item 8, the flow
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

rate in the tertiary system can be checked when all the TRVs are set fully on. This
can be derived, by calculation, from the heat meter and temporary thermometers
on the secondary. If the dT on the tertiary is the same as the dT on the secondary,
then the flow rates must be the same. If the dT on the tertiary is half that of the
secondary, then the flow rate in the tertiary must be double the secondary. If the
achieved tertiary flow rates are at the design values, then the tertiary return
temperature should be correct when the heating has stabilised.
9. Confirm that lowering the room thermostat turns the heating off.
10. Once heating commissioning and checks are complete, the heating shall be
turned off and the DHW then set up. The kitchen tap (recommended as other taps
may have TMVs affecting temperature) shall be opened and the HIU set up to
achieve the required DHW temperature at the kitchen tap. The DH return
temperature, as measured by the heat meter, shall be confirmed to be within the
prescribed tolerance as detailed on the commissioning checklist. The cold water
supply temperature shall be recorded and, depending upon the allowed tolerance
on DH return temperature, a correction calculation may be needed for different
CWS temperatures. The designer should propose the correction calculation
method.
Checklist additional options
- Check the operation of prepayment valve if fitted
- Where available, use AMR data for the duration of the commissioning process to
verify the secondary return temperatures achieved
- Where available, use AMR data to confirm the standby performance of the HIU,
e.g. the return temperature, and HIU heat loss
- Use electronic commissioning checklists which can include photos of the heat
meter (with readable serial number) and the dwelling number to enable checks
that these are correct on the billing system
- It may be useful to state some settings for the room thermostat and TRVs to be
set at before leaving the property, in order to provide frost protection
- It is preferable to randomise the heating programmer settings to avoid large heat
demands at default programmer heat-on times
Notes on why parameters have been chosen:
- Measurement of tertiary return temperature – this is not strictly required but it
clarifies what the source of high return temperatures is, which in most cases will
be the radiators. When monitoring just the secondary return temperature, the
temptation is to ‘blame’ the HIU.
- Space heating heat consumption – this provides a rough check that all the
radiators are on. A commissioning short-cut could be to turn off any problematic
radiators and note the return temperature with some radiators off.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 175 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- Cold Water Supply – if the CWS is at 20°C then the HIU is not going to give the
same return temperatures as a test when the HIU CWS is 10°C. The designer
could use the dT between secondary return temperature and CWS, as measured
in the HIU test, and then require a similar dT at commissioning.
- DHW power output – this provides a check that the DHW flow is in the range of
the HIU test values. If the HIU test shows little return temperature variation over
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

the test range of 10-20kW then a precise power output is unnecessary.

The following example commissioning checklist shown below is also provided as a

practical tool in the associated CP1 checklist in Microsoft Excel.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 176 January 2019

 This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment)

177
January 2019
CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Appendix C – Guidance on the use of SAP modelling of

heat networks
Reference document: The Government’s Standard Assessment Procedure for Energy
Rating of Dwellings, 2012 edition (referred to as SAP 2012), published on behalf of
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

BEIS by BRE.
SAP is an energy assessment tool for dwellings. It is designed to calculate annual
carbon emissions for England Building Regulations Part L 2013 compliance checking.
A district heat network is entered into SAP by use of the ‘Community Heating’ system
selection.
Plant selection
Single or multiple plant items can be input into the tool including CHP and different
fuel types as listed in SAP 2012, Table 12. The fuel, efficiency and proportion of heat
from each energy centre plant item must be calculated and provided to the SAP
energy assessor.
Efficiency
Boiler efficiency must be calculated in accordance with the methodology provided in
Appendix C of SAP 2012. The winter efficiency should be used for all parts of the year
and the summer efficiencies excluded from the calculations. Plant efficiency should be
the same as those used in the modelling described in Code Objective 2.2.
CHP efficiencies are defined for heat as the annual useful heat, excluding dumped
heat, supplied by a CHP scheme divided by the total annual fuel input. For power
efficiency the total annual power output is divided by the total annual fuel input.
Proportion of heat
The proportion of heat for each plant item is based on annual operational records
allocating the proportion of useful heat energy each item provides. In the case of new
systems this should be based on the modelling described in Code Objective 2.2.
Higher proportions of LZC heat will improve the SAP rating.
Distribution losses
Default distribution losses based on system type can be used if any of the following
are met:
- The only dwellings connected to any part of the network are flats, or
- The total trench length of the network is no longer than 100 metres, or
- The linear heat density is not less than 2 MWh/year per metre of network.
Where these are not met the losses must be calculated in accordance with Appendix
C3 of SAP 2012.
Hot water
Where hot water in addition to space heating is provided the system entered into the
SAP tool must include the storage volume of cylinders and/or HIUs assigned to each
dwelling. The relevant loss factors should be entered as provided in Table 2 and 2a of

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 178 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

SAP 2012. Where neither applies the calculation should assume a cylinder of 110
litres and loss factor of 0.0152 kWh/litre/day.
Product Characteristics Database
In view of the increased prevalence of heat networks and concerns regarding the
relatively low heat network losses default values in SAP, the SAP 2012 update has
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

enabled the entry of heat network data in the Product Characteristics Database
(PCDB). The voluntary entry of heat network performance information in the PCDB will
assist SAP assessors in delivering robust assessments by using validated data. The
existing provision of default values will remain in SAP 2012, but their removal is being
considered for future SAP 2016 updates.
The document Application guide for entry of heat network performance data in SAP
Products Characteristics Database provides guidance for the entry of heat network
performance data in the PCDB by the Network Operator, in particular the completion
of the SAP PCDB Application Workbook for Heat Networks. These documents are
available at http://www.ncm-pcdb.org.uk.
Provisional PCDB data entries, which are based on design performance data
estimates and not actual metered data, will have an in-use factor applied to the
calculated distribution loss value.

Appendix D – Guidance on types of building connections

and internal heating systems for dwellings
Space heating systems
Objective 3.5 and Appendix E below discuss the selection of operating temperatures
for the heat network. The space heating circuit within the building needs to be
designed to be compatible with the network temperatures. The building services
designer should aim to achieve as low a return temperature as practical as this will
benefit the heat network. This can be achieved by:
- Selecting lower mean heating circuit temperatures and using larger heat emitters
to compensate.
- Reducing the flow rates to the emitters to create a wider temperature difference
and hence a lower return temperature.
- Using weather compensated temperatures for the space heating circuit.
- Use of optimum start of heating for intermittently heated buildings.
The first option will add to the costs of the heating systems but may be beneficial
overall taking account of the heat network costs. The second option requires
consideration of balancing and control and also the need to ensure that flow velocities
in pipework are not too low resulting in a sluggish response. The third option adds
only a small cost of additional control or BEMS programming, and results in lower
return temperatures at all but the peak loads. This will not reduce DH pipe sizes, but it
will lower DH return temperatures for the vast majority of the heating season. The
fourth option reduces peak DH demands and required peak output of radiators by
bringing the heating on earlier on the coldest days, and hence spreading out the larger
heat requirement to get the building up to temperatures. This requires just small

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 179 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

additional controls or BEMS programming. This will reduce the capital cost of both DH
and building heat emitters.
Even where the existing heating system has been designed for the conventional 82°C
flow 71°C return, it is usually possible to reduce the flow rates to provide an
82°C/60°C radiator circuit temperatures resulting in only a small loss of output
(typically about 12.5% for these temperatures). An assessment of building heat loss
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

and existing heat emitter sizing may establish that even lower temperatures can be
used, especially where fabric improvements have been made subsequent to the
original heating installation. It is also important to investigate whether the control
system can be modified to a variable volume control system that will maintain low
return temperatures under part-load operation.
Domestic hot water services (DHWS)
Hot water services can be generated with a storage system or instantaneously and
either centrally or at a dwelling or outlet position.
Storage hot water systems have the following design advantages and disadvantages:
Pros:
- Lower peak demands in the final branch pipework to the dwelling.
- Storage provides a degree of standby enabling short-term interruptions of the
network supply to be tolerated in summer, especially where electric immersion
heaters are also installed as back-up.
- Opportunity to provide intermittent heat supply from the network to reduce heat
losses from local branch pipework and there is no need for thermal bypasses.
- Opportunity to schedule the time when the heat from the network is used (e.g.
use of night-time heating which could be advantageous if a heat pump-based
heat network is used).
Cons:
- Possible to ‘empty’ the tank if long demand duration.
- Heat losses from the cylinders are higher and need to be taken into account and
may contribute to summer overheating in well insulated properties.
- Water needs to be stored at 60°C for Legionella control, which increases the
required DH flow temperature and results in scaling in hard water areas.
- Where a domestic storage cylinder with an indirect coil is used, return
temperatures will generally be higher than for instantaneous except in the
infrequent case of heating up from cold.
- Space is required in the dwelling for the storage cylinder.
- Mains pressure cylinders will require an annual maintenance check to ensure
safety equipment is functioning correctly (BS2870).
Instantaneous hot water systems have the following design advantages and
disadvantages:
Pros:
- No limit to duration of hot water supply.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 180 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- Low return temperatures achieved when drawing off hot water.

- Compact design, releasing space within dwelling.
- Low heat losses from heat exchanger (when insulated) so minimal impact on
overheating risk.
- No required annual inspections
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Cons:
- Higher flow rates and diameters in branches serving 5 or less dwellings.
- Heat exchanger or local pipework needs the local distribution system to be kept
warm at all times to give a good response time, with implications for heat losses.
This can lead to higher return temperatures in off-periods and higher losses from
the local pipes.
- No opportunity for short interruptions of heat network supply without impacting
the service.
- Risk of scaling in hard water areas especially with high primary side
temperatures.
- May have higher maintenance costs for control valves and heat exchanger
especially where the HIU is located within a dwelling and so less accessible;
good water quality will minimise these costs.
Centralised hot water services have the following design advantages and
disadvantages:
Pros:
- Lower cost for heat exchanger equipment as it is centralised.
- Lower maintenance costs as simpler system at dwelling.
- No space required in dwellings.
- No heat losses within dwellings so no impact on overheating risk.
- Legionella risk can be controlled as water is stored and circulated at 60°C with a
maximum return temperature of 50°C see HSG 274 (Part 2, 2014) and ACOP L8
(2013). Further guidance can be found in CIBSE TM13 (2013).
- Space heating circuit can have variable flow temperature to limit heating use
(valuable for unmetered schemes).
- Space heating circuit can be shut down entirely in summer (subject to contractual
arrangements) reducing secondary pipework heat losses in summer.
- Opportunity for use of a two-stage DHWS system where cold feed water is pre-
heated by space heating return.
Cons:
- Higher cost for distribution pipework (as 4-pipe system – flow and return heating
and flow and return DHWS) More space is required in risers for 4 pipes.
- Additional heat losses in winter from DHWS flow and return as well as space
heating flow and return (although latter can be smaller than for a two-pipe system
which offsets this disadvantage).

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 181 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- Separate metering of hot water use is needed resulting in higher costs – (this
could be an advantage in providing feedback of energy use data and volume-
based metering for hot water use is low cost however a more complex metering
and billing system would result).
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 22 - Indirect space heating and instantaneous hot water heating

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 182 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Figure 23 - Indirect space heating and hot water cylinder (external plate heat exchanger for the hot
water storage is also possible)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 24 - Direct space heating and instantaneous hot water heating

Figure 25 - Direct space heating and hot water cylinder (external plate heat exchanger for the hot water
storage is also possible)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 183 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 26 - Indirect space heating and centralised hot water

Figure 27 - Direct space heating and centralised hot water

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 184 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 28 - External plate heat exchanger and domestic hot water cylinder (Reproduced courtesy of
Orchard Partners)

Figure 29 - Primary side heat store. Note: heat bank primary store normally mains fed. (Reproduced
courtesy of Orchard Partners)

Individual dwelling hot water services have the following design advantages and
disadvantages:
Pros:
- A single heat meter can be used for both space and water heating.
- Space required for secondary distribution is less (2-pipe not 4-pipe).
Cons:
- More space is required within the dwelling, although for instantaneous DHWS this
is relatively small.
The options available for dwelling heating systems in apartment blocks are given in
Figures 24–29.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 185 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

In the new-build sector individual dwelling instantaneous hot water heat exchanger
systems predominate due to their compactness and because lower return
temperatures can be achieved compared to cylinders with coils.
Where centralised hot water is produced external plate heat exchangers should be
used instead of coils and this would also be a good technical solution for individual
dwellings. Existing buildings will have a wider range of designs with the 4-pipe
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

centralised hot water system popular with unmetered social housing.

Two further arrangements are available at an individual dwelling level:
External plate heat exchanger: The use of an external plate heat exchanger
together with a domestic hot water store has the benefit of achieving low return
temperatures. This is similar to the instantaneous solution but with much lower primary
flow rates enabling local pipework diameters to be reduced and hence achieve lower
material costs and heat losses. In addition, heating the store can be timed to benefit
the system, e.g. to avoid coincident peaks with space heating demand or to benefit
the operation of CHP or heat pumps in relation to electricity market prices. In the
summer, continuous circulation of the primary network can be avoided with the store
heat up times programmed remotely so that heat losses can be further reduced. The
disadvantages are the same as the conventional storage solutions, additional heat
losses in the dwelling and additional space requirement. This option would be most
applicable to lower density housing where space may be at less of a premium but
where there is a significant branch length from a street main and continuous
circulation results in high heat loss. See Figure 30.
Primary side heat store: This has advantages over the domestic hot water only store
in that the storage benefit can be applied to both space and water heating and so
provides a greater potential for actively managing the demand profile over a day with
suitable controls. In addition, the flow temperature can be much higher than for the
domestic hot water only store, so a greater amount of energy can be stored in a given
volume. The disadvantages are higher heat losses and greater space requirement
than for an instantaneous non-storage solution.
See Figure 31.
Heating systems within dwellings
The above discussion has described the connection options for buildings, but the
performance of a heat network is also strongly influenced by the type of building
heating systems used and their controls.
Underfloor heating is becoming increasingly popular for new buildings and has
benefits for heat networks due to its low operating temperatures and the likelihood that
users will operate the system more continuously. However, the majority of systems will
continue to use conventional radiators and there are a number of control options for
these.
The most common is for each radiator to be fitted with a thermostatic radiator valve
(TRV) to give room by room temperature control. The TRV should include a balancing
facility so that the flow rate can be set up accurately for a given pressure difference
generated by the dwelling circulating pump (indirect systems) or the differential
pressure control valve (direct systems). This pressure difference should be as low as
possible to achieve modulating variable volume control by the TRV. When the
temperature of the room approaches the set point the radiator valve will close and this

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 186 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

will lead to falling return temperatures. The TRVs need to be selected for the design
flow rates and some manufacturers have developed valves specifically to deal with the
low flow rates and high temperature drops which greatly benefit heat networks.
The flow limiting element of the TRV could be replaced by a Return Temperature
Limiter (RTL). This may be fitted to each radiator, or to the circuit as a whole. Some
HIUs have the latter functionality built into their control system. This valve is of benefit
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

to the heat network as it ensures that the output of the radiator is limited to design
value and the design return temperature is not exceeded, even if the system has not
been well balanced. In most circumstances the better solution is correctly
commissioned pre-settable TRVs. The RTL option may reduce comfort levels and
increase the frequency of customer complaints due to reduced quality of service. The
RTL can be useful on towel rails where towels on the radiator prevent heat loss and
hence result in higher return temperatures, even at pre-set low flow rates.
Ideally these valves would not be adjusted by the resident and there is a need for a
separate direct control of room temperature either by a TRV or a room thermostat.
The normal disadvantage of a room thermostat is that it provides on/off control and so
there is the potential for high return temperatures unless the flow is carefully controlled
to each radiator. An RTL and room thermostat combination would be more effective
and so could be a useful option for retrofitting systems. See Figures 32 and 33.

Figure 30 - Reduction in return temperature for variable flow temperature (compensated) and variable
volume (throttled control) (reproduced courtesy of Orchard Partners)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 187 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 31 - Reduction in return temperature with load for two levels of flow temperature as used at
Odense, Denmark (reproduced courtesy of Orchard Partners)

Appendix E – Guidance on achieving an energy-efficient

heat network
Length of network
The most fundamental requirement is to minimise the length of the installed network.
This will also normally be driven by a requirement to minimise capital costs. The
overall density of development will be a major factor in the length of the network, but
the designer should consider other issues, including the location of the energy centre,
and assess the various options for network routes.
Pipe sizing
If the pipe is oversized then heat losses will be higher. This may arise as a result of
over estimates of peak heat demands (see Objective 3.2) or a failure to analyse the
network to minimise lifecycle costs (see Objective 3.6).
Operating temperatures
A key factor is the selection of operating temperatures. Lower operating temperatures
will result in lower heat losses. However, pumping energy and the capital cost of the
network will be lower if flow rates are reduced by increasing the difference between
flow and return temperatures. As these two requirements cannot both be satisfied
there is a need for optimising the temperatures within any heat network.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 188 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Although a lower mean operating temperature (the average of flow and return
temperatures over the year) will lead to lower heat losses, a smaller temperature
difference between flow and return at peak design conditions will lead to higher heat
losses for the same mean temperature as the pipes will need to be larger. Hence a
network designed for 70°C/50°C will have higher heat losses than one designed for
80°C/40°C especially if the 80°C temperature is only used at peak times. Also, for
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

example, the losses for a network designed for 90°C/40°C will be similar to one
designed for 65°C/40°C (and lower if a variable flow temperature is used) but the
network will have significantly lower capital costs.
The network cannot be analysed in isolation from the building services within the
customer’s buildings and the heat source(s). Lower operating temperatures and lower
return temperatures can be achieved through appropriate building services design, i.e.
by using larger heat emitters and selecting suitable approaches to controls. This may
lead to higher costs for the building services but lower costs overall. The operating
temperatures selected for the network can have an impact on the efficiency of the
heat source and hence its cost and CO2 content.

Figure 32 - Load duration curve for typical new-build scheme of 50 houses (reproduced courtesy of
Vital Energi)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 189 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 33 - The new-build scheme of 50 houses described by Figure 29

(Seek better picture Figure 35 - planks over the trench, trip hazards in close proximity etc)
There has been a trend over the last 30 years towards the use of lower operating
temperatures so as to:
- reduce heat losses from the network
- obtain energy efficiency benefits at the heat production plant especially where
heat is extracted from a steam cycle or where a heat pump is used.
The analysis also needs to consider the operation over the year not just at peak
demands. Reducing the flow rates at part-load using variable volume control principles
and limiting bypass flows is important to limit pumping energy and to maintain low
return temperatures and hence low heat losses from the return pipe. The use of a
variable flow temperature, with a higher temperature used for short peak demand
periods can also be advantageous.
The selection of operating temperatures for peak design conditions and how they vary
with demand requires an optimisation study for any given scheme as it will be
impacted by the type of heat supply plant and the characteristics of the heat network.
The designer has also to consider constraints such as the temperatures used for
existing heating systems and the degree that these can be varied.
Insulation levels

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 190 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Although operating temperatures are important the selection of the pipe system itself
and the insulation type and thickness also have an important influence on the heat
losses. The network losses will need to be calculated for a range of design choices
and taken into account in an overall economic analysis. In particular consideration
shall be given to:
- The thickness of insulation available for pre- insulated pipe systems
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

manufactured to EN 253 (typically three thicknesses are available).

- The thickness and type of insulation available for pre-insulated flexible polymer
pipe systems where a range of heat losses can result.
- The thickness and type of insulation used for above ground pipework (in this case
the marginal cost of additional thickness is often very low).
- The use of twin pipe systems – two carrier pipes in one casing which will result in
lower heat losses.
- The potential benefits of using diffusion barriers.
Pump selection
The use of variable flow control systems and variable pump speeds to match the
variation in flows and pressures will lead to much lower pumping energy than for
constant flow systems. However, operating a variable speed pump at very low speeds
is not advisable due to losses in the control inverters and consideration should be
given to selecting a range of pump duties, with respect to both flow and head, to better
match the network part-load conditions.
It is emphasised that the heat network will only rarely if ever operate at its peak design
condition and for the majority of the time the demands will be much lower than this,
typically 10–25% of peak (see Figure 34). This has implications for the selection of
pumps, the sizing of pipes and the setting of bypass flows.

Appendix F – Measuring performance

Metering requirements
Ensure performance is able to be measured
The use of data is key to ensuring optimal performance of network and consultants
should follow the principle that “if you can’t measure it, you can’t manage it”.
Due to legislation, almost all new buildings connected to a heat network will need to
incorporate heat meters. Therefore, metering infrastructure in new developments will
need to be installed by default. Through the introduction of a few additional meters,
much more information can be ascertained about the behaviour of the heat network.
The financial value of metering is dependent on the potential energy savings that can
be obtained by using the data. A small fault on a heat network has the potential to
greatly increase the return temperatures and, in turn, significantly increase the heat
loss of the network. A few heat meters in critical locations on the network greatly
assist in monitoring and analysing the behaviour of the system are almost always
economically justified.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 191 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Best practice would be to refer to International Performance Measurement and

Verification Protocol (IPMVP) as far as is relevant and apply the IPMVP principles
where possible.
Heat Network Metering Requirements
Dwelling/end-point metering
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

In line with the Heat Networks (Metering & Billing) 2014 Regulations, heat meters will
need to be installed at the boundary to every dwelling and/or the entry to every end
customer, in the case of commercial consumers.
Building Network metering (“District Heating” Networks)
In line with the Heat Networks (Metering & Billing) 2014 Regulations, should the heat
network qualify as a “district heating” network under the regulations, then heat meters
are to be installed at the point of entry or heat exchanger for the network into each
building.
In this case the “Building Network” will refer to the pipe infrastructure between the
building level meter and individual dwelling meters. All building level meters should be
connected to the AMR system, as set out below.
Energy centre metering
In order to monitor the ongoing performance of the heat network, energy meters are to
be installed at the boundary of the energy centre as a minimum. This includes all
energy entering the energy centre (gas meters, electricity meters, etc.) in addition to
energy leaving the energy centre via the heat network. However, meters should also
be installed on any significant branches in the development such as at the base of
risers as it enables greater clarity when investigating any issues with network
performance.
Where multiple heat sources are specified then each heat source must be metered
directly (or metered via data derived from other meters, i.e. “metering by difference”)
to obtain the following data: kWh, kW, flow and return temperatures and flow volumes.
Note that many small-scale CHP units have in-built electricity meters and only
generate estimated heat production based on electricity generation. Where this is the
case, the CHP heat production data should not be relied upon and a dedicated heat
meter should be installed. All Energy Centre meters should be connected to the AMR
system, as set out below.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 192 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Figure 34 – Key measurement points on heat networks

(Reproduced courtesy of Phil Jones, Building Energy Solutions)
Note: – there are many different types of heat network scheme these diagrams are indicative only and
careful consideration will need to be given to the measurement strategy for a given project

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 193 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Ensure meters are MID compliant with M-Bus output of all key data
In order to assess the health and ongoing performance of a heat network, the meters
and meter network are vital. A small saving in capital cost when specifying inferior
heat meters or an inadequate meter network will result in significant increases in
operational costs over the lifetime of the network.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Therefore, all heat meters must be MID Class 2 approved. All heat meters must use
an open output protocol (e.g. the M-Bus output protocol), regardless of whether the
heat meter is also connected to a separate payment system (e.g. smart meter).
Ensure the metering system is able to be remotely read on half-hourly basis
The effectiveness of the metering system is related to the quantity and availability of
data. This data must be accessible by a user via a remote connection.
All heat meters must be connected to a data logger via an open protocol network (e.g.
M-Bus) and/or connect to an alternate Automated Meter Reading (AMR) system. In
the case that the meters are connected to an alternate AMR (which may be a PAYG
system), access to all system reads (raw data) must be able to be provided to either
the Client or a services provider appointed by the Client.
Furthermore, the AMR system must be able to record, transmit and store the following
information on at least a half-hourly basis:
- Meter read (kWh)
- Flow Temperature
- Return Temperature
- Flow Rate
- Instantaneous Power
Dedicated monitoring system
Historically, there has been a tendency to use BEMS to monitor and collect data from
energy centre meters. The disadvantage of this approach is that BEMS is not
designed with metering and monitoring in mind. In particular, BEMS is often not
designed to store and analyse large quantities of historic data and it can be difficult to
extract and use the data in a meaningful way. Therefore, it is recommended that
BEMS should not be used to monitor data from the heat meters in the plant room and
at other key locations on the network other than at measurement points specifically
used by the BEMS to control plant.
As a metering network infrastructure will already be in place for residential metering
and billing, it is recommended that any non-dwelling meters are connected to the
same system. One advantage of this approach is that the metering system will
constantly be maintained and monitored by the metering and billing service provider in
order to bill residents for their heat consumption.
Performance measurement and testing
As part of the commissioning process, tests must be carried out to verify that the
system conforms to minimum performance requirements.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 194 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Where performance is below requirements, performance deficiencies must be

remedied by the contractor before practical completion. For the avoidance of doubt,
achieving performance requirements is a condition for practical completion.
Performance Targets
Table 7 shows the minimum performance standards to be targeted/measured
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

throughout a heat networks project, as shown in the associated checklists. This

should be at a HEADLINE level underpinned by monitoring at the ENERGY CENTRE,
BUILDING/BLOCK and DWELLING level.

Table 7 – Key performance indicators to be targeted and monitored in heat networks

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 195 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Appendix R – Diversity factors for instantaneous

domestic hot water systems for dwellings
Where instantaneous hot water heat exchangers are used for the domestic hot water
service, the peak demands shall be diversified using the BS EN 806-3 factors in the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Table below, as shown in Figure 9. Alternatively, the designer may also use one of the
other diversity factors below, or a combination of these. See Section 3.2.7.
NOTE: In BS EN 806-3 one loading unit (LU) is equivalent to 0.1l/s flow. A bath is given 4LU i.e. 0.4l/s.
Note this is a high value and equivalent to 67.2kW of heat flow. Assuming 0.4l/s for each property then
the BS EN 806 graph gives the following calculated values for LUmax = 4.
Diversity factors as shown in Figure 9
No. of Danish DS439 Swedish DHA BS EN 806
dwellings LUmax=4

1 1.000 1.000 1.000

2 0.619 0.585 0.631
3 0.476 0.427 0.482
4 0.399 0.343 0.398
5 0.349 0.291 0.343
6 0.314 0.255 0.304
7 0.288 0.228 0.274
8 0.267 0.208 0.251
9 0.250 0.192 0.232
10 0.237 0.178 0.216
11 0.225 0.167 0.203
12 0.215 0.158 0.192
13 0.206 0.150 0.182
14 0.199 0.143 0.173
15 0.192 0.137 0.165
16 0.186 0.131 0.158
17 0.180 0.126 0.152
18 0.176 0.122 0.146
19 0.171 0.118 0.141
20 0.167 0.115 0.136
21 0.163 0.111 0.132
22 0.160 0.108 0.128
23 0.156 0.105 0.124
24 0.153 0.103 0.121
25 0.150 0.100 0.118
26 0.148 0.098 0.115
27 0.145 0.096 0.112
28 0.143 0.094 0.109
29 0.141 0.092 0.107
30 0.139 0.091 0.104
31 0.137 0.089 0.102
32 0.135 0.087 0.100
33 0.133 0.086 0.098
34 0.131 0.085 0.096
35 0.130 0.083 0.094
36 0.128 0.082 0.092
37 0.127 0.081 0.091
38 0.125 0.080 0.089

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 196 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

39 0.124 0.079 0.088

40 0.122 0.078 0.086
41 0.121 0.077 0.085
42 0.120 0.076 0.083
43 0.119 0.075 0.082
44 0.118 0.074 0.081
45 0.117 0.073 0.081
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

46 0.116 0.072 0.080

47 0.115 0.071 0.079
48 0.114 0.071 0.078
49 0.113 0.070 0.078
50 0.112 0.069 0.077
51 0.111 0.069 0.077
52 0.110 0.068 0.076
53 0.109 0.067 0.075
54 0.108 0.067 0.075
55 0.108 0.066 0.074
56 0.107 0.066 0.074
57 0.106 0.065 0.073
58 0.105 0.064 0.073
59 0.105 0.064 0.072
60 0.104 0.063 0.072
61 0.103 0.063 0.071
62 0.103 0.062 0.071
63 0.102 0.062 0.070
64 0.101 0.062 0.070
65 0.101 0.061 0.069
66 0.100 0.061 0.069
67 0.100 0.060 0.069
68 0.099 0.060 0.068
69 0.099 0.059 0.068
70 0.098 0.059 0.067
71 0.098 0.059 0.067
72 0.097 0.058 0.067
73 0.097 0.058 0.066
74 0.096 0.058 0.066
75 0.096 0.057 0.065
76 0.095 0.057 0.065
77 0.095 0.057 0.065
78 0.094 0.056 0.064
79 0.094 0.056 0.064
80 0.093 0.056 0.064
81 0.093 0.055 0.063
82 0.093 0.055 0.063
83 0.092 0.055 0.063
84 0.092 0.054 0.062
85 0.091 0.054 0.062
86 0.091 0.054 0.062
87 0.091 0.054 0.062
88 0.090 0.053 0.061
89 0.090 0.053 0.061
90 0.090 0.053 0.061
91 0.089 0.053 0.060
92 0.089 0.052 0.060

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 197 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

93 0.089 0.052 0.060

94 0.088 0.052 0.060
95 0.088 0.052 0.059
96 0.088 0.051 0.059
97 0.087 0.051 0.059
98 0.087 0.051 0.059
99 0.087 0.051 0.058
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

100 0.086 0.051 0.058

101 0.086 0.050 0.058
102 0.086 0.050 0.058
103 0.085 0.050 0.058
104 0.085 0.050 0.057
105 0.085 0.050 0.057
106 0.085 0.049 0.057
107 0.084 0.049 0.057
108 0.084 0.049 0.056
109 0.084 0.049 0.056
110 0.084 0.049 0.056
111 0.083 0.049 0.056
112 0.083 0.048 0.056
113 0.083 0.048 0.055
114 0.083 0.048 0.055
115 0.082 0.048 0.055
116 0.082 0.048 0.055
117 0.082 0.048 0.055
118 0.082 0.047 0.054
119 0.081 0.047 0.054
120 0.081 0.047 0.054
121 0.081 0.047 0.054
122 0.081 0.047 0.054
123 0.081 0.047 0.053
124 0.080 0.046 0.053
125 0.080 0.046 0.053
126 0.080 0.046 0.053
127 0.080 0.046 0.053
128 0.080 0.046 0.053
129 0.079 0.046 0.052
130 0.079 0.046 0.052
131 0.079 0.045 0.052
132 0.079 0.045 0.052
133 0.079 0.045 0.052
134 0.078 0.045 0.052
135 0.078 0.045 0.051
136 0.078 0.045 0.051
137 0.078 0.045 0.051
138 0.078 0.045 0.051
139 0.077 0.044 0.051
140 0.077 0.044 0.051
141 0.077 0.044 0.051
142 0.077 0.044 0.050
143 0.077 0.044 0.050
144 0.077 0.044 0.050
145 0.076 0.044 0.050
146 0.076 0.044 0.050

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 198 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

147 0.076 0.044 0.050

148 0.076 0.043 0.050
149 0.076 0.043 0.049
150 0.076 0.043 0.049
151 0.075 0.043 0.049
152 0.075 0.043 0.049
153 0.075 0.043 0.049
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

154 0.075 0.043 0.049

155 0.075 0.043 0.049
156 0.075 0.043 0.049
157 0.075 0.043 0.048
158 0.074 0.042 0.048
159 0.074 0.042 0.048
160 0.074 0.042 0.048
161 0.074 0.042 0.048
162 0.074 0.042 0.048
163 0.074 0.042 0.048
164 0.074 0.042 0.048
165 0.073 0.042 0.047
166 0.073 0.042 0.047
167 0.073 0.042 0.047
168 0.073 0.042 0.047
169 0.073 0.041 0.047
170 0.073 0.041 0.047
171 0.073 0.041 0.047
172 0.073 0.041 0.047
173 0.072 0.041 0.047
174 0.072 0.041 0.046
175 0.072 0.041 0.046
176 0.072 0.041 0.046
177 0.072 0.041 0.046
178 0.072 0.041 0.046
179 0.072 0.041 0.046
180 0.072 0.041 0.046
181 0.071 0.040 0.046
182 0.071 0.040 0.046
183 0.071 0.040 0.045
184 0.071 0.040 0.045
185 0.071 0.040 0.045
186 0.071 0.040 0.045
187 0.071 0.040 0.045
188 0.071 0.040 0.045
189 0.071 0.040 0.045
190 0.070 0.040 0.045
191 0.070 0.040 0.045
192 0.070 0.040 0.045
193 0.070 0.040 0.045
194 0.070 0.040 0.044
195 0.070 0.039 0.044
196 0.070 0.039 0.044
197 0.070 0.039 0.044
198 0.070 0.039 0.044
199 0.069 0.039 0.044
200 0.069 0.039 0.044

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 199 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Appendix X – Recommended water quality parameters

for heat networks
The following parameters have been found to give satisfactory control of corrosion.
The parameters, limits and monitoring frequency shall be set out in the water
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

treatment regime and agreed with all parties. The limits and monitoring frequency may
deviate from those in the table below provided such difference can be justified based
on the individual circumstances of the scheme. CIBSE are grateful for the contribution
of Jon Greaves of Hydro-X in compiling this table.

Parameter Units Control Limit Frequency Reasons for using this parameter
of
Monitoring

Visual - Clear with no Monthly This is subjective – a photograph of

suspended solids the system waters in a clear
or gassing container should be taken as soon as
possible following sampling.
Extended periods before taking a
visual check can lead to changes in
appearance – e.g. precipitation of
dissolved iron when contacting with
oxygen.

Odour - No strong Monthly Sulphide smells indicate potential

sulphurous or SRB growth. Ammonia smells can
ammoniacal smell indicate NRB growth (some inhibitors
have a mild ammonia smell).

pH – control - Aluminium 7.5 to Weekly (or Sudden changes in pH can indicate

range defined by 8.5 continuous) changes in system water quality –
least noble part therefore continuous monitoring is
of system - Iron based 9.2 - advised. pH control should be set
metallurgy 10.0 based on the metallurgy of the
system.

- Copper and Brass

7.5-10.0

Conductivity µS/cm < 2500 for Mains Weekly (or Sudden changes in conductivity can
Fill and Softened continuous) indicated changes in system water
Fill quality – therefore continuous
monitoring is advised
<1000 for RO /
Demin Fill

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 200 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Oil and Grease mg/l Not present Annually Oil and grease being present
indicates contamination of the
system waters

Chloride mg/l <50 for Mains / Monthly Excess chlorides in the district
measured at 80C Softened Fill heating network will increase the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

potential for corrosion. Particularly

<30 for RO / stress corrosion cracking in stainless
Demin. Fill steels and dezincification in brass
fittings.

Sulphate mg/l - Monthly Monitor trends for any changes –

changes can indicate bacterial
growth

Sulphide mg/l <0.1 Monthly Monitor trends for any changes –

changes can indicate bacterial
growth

Iron Total mg/l <1.0 Monthly Monitor trends to indicate potential

corrosion issues

Iron Dissolved mg/l <1.0 Monthly Monitor trends to indicate potential

corrosion issues

Copper Total mg/l <0.1 Monthly Monitor trends to indicate potential

corrosion issues

Copper Dissolved mg/l <0.1 Monthly Monitor trends to indicate potential

corrosion issues

Aluminium Total mg/l <0.1 Monthly Monitor trends to indicate potential

corrosion issues

Aluminium mg/l <0.1 Monthly Monitor trends to indicate potential

Dissolved corrosion issues

Total Hardness mg/l <100 for Mains Fill Monthly High levels of hardness in system
waters will increase precipitation onto
<5 for Softened Fill heat exchange surfaces which will
reduce efficiency. It also increases
the surface temperatures of the
<0.5 for RO /
exchanges which may lead to the
Demin Fill
potential for stress corrosion

Total Alkalinity mg/l >250<1250 Monthly Low levels of alkalinity indicate a lack
of protection against corrosive
waters. High levels of alkalinity

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 201 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

indicate the potential for caustic

embrittlement.

Ammonia mg/l <10 Monthly Increasing trends of ammonia in the

system waters are an indication of
bacterial growth.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Oxygen mg/l <0.02 Monthly Increases in dissolved oxygen

(recommen content indicate changes in system
d water quality. It is recommended to
continuous) monitor dissolved oxygen
continuously.

Suspended mg/l <10 Monthly Suspended solids indicate poor

Solids system water quality and indicate
further filtration and treatment is
required.

Inhibitor(s) - As per Monthly Inhibitor reserves should be

manufacturers monitored to ensure adequate
guidance reserves are present to minimise the
potential for corrosion

TVC @ 22˚C Cfu/ml <10,000 cfu/ml and Monthly Increasing trends of bacteria indicate
no increasing trend poor water quality

Pseudomonas Cfu/100 <1,000 cfu/100ml at Monthly Increasing levels of Pseudomonas

ml 30˚C and no indicate poor water quality and
increasing trend potential biofilm proliferation in the
system

NRB Cfu/ml Absent Monthly Counts of NRB indicate poor water

quality and potential reduction in
inhibitor levels and an increase in
corrosion potential within the system.

SRB (@ 21 Days) Cfu/ml Absent Monthly Counts of SRB indicate poor water
quality and potential for pitting
corrosion under deposits and
biofilms.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 202 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Appendix Y - Legislation
This appendix describes in broad terms the scope of legislation that is likely to impact
on heat networks development. It is not intended to be comprehensive nor in sufficient
detail to enable compliance to be tested so it is essential that readers consult the
latest regulations normally available on Government websites. This appendix
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

describes current/proposed legislation at the time of writing, and this will inevitably
change in the future. Anyone using the Code should check for any new legislation and
any updates or withdrawals of existing legislation.
The Building Regulations only apply in England and Wales. It should be noted that
some regulations are different across the devolved administrations in Scotland, Wales
and Northern Ireland. Anyone using the Code outside England should check for local
differences. A list of legislation in provided later in the appendices.
Health and safety legislation
Although the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act is fundamental, the Construction
Design Management Regulations (CDM) 2015 will govern all stages from design
through to operation. The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulations
(COSSH) Regulations 2002 and the Dangerous Substances and Explosive
Atmospheres Regulations (DSEAR) 2002 are also likely to apply in most cases.
During the operating phase the control of Legionella risk is an important consideration
and the HSE ACOP L8 (HSE, 2013) and HSG 274 (Part 2, 2014) need to be followed.
Further guidance can be found in CIBSE TM13 (2013). The UK Pressure Safety
Regulations and the Pressure Equipment Directive need to be followed although the
heat network pipes themselves are exempt.
Planning legislation
Obtaining planning permission under the Town and Country Planning Acts for any
new construction is a fundamental requirement. Planning permission for a new heat
network will be required for major schemes both for energy centre(s) and often for the
buried network unless permitted development or a local development order is
obtained. Planning permission may be needed for temporary works including any
major site compounds needed for storage of materials and other construction
purposes. Permissions will typically be needed from any landowners in addition to
planning permission.
For new-build schemes the planning permission may be part of the application for the
development itself and local planning policies may have a strong influence on the
nature of the energy solution to be used including the incorporation of renewable
energy. Planning policies may encourage the use of heat networks as they can use a
wider range of low carbon technologies some of which may only be available at scale.
For example, the London Plan requires developments to make provision for future
connection and connecting to existing heat networks.
Early consultation with the Planning Authority is recommended to establish the extent
of permissions required and which policies will be applied when considering the
application.
Planning approval may impose other construction requirements with conditions
dealing with removal of waste, storage of materials, dust and noise nuisance. There
may be a requirement to comply with the Considerate Contractors scheme.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 203 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

The legislation that provides powers to Local Authorities to develop and operate heat
networks and sell heat energy is contained in the Planning and Energy Act 2008.
Local Authorities are allowed to set their own standards regarding carbon emissions
target for new buildings, which has encouraged heat networks and renewable energy
generation. For further information see the National Planning Policy Framework
available from the MHCLG website.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Local Authority legislation

The Government has indicated that Local Authorities should play a leading role in the
development of heat networks. The legislation that provides powers to Local
Authorities to develop and operate heat networks and sell heat energy is contained in:
- for authorities in London only, the LCC (General Powers) Act 1949
- Local Government (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act 1976
- Local Government Act 2000 – this contains the well-being powers which have
been used by Local Authorities to promote and participate in heat network
projects
- Housing Act 1985
- Procurement of heat networks by local authorities (and certain other bodies) will
need to be in accordance with public procurement rules and may fall under the
Public Contract Regulations (2015), the Utilities Contract Regulations (2016) or
the Concession Contract Regulations (2016) in England and Wales. Or in the
case of Scotland, the Procurement (Scotland) Regulations 2016, as set out in the
Guidance on the Development of Heat Supply Agreements for District Heating
Schemes developed by Scottish Future Trust.
The Procurement (Scotland) Regulations 2016
https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2016/145/contents/made
Guidance on the Development of Heat Supply Agreements for District Heating
Schemes http://www.districtheatingscotland.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/02/HSA-
guidance-final-Feb-18.pdf
Tenements (Scotland) Act 2004 – This affects the right to install infrastructure within
buildings in joint ownership.
The applicability of the regulations and powers outlined above will affect the choice of
delivery vehicle for Local Authorities (hence the choice of delivery vehicle can
sometimes be more complicated for Local Authorities compared to other bodies).
State Aid legislation
State Aid legislation is also important when developing business structures, guidance
is available from BEIS (2016) Heat Network Detailed Project Development Resource –
Guidance on powers, public procurement and State Aid.
The General Block Exemption Regulation (which allows states to provide aid without
going through the EC’s full notification process) includes provisions allowing aid to
heat networks in some circumstances.
Design and construction legislation
Building Regulations

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 204 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

The Building Regulations govern the construction of new buildings and refurbishment
works. However, these are different across the devolved administrations. The main
impact on heat networks arises where part of the compliance route is to use a low
carbon heat supply to achieve the required CO2 emissions.
There is provision within the non-domestic regulations (England and Wales) for a heat
network operator to provide the carbon intensity of the heat supply to be used in the
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

CO2 calculations. If this CO2 intensity from the heat network is less than 190 g/kWh of
heat supplied then the designer will be able to take account of the benefit of a low
carbon heat supply as part of the low carbon design solution, which may add value to
the project.
For the domestic regulations, information is required for the Standard Assessment
Procedure (SAP) modelling which details how the heat is produced, the proportion
from CHP for example. A template for the necessary input data is given in Appendix
C.
This approach potentially provides an incentive for buildings to connect to a heat
network, particularly as we move towards the 2016 Zero Carbon Homes standard and
where Allowable Solutions may provide further support for low carbon heat networks.
The Part L Compliance Guides for Dwellings and Non-Dwellings (HMG, 2013e and
2013f) contain information on CHP and heat networks. These Compliance Guides are
likely to be updated in the near future and a consultation is expected to begin this
process.
N.B. some of the above regulations and compliance guides are currently under review
and may change after this Code is published.
New Road and Street Works Act (NRSWA)
It is normally necessary for organisations wishing to install heat networks in the public
highway to obtain a NRSWA Section 50 Licence from the Local Authority. The licence
imposes important obligations on the holder to give suitable notice of its operations
and to provide record details of all installed equipment. A particular feature of this
Licence will be the highways management and traffic plans which have to be
prepared, submitted and then implemented. This should also follow the NRSWA 2012
Code of Practice recommendations and Advice Note SA 10/05 (2005) (Highways
Agency) requirements.
Early contact with the Local Authority Highways Department and other statutory
undertakers working or with systems installed in the area is recommended. There will
be a need to obtain licences for site compounds and there may be payments to be
made for loss of car parking spaces. There may be opportunities for co-ordinating the
heat network installation with other utility works or road resurfacing programmes.
Contact may also be necessary with the Highways Agency, Network Rail, the Canal
and River Trust or the Environment Agency where major crossings are envisaged.
G59 Embedded Generator Regulations
G59 is the current regulation surrounding the connection of any form of generator
device to run ‘in parallel’ or ‘synchronised’ with the mains electrical utility grid. This is
relevant for all power generation, including Combined Heat and Power units greater
than 16A per phase.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 205 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

G59 sets regulations to prevent the embedded generator from sending electricity out
onto the National Grid in a dangerous manner, including standards around; voltage
rise, interface protection capability, harmonics, distortion, fault level contribution and
reverse power flow.
G99 will replace the G59 standard in 2019. The new standards will affect the
connection and agreement process for all new solar, wind, battery storage, and CHP
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

that are planned for connection. G99 is fairly similar to G59 below 1MW but radically
different for larger plant.
EU Energy Efficiency Directive
The Energy Efficiency Directive 2012/27/EU has been transposed into UK legislation.
There are two main areas which impact on Heat Networks:
- The requirement for EU Member States to establish the potential for district
heating and report to the European Commission regularly on uptake of DH.
- Requirements related to the metering and billing of heating and cooling supply.
The Energy Efficiency Directive requirements for metering and billing apply to both the
non-domestic and domestic sectors and have been implemented through the Heat
Network (Metering and Billing) Regulations 2014 (SI 2014 No.3120 and Amendment
SI 2015 No.855). For buildings with multiple customers on a district (multiple building)
network, heat suppliers must ensure heat meters are installed that measure the
supply of heating, cooling or hot water to each building at the point of entry or at a
heat exchanger for that building.
Heat suppliers must ensure individual customer heat meters are installed for all newly
constructed buildings connected to a district network or buildings where a relevant
major renovation is undertaken. This requirement is for both individual dwellings and
for industrial/commercial consumers in multi-occupancy buildings. In addition, heat
suppliers need to retrofit individual heat meters at each unit supplied unless it can be
shown that this is not cost-effective or technically feasible. Where individual heat
meters are shown not to be cost-effective or technically feasible, heat suppliers should
ensure heat cost allocators (HCAs) are installed unless they too are not cost
effective.”
A national methodology for determining the cost-effectiveness and technical feasibility
of heat meters and HCAs in compliance with the UK regulations is available from the
National Measurement and Regulation Office, see https://www.gov.uk/heat-networks.
Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations and Scottish
Water Byelaws
There are a number of interface points with the water industry for the supply of water
make-up at the Energy Centre, the co-ordination of the buried heat network with water
infrastructure and the supply of domestic hot water services within buildings.
Regulations and Byelaws need to be followed and early consultation with the local
water supplier is recommended to avoid late changes to design and installation and
abortive costs.
Operational legislation
The Electricity Act 2013

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 206 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

The Electricity Act 2013 makes provision for the setting of Contracts for Difference
(CfD) which will support renewable energy electricity generation including CHP plant
that might supply heat networks. These are supplanting and then replacing
Renewable Obligation Certificates (ROCs) from 2017.
The Electricity (Class Exemptions from the Requirement for a Licence) Order 2001
rules that operators/generators need to determine if they meet the Order’s
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

requirements to qualify for an exemption. Such an exemption will be important to

obtain if planning a ‘private wire’ electricity network in association with the heat
network. For further guidance see Cornwall Insight & Lux Nova (2017) - Heat network
electricity revenues and licencing guidance.
Renewable Heat Incentive and Feed-in-Tariffs
These financial mechanisms exist to promote renewable electricity and heat
generation which will be of importance to heat networks which intend to use such heat
sources including: large-scale heat pumps, biomass boilers, and small-scale biomass
CHP. Larger-scale biomass CHP will be eligible for CfD which is the mechanism being
introduced to replace the ROCs (see above).
CHPQA system
The CHPQA system is a method for establishing the relative performance of a CHP
system using a quality index (QI) which is related to how much CHP heat is used over
the year. A QI over 100 is termed ‘good quality’ and if this threshold is met then it is
possible to claim exemption from the Climate Change Levy (CCL) for fuel and
electricity used on-site and obtain tax relief under the Enhanced Capital Allowance
(ECA) scheme.
Carbon Price Support (CPS) payments
Payments need to be made under the Carbon Price Support (CPS) for electricity
generated by gas. However, fuel used in a CHP to generate heat is not liable for CPS.
CPS payments are not required for systems below 2 MWe. Since April 2015, CHP-
generated electricity used on site will not be liable for CPS.
CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme
Under the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme large national energy users are required to
report on their energy use and make a payment that is related to the carbon emissions
associated with the energy used. The scheme treats heat supply from a heat network
as zero carbon emissions which potentially provides a useful but small benefit to the
scheme. Local Authorities and universities will be within the remit of the CRC.
EU Emissions Trading System (EUETS)
If the energy centre has more than 20 MW thermal input, then it will need to be
included within the EUETS, unless this changes as a result of BREXIT. This will
require payments based on the fuel used, however there are free allocations for CHP
systems. An opt-out provision was set by BEIS’s legislation for small emitters and
hospitals in the UK for the phase III of the EUETS.
Energy Company Obligation (ECO)
This scheme requires large energy users to deliver carbon emissions reductions,
usually energy efficiency improvements, to housing. However, a number of heat
networks have also been supported under this scheme and in the future heat

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 207 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

networks will be allowed as a Primary Measure under the ECO but with some pre-
requirements.
The current ECO regulations include heat networks and require heat networks that
wish to access ECO funding to provide customer protection. This can be achieved
through registration with Heat Trust or providing evidence that they meet equivalent
standards.
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Medium Combustion Plant Directive

The Medium Combustion Plant Directive (MCPD) and emission controls on generators
was introduced in 2018 to improve air quality. Medium Combustion Plants and
generators are a significant source of air pollution and many have not previously been
regulated in the UK. The Government’s primary driver for action on air quality is the
impact it can have on health and the environment. A cleaner, healthier environment
benefits people and the economy.
The MCPD is a new Directive that introduces cost effective emission controls on new
plants from December 2018 and existing plants in 2025 and 2030, depending on size.
Consumer legislation
There is no specific legislation that covers the sale of heat, apart from the heat
metering regulations referred to above. However, the sale of heat is governed by
consumer protection legislation and subject to the supervision of the Competition
Markets Authority (CMA).
Heat Trust, a voluntary customer protection scheme for customers on existing and
future heat networks, has been developed through collaboration between industry,
consumer groups and government. More information is available at
http://www.heattrust.org.
The Consumer Rights Act (CRA) applies to all services and, while there is limited heat
network specific legislation, heat suppliers must ensure they comply with the CRA.
The UK Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) have recommended that heat
network customers are given similar protections to customers in the gas and electricity
sectors. The recent CMA report (2018) also highlights the role of the CRA.
The Landlord and Tenant Act has implications on how heat can be supplied to
tenants. Existing tenancy agreements and leases need to be considered when
carrying out retrofit works.
Scottish government - local heat & energy efficiency
strategies and district heating regulation
The Scottish Government’s second consultation: ‘Scotland's Energy Efficiency
Programme: Second Consultation on Local Heat & Energy Efficiency Strategies, and
Regulation of District and Communal Heating’ ran until 20 February 2018. It set out
specific policy proposals including:
- Local authorities would have a statutory duty to develop Local Heat & Energy
Efficiency Strategies (LHEES), which would cover a 15-20 year period, and set
out an authority-wide overall energy efficiency and heat decarbonisation strategy
by designating zones that set out the most appropriate energy efficiency and heat
decarbonisation options for the area. These zones would help to phase the
operation of area based delivery programmes for energy efficiency

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 208 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

- The Scottish Government to develop a district heating consenting regime for

development of district heating in which a consent to develop district heating
would be needed to authorise new district heating development and extensions of
existing schemes. This consent could potentially confer permitted development
rights in relation to pipelines and associated infrastructure
- In addition to a DH consent, a DH Licence would also be required to develop
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

and/or to operate. The role of the licence would be to ensure technical and
operational quality standards, ensure network compatibility, and codify existing
UK-wide consumer protection frameworks
- Socio-economic assessment based on guidance provided by the Scottish
Government (in the form of detailed methodology) used within the context of
LHEES to designate zones; inform business cases & investment decisions, for
approval of LHEES and to monitor impacts. Socio-economic assessment relevant
also within the District Heating consenting process to inform decisions on district
heating consent applications for connecting heat users and surplus heat suppliers
(building level)
- The Scottish Government are currently analysing the responses to the second
consultation and considering the evidence alongside the on-going findings from
the LHEES pilots to develop detailed policy proposals and potential regulation
that will encourage investment in DH whilst protecting consumers.
Other legislation
Property law
This can include, for example, the Landlord and Tenant Act and property rights
generally.
Corporate law
For example, different legal structures have different tax rules and will afford different
opportunities for exit. Clients and those sponsoring heat networks may wish to
consider the use of special purpose vehicles rather than implementing schemes in-
house.

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 209 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

References
ADE (2015) Heat Trust (London: Association of Decentralised Energy). See
www.heattrust.org [accessed April 2015]
Arup (2014) Decentralised Energy Masterplanning
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

ASHRAE (2013) District Cooling Guide (Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating
Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers)
BESA UK Test Standard Regime – Technical Standard (2018)
Blackwell, H - A technical note investigating the Combination Boiler Market to provide
a proxy for a simple thermal Quality of Service Standard in Heat Interface Units
(BSER&T 2019)
BRE (2012) SAP 2012: The Government’s Standard Assessment Procedure for
Energy Rating of Dwellings (Garston: Building Research Establishment)
BRE (2014) Technical Guide to District Heating (Garston: Building Research
Establishment)
BSI (2007) BS OHSAS 18001 Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems
BS EN 1434 (2015+A1:2018) Thermal energy meters
BS EN 13757 (2014) Communication systems for meters
BSI (2009) EN 13941 Design and installation of Pre-insulated bonded pipe systems
for district heating
BSI (2009b) EN 14419 District heating pipes – Pre-insulated bonded pipe systems for
directly buried hot water networks – Surveillance systems
BSI (2009c) EN 15632 District heating pipes. Pre-insulated flexible pipe systems
(Parts 1, 2, 3 and 4)
BSI (2009d) BS 5422 Method for specifying thermal insulating materials for pipes,
tanks, vessels, ductwork and equipment operating with the temperature range from -
40°C to 700°C [amended by Corrigendum, November 2009]
BSI (2006) BS EN 806-3 Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying
water for human consumption. (Pipe sizing - simplified method)
BSI (2010) BS EN 806-4 Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying
water for human consumption. (Installation)
BS 8558 (2015) Guide to the design, installation, testing and maintenance of services
supplying water for domestic use within buildings and their curtilages
BSI EN 806-5 Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying water for
human consumption. (Operation and maintenance)
BSI (2013) EN 253 (2013) District heating pipes – Pre-insulated bonded pipe systems
for directly buried hot water networks – Pipe assembly of steel service pipe,
polyurethane thermal insulation and outer casing of polyethylene (includes
Amendment A1:2013)
BSI EN 13941 (2009+A1:2010) Design and installation of pre-insulated bonded pipe
systems for district heating

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 210 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

BSI EN 489 (2009) District heating pipes. Pre-insulated bonded pipe systems for
directly buried hot water networks. Joint assembly for steel service pipes,
polyurethane thermal insulation and outer casing of polyethylene.
BSRIA (2008) BG3/2008: Maintenance for Building Services (Bracknell: Building
Services Research and Information Association)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

BSRIA (2009) Soft Landings Framework (Bracknell: Building Services Research and
Information Association)
BSRIA (2003) BG14: Rules of Thumb - Guidelines for building services (4th Edition)
(Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (2007) BG1: Handover, O&M Manuals, and Project Feedback
(Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (2011) BG9: Rules of Thumb - Guidelines for building services (5th Edition)
(Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (2012) BG 29/2012: Pre-Commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems
(Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (2018) BG 6/2018: A Design Framework for Building Services (5th Edition)
(Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (BG 1/2009) Building Services Job Book - A project framework for engineering
services (Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (AG16/2002) Variable-flow water systems - Design, installation and
commissioning guidance (Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information
Association)
CIBSE (2003) Commissioning Code M: Commissioning management (London:
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2014) Guide M: Maintenance engineering and management (London:
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2008) TM46: Energy benchmarks (London: Chartered Institution of Building
Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2009) TM39: Building energy metering (London: Chartered Institution of
Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2012) Guide F: Energy efficiency in buildings (London: Chartered Institution of
Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2013) AM12: Combined heat and power for buildings (CHP)
(London: Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2013) TM13 Minimising the Risk of Legionnaires Disease
CIBSE (2013) TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the
design stage (London: Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
Cornwall Insight & Lux Nova (2017) - Heat network electricity revenues and licencing
guidance
Competition and Markets Authority - Heat networks market study (Final Report) (2018)
Crane M, Energy efficient district heating - the importance of achieving low return
temperatures (CIBSE Technical Symposium 2016)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 211 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Crane M (2018) – Carbon savings from gas CHP supplying heat networks, - how to
maximise and estimation of carbon savings in operation (CIBSE Technical
Symposium 2018).
Dansk Standard (2009) DS 439: Code of Practice for domestic water supply
installations (Charlottenlund, Denmark: Dansk Standard).
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

DECC (now BEIS) (2013) The Future of Heating (London: Department for Energy and
Climate Change)
Euroheat & Power - Guidelines for district heating substations (2008)
EU (1997) Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) (Directive 97/23/EC)
(Brussels: European Union)
EU (2012) Energy Efficiency Directive (EED) (Directive 2012/27/EU)
(Brussels: European Union)
Hitchin R, Embodied Carbon and Building Services (CIBSE Research Report 9, 2013)
Technical Regulations F101 – District Heating Substations – design and installation
(February 2016) Energi Foretagen/Swedish District Heating Association
HHIC (2013) Benchmark – Commissioning checklist for HIUs (Kenilworth: Heating and
Hotwater Industry Council)
HM Government BEIS Report
https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/assessment-of-the-costs-performance-
and-characteristics-of-uk-heat-networks
(BEIS 2018) https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/energy-trends-march-2018-
special-feature-article-experimental-statistics-on-heat-networks
HM Government BEIS Valuation of Energy Use and Greenhouse Gas –
Supplementary Guidance to the HM Treasury Green Book on Appraisal and
Evaluation in Central Government (2018)
HM Government BEIS (2016) Heat Network Detailed Project Development Resource
– Guidance on the economic and financial case, development of the financial model
heat pricing and maximising opportunities
HM Government BEIS (2016) Heat Network Detailed Project Development Resource
– Guidance on strategic and commercial case
HM Government BEIS (2016) Heat Network Detailed Project Development Resource
– Template Heads of Terms
HM Government BEIS (2016) Heat Network Detailed Project Development Resource
– Guidance on powers, public procurement and State Aid
HM Government BEIS (2018) Stakeholder Engagement in Heat Network - A guide for
project managers (produced by Carbon Trust)
HM Government BEIS (2016) Community-led heat projects: a toolkit for heat networks
(produced by Regen SW)
HM Government BEIS (2015) Assessment of the costs, performance and
characteristics of UK heat networks
HM Government (1999) SI 1999 No.2001 The Pressure Equipment Regulations 1999
(London: The Stationery Office)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 212 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

HM Government (2002) SI 2002 No. 2677 The Control of Substances Hazardous to

Health Regulations 2002 (London: The Stationery Office)
HM Government (2002b) SI 2002 No. 2776 The Dangerous Substances and
Explosive Atmospheres Regulations 2002 (London: The Stationery Office)
HM Government (2013) L1A: Conservation of fuel and power in new dwellings
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

(London: The Stationery Office)

HM Government (2013) L1B: Conservation of fuel and power in existing dwellings
(London: The Stationery Office)
HM Government (2013) L2A Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other
than dwellings (London: The Stationery Office)
HM Government (2013) L2B: Conservation of fuel and power in existing buildings
other than dwellings (London: The Stationery Office)
HM Government (2013) Part L Compliance Guide for Heating – Dwellings (London:
The Stationery Office)
HM Government (2013) Part L Compliance Guide for Heating – Non- Dwellings
(London: The Stationery Office)
HM Government (2014) SI 2014 No. 3120 The Heat Network (Metering and Billing)
Regulations 2014 (London: The Stationery Office)
HM Treasury – The Green Book – Central Government Guidance on Appraisal &
Evaluation (2018)
HSE (2013) L8: Approved Code of Practice Legionnaires’ disease – The control of
legionella bacteria in water systems (London: Health and Safety Executive)
HSE (2014a) HSG47: Health and Safety Guidance 47: Avoiding Danger from
Underground Services (London: Health and Safety Executive)
HSE (2014b) HSG274 Part 2: Legionnaires’ disease – The control of legionella
bacteria in water systems [this document contains technical guidance in support of L8]
(London: Health and Safety Executive)
IAM (2008) PAS 55: Publicly Available Specification for the Optimal Management of
Physical Assets (Bristol: Institute of Asset Management)
IEA (2011) District Heating and Cooling (website) IEA Annex X (International Energy
Agency). http://www.iea-dhc.org (accessed May 2012)
ISO (2004) 14001 Environmental Management Systems
ISO (2008) 9001 Quality Management Systems
ISO (2009) 31000 Risk Management
International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP)
https://evo-world.org/en/
King M, Shaw R (CHPA & TCPA 2011) Community Energy – Planning, development
and delivery
Guidelines for Connecting To Heat Networks (LB of Islington 2015)
- Part 1 - A guide for developers and building owners
- Part 2 – A guide for building services designers

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 213 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Martin-Du Pan O, Woods P, Hanson-Graville R, Recommendations for Maximum Pipe

Diameters in District Heating based on minimising operational energy (BSER&T 2018)
New Roads and Street Works Act 1991 - Code of Practice for the Co-ordination of
Street Works and Works for Road Purposes and Related Matters (2012) (Department
of Transport)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

Advice Note SA 10/05 (2005) (Highways Agency) – Supplement to New Roads and
Street Works Act 1991 - Diversionary Works
Parsloe Consulting (2018) Heat Networks Design Guide
PAS 128:2014 Specification for underground utility detection, verification and location
(BSI 2014)
PAS 256:2017 Buried assets – Capturing, recording, maintaining and sharing of
location information and data – Code of Practice (BSI 2017)
The Procurement (Scotland) Regulations 2016
https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ssi/2016/145/contents/made
Guidance on the Development of Heat Supply Agreements for District Heating
Schemes http://www.districtheatingscotland.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/02/HSA-
guidance-final-Feb-18.pdf
Varme Stabi 7th edition, 1st print 2015, published by Praxis – Nyt Teknisk Forlag
2015, see http://staabi.dk/.)
Svensk Fjärrwärme (2009) F:103-7e: Certification of district heating substations
(Stockholm: Swedish District Heating Association)

Legislation
ENGLAND
Acts and SIs
TSO (2010) The Building Regulations 2010 Statutory Instrument 2010 No. 2214
(London: The Stationery Office)
(available at http://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/2010/2214)
(accessed February 2018)

Approved Documents
NBS (2016a) Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings
Approved Document L2A (2013 edition with 2016 amendments) (Newcastle Upon
Tyne: NBS)
(available at https://www.planningportal.co.uk/info/200135/approved_documents/74/
part_l_-_conservation_of_fuel_and_power/3) (accessed February 2018)

NBS (2016b) Conservation of fuel and power in existing buildings other than dwellings
Approved Document L2B (2010 edition incorporating 2010, 2011, 2013 and 2016
amendments)
(Newcastle Upon Tyne: NBS) (available at
https://www.planningportal.co.uk/info/200135/
approved_documents/74/part_l_-_conservation_of_fuel_and_power/4)
(accessed February 2018)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 214 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

NBS (2013) Non-Domestic Building Services Compliance Guide (Newcastle Upon

Tyne: NBS)
(available at https://www.planningportal.co.uk/info/200135/approved_documents/74/
part_l_-_conservation_of_fuel_and_power/5) (accessed February 2018)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

National Planning Policy Framework (MHCLG 2012)

https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-planning-policy-framework--2

WALES

ACTS and SIs

Welsh Government (2016a) Conservation of fuel and power — New buildings other
than dwellings Approved Document L2A (2014 edition with 2016 amendments)
(Cardiff: Welsh Government)
(available at http://gov.wales/docs/desh/publications/160614building-regsapproved-
document-l2a-new-buildings-other-than-dwellings-en.pdf)
(accessed February 2018)

Welsh Government (2016b) Conservation of fuel and power — Existing buildings

other than dwellings Approved Document L2A (2014 edition with 2016 amendments)
(Cardiff: Welsh Government) (available at
http://gov.wales/docs/desh/publications/171108building-regsapproved-
document-l2b-existing-buildings-other-than-dwellings-en.pdf)
(accessed February 2018)

Note: It is understood that Wales has no Compliance Guides but refers to the English
versions.

SCOTLAND

ACTS and SIs (SSIs)

TSO (2004) The Building (Scotland) Regulations 2004 Scottish Statutory Instruments
2004 No. 406 (London: The Stationery Office)
(available at http://www.legislation.gov.uk/
ssi/2004/406) (accessed February 2018)

HANDBOOKS ETC (the equivalent of APPROVED DOCUMENTS)

Scottish Government (2017) Energy ch. 6 in Technical Handbook 2017 Non-Domestic
(Edinburgh: Scottish Government Building Standards Division) (available at http://
www.gov.scot/Topics/Built-Environment/Building/Building-standards/techbooks/
techhandbooks/th2017nondomenergy)

Note: There is a separate Technical Handbook for Domestic Buildings

Scottish Government (2015) Non-Domestic Building Services Compliance Guide for

Scotland
(Edinburgh: Scottish Government Building Standards Division) (available at http://
www.gov.scot/Topics/Built-Environment/Building/Building-standards/techbooks/
techhandbooks/ndbscg) (accessed February 2018)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 215 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

NORTHERN IRELAND
ACTS and regulations
TSO (2012) The Building Regulations (Northern Ireland) 2012 Statutory Rules of
Northern Ireland 2012 No. 192 (London: The Stationery Office) (available at
http://www.legislation.gov.uk/nisr/2012/192) (accessed February 2018)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS ETC (the equivalent of APPROVED DOCUMENTS)

DFPNI (2012) Conservation of fuel and power in buildings other than dwellings
Technical Booklet F2 (Belfast: Department of Finance (Northern Ireland)) (available at
https://www.finance-ni.gov.uk/publications/technical-booklet-f2) (accessed February
2018)

Further reading
General
ASHRAE (2016) HVAC Systems and Equipment – Chapter 51 THERMAL STORAGE
(Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning
Engineers)
ASHRAE (2013) District Cooling Guide (Atlanta, GA: American Society of Heating
Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers)
(BRE 2015) Consultation Paper – CONSP:04 Distribution loss factors for heat
networks supplying dwellings in SAP Issue 1.0
BSRIA (1996) AG20/95: Commissioning of pipework systems – design considerations
(Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (2002) AG16/2002: Variable-flow water systems – Design, installation and
commissioning guidance (Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information
Association)
BSRIA (2007) BG2/2007: Combined Heat and Power (CHP) for Existing Buildings –
Guidance on Design and Installation (Bracknell: Building Services Research and
Information Association)
BSRIA (2010) BG2/2010: Commissioning water systems (Bracknell: Building Services
Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (2013) BG 50/2013: Water Treatment for Closed Heating and Cooling Systems
(Bracknell: Building Services Research and Information Association)
BSRIA (2014) BG 45/2014: How to Procure Soft Landings (Bracknell: Building
Services Research and Information Association)
Carbon Trust (2009) CTG012: Biomass heating – A practical guide for potential users
CIBSE (2001) Guide B: Heating, ventilating, air conditioning and refrigeration (London:
Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2010) AM14: Non-domestic hot water heating systems (London: Chartered
Institution of Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE Commissioning Code B: Boilers (2002)
CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls (2001)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 216 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Management (2003)

CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigeration (2002)
CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems
CIBSE (2013) TM13: Minimising the risk of Legionnaires’ Disease
(London: Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

CIBSE (2013) TM54: Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the

design stage (London: Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers)
CIBSE (2014) AM15: Biomass heating (London: Chartered Institution of Building
Services Engineers)
Euroheat (2008) Guidelines for District Heating Substations (Brussels, Belgium:
Euroheat & Power) [Available from http://www.euroheat.org/ Technical-guidelines-
28.aspx, accessed 26 August 2014]
Frederiksen S. and Werner S. (2013) District Heating and Cooling (Lund, Sweden,
Studentlitteratur)
GLA (2014) District Heating Manual for London (London: Greater London Authority)
HSE (2014) HSG47: Avoiding Danger from Underground Services
(London: Health and Safety Executive)
HVCA (2008) TR37: Installation of Combined Heat and Power (London: Building and
Engineering Services Association)
IGEM (undated) Gas fuelled spark ignition and dual fuel engines IGEM/ UP/3 Edition 2
(Kegworth: Institution of Gas Engineers and Managers)
IGEM (2004) Application of natural gas and fuel oil systems to gas turbines and
supplementary and auxiliary-fired burners IGEM/UP/9 Edition 2 (Kegworth: Institution
of Gas Engineers and Managers)
IGEM (2005) Soundness testing and purging of industrial and commercial gas
installations IGEM/UP/1 Edition 2 (Kegworth: Institution of Gas Engineers and
Managers)
IGEM (2005) Gas installation pipework, boosters and compressors on industrial and
commercial premises IGEM/UP/2 Edition 2 (Kegworth: Institution of Gas Engineers
and Managers)
IGEM (2009) Commissioning of gas fired plant on industrial and commercial premises
IGEM/UP/4 Edition 3 (Kegworth: Institution of Gas Engineers and Managers)
IGEM (2009) Application of compressors to natural gas fuel systems IGEM/UP/6
Edition 2 (Kegworth: Institution of Gas Engineers and Managers)
NHBC Standards (2019)
National Joint Utilities Group (NJUG) Street Works UK Guidelines (Volumes 1-6)
(Street Works UK) www.streetworks.org
SAV Systems: Low Carbon System Design – a whole system approach ‘70ºC flow /
40ºC return’ [Available from http://www.sav-systems.com, accessed 25 August 2014]
UKDEA (2015) A Guide to Developing District Energy Schemes in the UK
(Cirencester: UK District Energy Association)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 217 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

Woods PS, Zdaniuk G (CIBSE Technical Symposium 2011) CHP and District Heating
- how efficient are these technologies?
Regulatory requirements
HM Government (1998) The Gas Safety (Installation and Use) Regulations 1998 (SI
1998/2451) (London: The Stationery Office). [Available from
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

http://www.legislation.gov.uk/uksi/1998/2451, accessed 25 August 2015] (London:

The Stationery Office)
HSE (2013) L8 Approved Code of Practice: Legionnaires’ disease – The control of
legionella bacteria in water systems (London: Health and Safety Executive)
HMIP (1993) Guidelines on Discharge Stack Heights for Polluting Emissions HMIP
Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1 (London: The Stationery Office)
WRAS (2000) Water Regulations Guide (Gwent: Water Regulation Advisory Service)
BS, EN and ISO Standards
Heat networks
EN 448 (2009) District heating pipes. Pre-insulated bonded pipe systems for directly
buried hot water networks. Fitting assemblies of steel service pipes, polyurethane
thermal insulation and outer casing of polyethylene
EN 488 (2013) District heating pipes – Pre-insulated bonded pipe systems for directly
buried hot water networks – Steel valve assembly for steel service pipes,
polyurethane thermal insulation and outer casing of polyethylene
EN 489 (2009) District heating pipes. Pre-insulated bonded pipe systems for directly
buried hot water networks. Joint assembly for steel service pipes, polyurethane
thermal insulation and outer casing of polyethylene
EN 15698-1 (2009) District heating pipes. Pre-insulated bonded twin pipe systems for
directly buried hot water networks. Twin pipe assembly of steel service pipe,
polyurethane thermal insulation and outer casing of polyethylene
Hot water systems
BS 7592 (2008) Sampling for Legionella bacteria in water systems. Code of practice
BS 8558 (2015) Guide to the design, installation, testing and maintenance of services
supplying water for domestic use within buildings and their curtilages
BSI EN 806-5 Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying water for
human consumption. (Operation and maintenance)
BSI (2006) BS EN 806-3 Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying
water for human consumption. (Pipe sizing - simplified method)
BSI (2010) BS EN 806-4 Specifications for installations inside buildings conveying
water for human consumption. (Installation)

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 218 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

LIST OF FIGURES
This list does not include newly inserted figures at this stage.

FIGURE 1 - TYPICAL PLAN OF WORK FOR A HEAT NETWORK PROJECT (REPRODUCED COURTESY OF PHIL JONES) ............................... 10
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

FIGURE 2 - QUEEN ELIZABETH OLYMPIC PARK, WHICH FEATURES AN 18 KM DISTRICT ENERGY NETWORK ....................................... 14
FIGURE 3 - EXISTING BUILDINGS SUPPLIED BY A NEW HEAT NETWORK – STAFFORD CRIPPS ESTATE, ISLINGTON ................................ 16
FIGURE 4 - SOME TYPICAL FEATURES OF A HEAT NETWORK (LOWER SECTION WILL BE REMOVED) .................................................. 20
FIGURE 5 - NEW BUILD HOUSING SUPPLIED BY A HEAT NETWORK – QUEEN ELIZABETH OLYMPIC PARK .......................................... 37
FIGURE 7 - INDIRECT CONNECTION PACKAGED THERMAL SUBSTATION FOR A LARGE BUILDING, PRIOR TO INSULATION ....................... 58
FIGURE 6 - EXAMPLES OF ENERGY DISPLAY DEVICES LINKED TO A HEAT METER ........................................................................... 61
FIGURE 10 - TYPICAL DWELLING HYDRAULIC INTERFACE UNIT – SHOWN WITH COVER ON AND REMOVED ........................................ 84
FIGURE 11 - TYPICAL OPTIMISATION OF PIPE SIZES ON LIFECYCLE COST BASIS ............................................................................ 98
FIGURE 12 - A TYPICAL PRE-INSULATED PIPE SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 100
FIGURE 13 - DIAGRAM OF A TYPICAL SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 101
FIGURE 14 - TYPICAL HEAT METER ................................................................................................................................. 106
FIGURE 15 - BENEFITS OF USING SHARED RISERS COMPARED TO HORIZONTAL RUNS FOR TYPICAL FLAT LAYOUTS ............................ 109
FIGURE 16 - DESIGN OF AN ENERGY CENTRE USING BIM .................................................................................................... 118
FIGURE 19 - ILLUSTRATION OF CHP MODELLING WITH THERMAL STORE OVER A 24 HOUR PERIOD .............................................. 120
FIGURE 17 - A THERMAL STORE IN OPERATION IN COVENTRY .............................................................................................. 121
FIGURE 18 - SCHEMATIC OF A POSSIBLE ARRANGEMENT OF THERMAL STORES ......................................................................... 122
FIGURE 20 - TRENCH WALL SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................................ 130
FIGURE 21 - METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING THE AVERAGE TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE FROM TWO HEAT METER READINGS ................. 140
FIGURE 22 - INSIDE THE KING’S CROSS ENERGY CENTRE ..................................................................................................... 146
FIGURE 23 - HEAT TRUST TRADEMARK ........................................................................................................................... 161
FIGURE 24 - INDIRECT SPACE HEATING AND INSTANTANEOUS HOT WATER HEATING ................................................................. 182
FIGURE 25 - INDIRECT SPACE HEATING AND HOT WATER CYLINDER (EXTERNAL PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER FOR THE HOT WATER STORAGE IS
ALSO POSSIBLE) ................................................................................................................................................ 183
FIGURE 26 - DIRECT SPACE HEATING AND INSTANTANEOUS HOT WATER HEATING .................................................................... 183
FIGURE 27 - DIRECT SPACE HEATING AND HOT WATER CYLINDER (EXTERNAL PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER FOR THE HOT WATER STORAGE IS
ALSO POSSIBLE) ................................................................................................................................................ 183
FIGURE 28 - INDIRECT SPACE HEATING AND CENTRALISED HOT WATER .................................................................................. 184
FIGURE 29 - DIRECT SPACE HEATING AND CENTRALISED HOT WATER ..................................................................................... 184
FIGURE 30 - EXTERNAL PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER AND DOMESTIC HOT WATER CYLINDER (REPRODUCED COURTESY OF ORCHARD
PARTNERS) ...................................................................................................................................................... 185
FIGURE 31 - PRIMARY SIDE HEAT STORE. NOTE: HEAT BANK PRIMARY STORE NORMALLY MAINS FED. (REPRODUCED COURTESY OF
ORCHARD PARTNERS) ........................................................................................................................................ 185
FIGURE 32 - REDUCTION IN RETURN TEMPERATURE FOR VARIABLE FLOW TEMPERATURE (COMPENSATED) AND VARIABLE VOLUME
(THROTTLED CONTROL) (REPRODUCED COURTESY OF ORCHARD PARTNERS) .................................................................. 187
FIGURE 33 - REDUCTION IN RETURN TEMPERATURE WITH LOAD FOR TWO LEVELS OF FLOW TEMPERATURE AS USED AT ODENSE,
DENMARK (REPRODUCED COURTESY OF ORCHARD PARTNERS) ................................................................................... 188
FIGURE 34 - LOAD DURATION CURVE FOR TYPICAL NEW-BUILD SCHEME OF 50 HOUSES (REPRODUCED COURTESY OF VITAL ENERGI) . 189
FIGURE 35 - THE NEW-BUILD SCHEME OF 50 HOUSES DESCRIBED BY FIGURE 29 ..................................................................... 190
FIGURE 36 – KEY MEASUREMENT POINTS ON HEAT NETWORKS ............................................................................................ 193

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 219 January 2019

 CP1.2 Updated Heat Networks Code of Practice

We would like to thank the following organisations that have contributed figures and
photographs:

• RIBA
• BEIS
This draft is provided for purposes of review only and not to be deemed as the final approved version of this title

• Max Fordham
• ENGIE
• AEACOM
• Guru Systems
• Vital Energi
• SAV Systems Ltd
• CPV Ltd
• WSP

LIST OF TABLES
This list does not include newly inserted tables at this stage.

TABLE 1 – SOME OF THE TYPICAL RESPONSIBILITIES DURING A HEAT NETWORK PROJECT .............................................................. 21
TABLE 2 - PREFERRED DESIGN TEMPERATURES FOR SIZING NEW AND REPLACEMENT BUILDING SERVICES SYSTEMS (I.E. NON-DOMESTIC
SECONDARY OR TERTIARY DWELLING SYSTEMS).......................................................................................................... 53
TABLE 3 - TYPICAL FLOW VELOCITIES FOR STEEL PIPES TO EN 253 FOR INITIAL SIZING OF EXTERNAL NETWORKS [NOTE: THESE ARE NOT
STRICT VELOCITY LIMITS, HIGHER VELOCITIES ARE ALLOWED] ........................................................................................ 56
TABLE 4 - TYPICAL FLOW VELOCITIES FOR PEX PIPES TO EN15632 FOR INITIAL SIZING OF EXTERNAL NETWORKS [NOTE: THESE ARE NOT
STRICT VELOCITY LIMITS, HIGHER VELOCITIES ARE ALLOWED] ........................................................................................ 57
TABLE 5 - DIFFERENT OPTIONS FOR OWNERSHIP AND OPERATION OF HEAT NETWORK SCHEMES (BEIS) ......................................... 71
TABLE 6 - PREFERRED DESIGN TEMPERATURES FOR SIZING NEW AND REPLACEMENT BUILDING SERVICES SYSTEMS (I.E. NON-DOMESTIC
SECONDARY OR TERTIARY DWELLING SYSTEMS).......................................................................................................... 92
TABLE 7 – KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS TO BE TARGETED AND MONITORED IN HEAT NETWORKS ............................................ 195

UPDATE 2019 Draft v7 (Public Comment) 220 January 2019